Home

Merlin Legend R1 Installation Programming and Maintenance

1. Auxiliary Equipment Music on Hold Step Console PC 1 Display Music on Hold AuxEquip F9 Soreen MusicOnHold F1 Identify line jack where music source is connec ted To specify that line jack is used for Music on Hold feature To remove Music on Hold assignment from line jack Exit Dial line trunk no 801 880 Slot and port or logical ID Enter Delete Exit Type line trunk no 801 80 slot and port or logical ID F10 F8 F5 Note If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require you to obtain such a license from AT amp T or your authorized dealer Auxiliary Equipment 4 109 Programming Procedures Loudspeaker Paging Step 1 Display Loudspeaker Page screen 2 Identify line jack where loudspeaker paging system is connected 3 To specify that line jack is used to connect loudspeaker paging system m TO remove loudspeaker paging assignment from line jack 4 To specify more loudspeaker paging line jacks maximum 3 To view loudspeaker paging system line trunk numbers and exit To exit without viewing loudspeaker paging system line t
2. FT NONTANDEM TIE TRUNK NETWORK Tie Trunk TANDEM TIE TRUNK NETWORK Od 0 NPON swepoy pue Bug seucydeje seucy seucydeje Jjseqg OL Bojeuy oL sejnpoyw eiNPOW Z O INPOW XIW 800 INPOW W300 enpo sor ay ein OL seun e940 IBUSO BieAjeosu 0BpeIUI S punaip ZH 0 OVA GOL 101310UueD Bui 1088090 00 9 IN 00089 enponw 40880901d eusjdyoeg IUN 1021u0D r l l l l l l l i l i yun 1043U0D aN3qA371 NTHIN 11 TYPICAL AC GROUNDING e e m e a e a m e e e memme From AC Noe SS ei oe el ee es Load Center e separately used 15 A Ground circuits 14 AWG 4 Box RACO 230 or equivalent yo 3 lo sr 8 a e a Pe HUBBELL Receptacles 5262 15 A A or equivalent Single Point round 4 cover RACO 807 Ground Bar or equivalent Mounted on a 4 Box Square ae FOGTA or a pproved equivalent Approved Buil ing Ground 6 AWG Copper 12 or 14 AWG Copper wire to Each Power Supply Grounding Screw Maximum length 25 feet PLUG TEST VOLTAGES 120 Volts To co Central Lines co D2R Cords Oottice co ttry Network DIW or 25 Pair Cable Wiri Line Hyi Interface H of Protector Field ___ Coupled Bondi Conductor optional J JNE Jmm mm i Serving Facility Backboard Basic Carrier BASIC CARRIER EXPANSION CARRIER BACKBOARD Mw keaa
3. The following describes how to install the MLX telephones and consoles the Multi Function Module and the Direct Station Selector Install the Multi Function Module The Multi Function Module MFM is an optional adapter for connecting tip ring T R or supplemental alert devices to any MLX telephone If you are installing an MFM do it before you install the MLX telephone The MFM provides a modular jack connection for m T R devices such as single line telephones fax machines modems credit card verification terminals cordless telephones and answering machines The MLX telephone and the adjunct that is connected to the MFM are independent and can place and receive calls at the same time The MFM is the only T R adapter used with the MLX telephones m supplemental alerts such as bells chimes horns and strobes These alerts notify people in noisy areas of incoming calls The MFM is set for T R devices or for supplemental alerts by two jumper blocks preset at the factory for T R operation The MFM comes with the following see m a KS22911 L2 power supply m a 400B or 400B2 adapter Telephones and Consoles 3 103 Installation m aD6AP cord Before installing the MFM consider the following m The KS22911 L2 power supply must be connected to an electrical outlet that is within 50 feet of cord length of the MLX telephone m f you are connecting an MFM and two Direct Station Selectors DSSs to the telephone a 3
4. mw When users receive voice mail messages the message LEDs on their telephones turn on provided that a mailbox has been assigned to each of those telephones a All VMI loop start ports should be programmed for reliable far end disconnect a Callers who dial from rotary telephones cannot use the features of the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System and should be directed to the system operator during business hours Automated Attendant can answer calls immediately Primary Call Handling or after a delay Secondary Call Handling for example when a call remains unanswered by the system operator after a certain number of rings The system may need more touch tone receivers if a Single line telephone users do not get dial tone AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls m Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage prematurely Applications 6 33 Adapters Accessories and Applications eee L_ m The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System does not work with the MERLIN Attendant m Programming of the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is done via a touch tone interface The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is equipped with an RS 232 serial port and an external modem to support remote diagnostics Hardware Requirements m MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System unit and power cords m remote maintenance device with a wall mount transformer m modem cable with a 9 pin connector at one end and a 25 pin connector at
5. Console Repeat steps 4 and 5 Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit Console Operator Queued Call Msg Center Dial extension slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter Delete 4 142 Optional Operator Features PC Repeat steps 4 and 5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 PC F3 F2 F8 Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 F8 Programming Procedures Nee Step Console PC 4 To program more operator Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 positions and 3 and 3 To exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Automatic or Manual Extended Call Completion Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 screen and select paan F2 Automatic or Manual Extended Call Completion ExendComplt F9 2 Select type of call completion for operator using DSS console m To provide QCC Automatic F1 operator with one Complete touch extended call completion m To require that QCC Manual F2 operator extend calls Complete by pressing the Release button in addition to DSS button 3 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Operator Features 4 143 Programming Procedures Return Ring Step 1 Display Queued Call screen and select Return Ring 2 Erase currently programmed number of rings and specify new number of rings 1 15 before an extended call returns 3 Save entry and exit Step 1 Display Queued Call screen and select QCC Posit
6. Continued System Programming Reports I 21 System Programming Reports mm Table l 17 Continued Button 24 21 Blank Button 23 21 Blank Button 22 21 Blank Button 20 21 Blank Button 21 z2 Blank Button 19 21 Blank Button 18 21 Blank Button 17 21 Blank Button 16 21 Blank Button 15 21 9 1 5055551611 Button 14 Button 13 Button 12 40 15 N Button 11 Button 10 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Line 802 D Line 801 lI 16 SysAcc Voice l 16 SysAcc Ring l NMAOAROIDNOCO I 22 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports A rti COE O N ON N NN Table I 18 Group Coverage Report Name Group Coverage Print Menu Choice GrpCoverage Description Extension number for each group and the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group Sample Report GROUP COVERAGE INFORMATION GROUP 1 SENDERS 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Coverage groups with no senders are not printed System Programming Reports I 23 System Programming Reports ee Table 1 19 Group Calling Report Name Group Calling Print Menu Choice Grp Calling Description Group calling options e g hunt type message waiting station etc the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group and the lines or trunks assigned to the group Sample Report DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION GROUP NO 770 Group Type AutoLogin Call Distr
7. Follow these general instructions to use features on MLX analog multiline and single line telephones To use a feature m press a dedicated feature button m press a programmed button m dial a feature code E B a feature from the display MLX display telephones only Dedicated Feature Buttons All multiline telephones have a group of dedicated feature buttons that are programmed and labeled at the factory The functions of these buttons which include Conference Transfer and Speakerphone cannot be changed Press the button for the feature you want to use Programmed Buttons See General Telephone Programming for more information on programming features onto line buttons General Feature Use F 1 General Feature Use E SES Shr Any available line button on multiline telephones can be programmed for one touch use of a feature Note Some features such as Auto Dial must be programmed onto line buttons in order to use them Other features such as Privacy should be programmed onto line buttons so that the LED next to the line button lights to show that the feature is in use Feature Codes Feature codes are 1 2 and 3 digit codes that activate features To use a feature code first press the dedicated feature button on MLX telephones or a programmed feature button on analog multiline telephones or dial on single line telephones This sends a signal to the system that a feature code is about to be dialed Th
8. Lines Pools Group Page Grp Calling Park ARS DialOut DSS Buttons ListDirctNo Block Lines Extensions Adjuncts O t P iti t Line Queued Cali Queued Call Hold Rtm RtmToQue Hold Timer RmainOnHid igs heads aus Nore inQueAItEn InQueADis Call Types j Diallo Priority Msg Center Foliow Frwd Operator UnassignDID ListedNumbr QCC Ext Retuming GrpCoverage ExtndCompit AutoComplt Retum Ring ManuaiCmp QCC Backup DLC Hold Auto Hold Enable Auto Hold Disable The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option Press Inspect or PgDn J 2 System Programming Menu Hierarchy System Programming Menu Hierarchy pon 1 0S1 jT m1 GroundStart LinesTrunks LS GS DS ype PRI TE TIE PB Unequipped Toli All Ground Ali Loop ANTE TE PB All Unequip Tot Signaling Robbed Bit Common Channel Line Comp ClockSync Priority Primary Tertiary None Source T Loop Local Activation Active Active ChanneiUnit Foreign Exchange Special Access 4axGSAS GroundStart amp xGSLS Loop Stan All Ground All Loop TIE Lines Direction Two Way OutGoing incoming Intype Wink Outtype Delay immed Auto E amp M Signal TypeiS inmode Teic Outmode Type5 Diattone AnsSupvr Disconnect TTAS Disc OutMode LS Disconn DID _ Type e Disconnect Wink ExpectDigit DeleteDigi
9. SENSU Desc iption Table 1 9 lists the capacities for features Table 1 9 Feature Capacities Feature Description Maximum Allowed Number of lists Lists Entries per list Digits per entry Number of ARS patterns Subpatterns per pattern Routes per subpattern Number of fully programmable ARS tables Entries per table Entries across all tables Default tables Callback Number of calls in queue Calling Number of groups Groups Members per group Groups per member Delay announcements per system Delay announcements per group Groups per delay announcement External alerts per group Coverage groups per group Coverage Number of groups 30 Groups Senders per group 56 small 144 large Groups per sender Receiver buttons per group 8 Groups per QCC receiver 30 QCCs cannot be members 1 38 System Capacities pystem Descri ption Table 1 9 Continued Feature Data Hunt Groups Directories Disallowed Lists Night Service Description Number of groups Members per group Groups per member Number of blocks Number of trunks System Directory m Number per system m Listings per directory Extension Directory a Number per system m Listings per directory Personal Directory m Number per system a Listings per directory Number of lists Entries per list Digits per entry Number of fax machines Groups Members per group Groups per member Emergency Allowed List entries Maximum
10. Slot and save entry port or port or logical ID logical ID Enter F10 Lines and Trunks 4 41 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 6 When copy process is Exit F5 complete Exit F5 Exit F5 4 42 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Type of DS1 Facility Step Console PC 1 Display Loop Start LinesTrunks F4 Ground Start DS1 screen S GS DS1 F1 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 in control unit that number nn number nn contains 100D and save Enter entry 3 Display Type screen and Type F1 specify facility type m For T1 facility type T1 F1 Enter F10 Go to step 4 Go to step 4 m For PRI facility type PRI F2 Enter F10 Go to step 8 Go to step 8 DS1 Facilities 4 43 Programming Procedures OOOO Step Console PC 4 If T1 selected in step 3 Select option Press function specify type of emulation for type of key for type of and save entry emulation emulation Enter F10 5 If All Ground All Loop or Goto step 8 Go to step 8 All Unequip selected in step 4 lf TIE or All Tie selected in step 4 specify transmit receive insertion loss parameter To set loss parameter TIE PBX F1 to 0 4 for tie trunks to Enter F10 another PBX and save Go to step6 Go to step 6 entry a To set loss parameter Toll F2 to 0 6 for tie trunks Enter F10 programmed for NENIEN ce Go to step 6 Go to step 6 If Ground Start Loop Go to step 6 Go to step 6 Start or Unequipp
11. Step 1 Display PRI screen and select Test Telephone Number Console PC Enter F10 NumbrToSend F3 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Console PC LinesTrunks F4 PRI F6 Test TelNum F4 PRI Facilities 4 81 Programming Procedures ne amp Step Console PC 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 that contains 100D number nn number nn module and save entry Enter If programming more than one module enter lowest slot number 3 Assign test telephone Dial telephone Type telephone number to DS1 module number nnn number nnn up to 12 digits any com nnnnn nnnn nnnnnnnnn bination of 0 through 9 4 Save entry and either program another 100D module or exit m To save entry and assign test telephone number to another 100D module If next slot numberis Next F9 sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 If next slot numberis Enter F10 not sequential Test TelNum fy Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m To save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are Exit F5 complete Exit F5 4 82 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures E gt ll _O OSOSOSOSOSOSOS C Timers and Counters Step Console PC 1 Display PRI screen RS Protocol screen and select Timers PRI F6 Protocol F6 Timers F 1 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 that contains 100D number nn number nn module and save entry Enter F10 3 If no change to setti
12. and CSU lpbk loopback Each of these is selected from the 100D module Slot screen below Error Events Error Events lists the errors for the current and previous hours for the 100D module Enter the slot number of the 100D module 5 20 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting Slot xx This screen appears Select Make a selection Error Events Status Demand Test Busy Out Reset Restore Error Events CSU lpbk Clock Exit Status Slot xx Choose Current hr or Make a selection Previous hr Current hr Previous hr This screen appears if you selected Current hr The mm dd yy hh 00 hh mm Previous hr screen is ar es T E a T identical except for the title XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX line Exit Current hr Slot xx Clock Choosing Clock from the 100D module Slot screen provides information on the clock synchronization for that module Clock Slot XX If you selected Clock this mm dd yy hh 00 hh mm screen appears Admin as Active Synch source PPM xxx Exit Maintenance 5 21 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Channel Service Unit Loopback Test Before you select the channel service unit CSU loopback test from the Slot screen you must do the following 1 Plug one end of a bantam to bantam patch cord or a loopback fixture if one is available into the EQ OUT jack on the front of the CSU This causes the CSU to either loop back the network signal or send
13. b There are locking tabs on both sides of the module cover and a screwpost on the right side of the telephone Place the tab in the slot on the left side of the telephone c Lower the cover to the right and press firmly to lock the tabs in place Both tabs must be secure d Replace and tighten the screw you removed earlier 7 Replace the desk stand and the user card tray Note If you are wall mounting an MIX 10 or MLX 10D telephone do not replace the desk stand Go to step 8 a The desk stand has two height adjustments Insert the tab at the bottom of the stand in either the low or high position b Insert the tab at the top of the stand into the corres ponding slot on the desk telephone To readjust the stand see the instructions on the bottom of the card tray 3 106 Telephones and Consoles Installation 8 Connect the telephone see a Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8 conductor large modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2 conductor small modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter and plug the other end into the modular jack of the KS22911 L2 power supply The total length of the cords connecting the power supply to the MLX telephone must be less than or equal to 50 feet A caution C d Plugging the D6AP cord into the 8 conductor large modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter can cause electrical damage to the control unit and t
14. m To save entry and assign trunk type shown on line 1 to another port number If next port number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 If next port number is Enter F10 not sequential Exit F5 LS GS DS1 F1 Repeat Repeat steps 2 5 steps 2 5 Continued 4 28 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures lye Step Console 5 Continued m To save entry and Enter return to Lines and Exit Trunks menu when all entries are complete m To view currently Inspect assigned ports on then 400 408 800 GS LS Exit module with trunk type shown on line 1 6 To program another trunk LS GS DS1 type Repeat from step 3 m When all entries are Exit complete exit PC F10 F5 PgDn then F5 F1 Repeat from step 3 F5 Dial Signaling for Loop Start Ground Start Lines or Trunks Step Console PC 1 Display Touch Tone Loop LinesTrunks F4 Start Disconnect screen and select Outward Dialing Mode OutMode TT LS Disc F3 F1 Lines and Trunks 4 29 Programming Procedures D Step 2 Select specific lines or trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console 3 Specific signaling or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 m For logical IDs 21 40 m For logical IDs 41 60 m For logical IDs 61 80 m For touch tone m For rotary dial 4 Exit Console Lines 01 20 Line 21 40 LInes 41 60 Lines 61 80 Press line button for each line trunk to turn green LED on Press line but
15. without barrier codes line trunk assignment 4 192 rotary operation 4 185 testing 3 127 Transfer audible 4 175 return time 4 173 type of 4 176 System inventory System numbering plan selection System operating conditions setting automatic maintenance bus board renumbering mode 4 13 41300 restarting the system cold start system programming position assignment system time 4 16 ___ _ _ System operator consoles 1 33 lt System operator positions 4 22 ss direct line console DLC queued call console QCC menulJ 1 menu options personal computer PC with SPM position assignment 4 12 programming commands programming screens data entry screens 4 7 lt informational screens 4 7 sd menu selection screen remote 4 2 reports l Index IN 15 Index B O SShrhrhmLmCCCC SONNS System Programming and Maintenance SPM cont d system programming console T1 TDM bus Telephone number 4 71_ _ Telephone number to send Telephone power unit 6 4 Telephones 1 26 4 97 analog multiline telephones 5 36 with BIS HFAI 4 103 assign lines trunks or pools 4 copy line trunk assignments System Programming and Maintenance IS II 6 23 sd System renumbering block renumbering DSS page buttons 4 20 si single renumbering system numbering plan selection System restarts System scree
16. 2 Identify Page button to program 1 3 and save entry 3 Identify first extension number for group of 50 or 100 extension numbers represented by Page button shown on line 1 4 20 System Renumbering Single F2 More PgUp DSS Buttons F1 Dial Page Type Page button number button number n n Enter F10 Type extension number nnnn Dial extension number Nnnn Programming Procedures a ee Step 4 Save entry and either program more page buttons or exit m To save entry and assign extensions to the next page button If next extension number is sequential If next extension number is not sequential m To save entry and exit when all entries are complete Console PC Next F9 Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 Enter F10 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 System Renumbering 4 21 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions QCC System Operator Positions Hybrid PBX Only The following applies if you want to add or delete QCC operator positions a f you want to add QCC operator positions the primary QCC operator position must be the first one you add m The primary QCC position cannot be deleted if other QCC positions are to remain in the system m f you want to delete all QCC operator positions the primary QCC operator position must be the last one that you delete before you select the Store All option in step 6 Step Console PC 1 Displ
17. 40 small 130 large 56 small 144 large 16 small 48 large 50 56 small 144 large 8 10 System can support more than 16 fax machines but those machines in excess of 16 cannot use the fax message waiting feature System Capacities 1 39 System Descri ption Table 1 9 Continued Category Description Maximum Park Codes Number of codes 8 Personal Lines Number of station endpoints 56 small 64 large Personal Number of entries per telephone 24 Speed Dial Number of entries per system 880 small Numbers 1200 large Digits per entry 28 Number of groups Members per group Groups per member Pools Number of pools trunk groups Number of trunks in a pool Pool Buttons Number of station endpoints 56 small Remote Number of barrier codes 16 Access Digits per code 4 Shared System Number of shared buttons per SA 16 Access Buttons System Number of entries per system 40 small Speed Dial up to 40 digits each 130 large 1 40 System Capacities System Description Data Capabilities The system can provide data connections between two digital data modules ISDN 7500B Data Modules between two analog modems or between an analog modem and a digital data module The system provides access to an in house host computer or to a data station on a network Data facilities include m digital data endpoints RS 232 interfaces via ISDN 7500B Data Modules m analog data endpoints ttip ring
18. ACO Functions only when the ALARM LED is lit turns on ACO LED and deactivates audible alarm clears alarm if the alarm condition has been cleared 3 36 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 19 CSU Front Panel Test J acks Jack Provides 1 1 Test points for measuring simplex current from network to critical circuits if provided 551 T1 L1 CSU The 551 T1 L1 CSU see Figure 24 performs many of the same functions as the ESF T1 CSU but it does not support B8ZS and therefore does not support the 64 kbps clear channel Also it does not support extended superframe ESF format if a network requires this format the ESF T1 CSU must be used Mount the 551 T1 L1 CSU in a relay rack in various types of cabinets or as a stand alone unit This CSU consists of the following components m chassis with top and rear cover m Signal Monitor Unit plug in m Office Repeater plug in Channel Service Unit 3 37 Installation m Fault Location Filter a factory installed option Note Before the CSU can be installed the serving telephone company must be contacted to obtain all necessary information such as services available equipment options and power on the line Also a completed Request for 1 544 Mbps End Section Characteristics form must be submitted to the telephone company Follow these procedures to install the components of the 551 T1 L1 CSU Set the Switch Options on the Signal Monit
19. Communications System a System Programming and Maintenance SPM for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System DOS Registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc t Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 6 8 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications mm A m UNIX based products a Integrated Solution Il IS II AUDIX Voice Power AVP IS II Call Accounting System CAS IS II Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IVP AA S II System Programming and Maintenance SPM IS Il Voice Messaging Systems and Touch Tone Receivers The following applications are voice messaging systems VMSs m MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System m MERLIN Attendant m AUDIX Voice Power IS II m Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS II The system provides generic and integrated voice messaging interface VMI ports The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System and AUDIX Voice Power IS II applications use streams of touch tone codes called mode codes to communicate information Applications that use mode codes must be connected to integrated VMI ports Applications such as MERLIN Attendant and Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS II that do not use mode codes connect to generic VMI ports The tip ring ports on 012 basic telephone modules are programmed to be either generic VMI or integrated VMI Applications 6 9 Adapters Accessories and Applicati
20. Function Command Console PC To remove a feature from a When When line trunk or telephone Delete Delete command command appears on appears on the screen the screen Delete F8 When When Delete Delete command command doesn t doesn t appear appear on the on the screen screen Drop Alt P To move the cursor from right to left Bksp and erase characters To save an entry and update line 1 Next of the screen with the next extension or item number Next or F9 is used only when entering information for sequentially numbered extensions or entries To return to the previous screen or menu without entering or changing information System Programming 4 9 Programming Procedures Table 4 5 Commands Applicable Only to SPM Command Function PC To activate the SPM Help option Ctrl F1 To reset the SPM program return to SPM main Ctrl F5 menu and drop the connection with the control unit Use reset when invalid characters appear on the screen If programming from a remote location the call to the system must be re established Note Do not use reset while performing a Restore procedure This will cause corruption of system programming information 4 10 System Programming Programming Procedures Programming Procedures The system programming procedures on the following pages are listed in the sequence used to program a new system The procedures not used for new system programming for example
21. Go to step 4 Press function key next to choice F2 F8 F2 Type coverage group number 1 30 nn F10 Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM Continued 4 140 Optional Operator Features Programming Procedures O Step Console PC 3 Continued If a DSS is attached m To specify that Press DSS operator receives call button for each types operator position to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To specify that Press DSS operator does not button for each receive call type operator position to make red LED flash Go to step 6 4 If a DSS is not attached Dial extension Type extension to system programming slot and slot and console or if programming port or port or with SPM identify logical ID logical ID operator position to or or program Dial 0 for Type 0 for initiating initiating operator operator 5 To specify that operator Enter F10 position receives the call type To prevent operator Delete F8 number from receiving the call type Optional Operator Features 4 141 Programming Procedures oo Step 6 To program more telephones To exit when all entries are complete Message Center Operation Step 1 Display Queued Call screen and select Message Center 2 Identify operator position to assign or remove as QCC Message Center 3 To assign operator position as QCC Message Center To remove operator position as QCC message center
22. Group Calling Step 1 Display Labeling screen and select Group Calling 2 Identify calling group to label and save entry 3 Erase current label Console PC Enter message Type message Enter Repeat from step 2 Exit Console More Labeling Grp Calling Dial extension or press DSS button for extension no Enter Drop Repeat from step 2 F5 PC PgUp F1 F4 Type extension F10 Alt P Labeling 4 225 Programming Procedures Step 4 Enter label for calling group identified in step 2 and save Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display Use template provided with the System Programming Guide or PC keyboard 5 To label another calling group When all entries are complete System Speed Dial System Step Console Enter label Enter Repeat from step 2 Exit Directory Console 1 Display Labeling screen More and select Directory and System 2 Identify dial code to add or change and save entry 3 Erase current label 4 226 Labeling Labeling Directory System Dial dial code number nnn Enter Backspace PC Tvpe label F6 Repeat from step 2 F5 PC PgUp F 1 F 1 F 1 Type dial code number nnn F10 F2 Programming Procedures a Step 4 Enter label for dial code identified in step 2 and save entry Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctu
23. Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 m lo save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are complete Exit FS System Features 4 189 Programming Procedures Disallowed Lists Assignment to Telephones Step Console PC 1 Display Disallow to List Tables F8 SSN DisallowTo F4 2 Identify disallowed list Dial list Type list 0 7 to assign to number n number n telephone s and save Enter F10 entry 3 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 4 Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign Disallowed Press DSS List to telephone button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove Disallowed Press DSS List assignment from button for each telephones telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 4 Ifa DSS is not attached Dial extension Type extension to system programming no slot no slot console or if programming and port no or and port no or with SPM identify logical ID logical ID telephone to program 4 190 System Features Programming Procedures ee L_ Step Console PC 5 To remove Disallowed List Delete F8 from telephone m To remove Disallowed Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 List on line 1 from more telephones m To remove another Exit F5 Disallowed List from Deanery F4 telephones Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 To assign Disallowed List Enter F10 to telephone and assign Repeat step 4
24. clock m To activate clock Active F1 To deactivate clock Not Active F2 4 50 DS1 Facilities Programming Procedures Step Console PC 10 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Channel Service Unit Step Console PC 1 Display Loop StaW LineTrunks ah Ground Start DS1 screen LS GS DS1 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 in control unit that number nn number nn contains 100D save Enter F10 entry and display ChannelUnit F8 Channel Service Unit screen 3 Specify type of channel unit access m For Foreign Exchange Foreign F1 Exchange m For Special Access Special F2 Access 4 Save choice then exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 DS1 Facilities 4 51 ProgrammingP rocedures Tie Trunks Tie Trunk Direction Step Console PC 1 Display Tie Lines screen LinesTrunks F4 and select Direction TIE Lines F2 Direction F1 2 Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no Type trunk no entry 801 880 801 880 If you are programming slot and port or slot and port or more than one tie trunk logical ID__ logical ID enter the lowest trunk Enter F10 number 3 Specify trunk direction m For two way direction Two Way F1 m For one way outgoing Outgoing F2 m For one way incoming Incoming F3 direction 4 52 Tie Trunks Programming Procedures S Step Console PC 4 Save choice and either program more tie trunks or exit m To save choice and specify directi
25. facilities 4 71 B channel groups 4 72 copy telephone number to send 4 77 telephone number 4 71 telephone number to send test telephone number timers and counters Prime line 1 3 ee 4 228 4 232 Print Printers 475 476 Printer DIP switch settings 3 49 572 Printer options 3 47 demand test modify for Key only operation replacement Product ordering information cies o Program logic inconsistencies Processor module Proper grounding Pulse amplitude modulation PAM 47d Pulse code modulation PCM Q Quantizing Queue over threshold 4 135 Queued call console QCC 1 36 CCCs 1 33 1 36 queue priority QCC operator to receive call types QCC operator to receive calls R Recall timer 4 184 __ O Z Redirect outside calls 4 182 Reminder Service Cancel 4 182 s_sisf Remote Access Automatic Callback 4 193 barrier codes 4 196 class of restriction with barrier codes 4 199 without barrier codes 4 194 line trunk assignment 4 192 Index IN 13 Index Remote Call Forwarding 4 128 Remote Call Forwarding and Coverage principal user for Remote maintenance Remote system i Reset 5 6 Restarting the system Restore Restore system Return ring 4 144 Ring generator RJ11 network interface 3 83 RJ14 network interface 3 683 RJ21X network interface 3 81 ss RJ2GX network interface 3 84 RJ48C X networ
26. from telephone m To remove Allowed List Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 on line 1 from more telephones m To remove another Exit F5 Allowed List from AllowTo F2 telephones Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 To assign Allowed Listto Enter F10 telephone and assign Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 Allowed List shown on line 1 to more telephones To assign Allowed List to telephone and assign another Allowed List to telephones m f next list number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 m f next list number is not sequential Ee F10 Exit F5 AllowTo F2 When all entries are complete exit 4 188 System Features Repeat steps 2 5 Exit Exit Repeat steps 2 5 F5 F5 Programming Procedures Disallowed Lists Step Console PC 1 Eee DISARON List Tables F8 Disallow F3 2 Identify specific list 0 7 Dial list number Type list and entry number 0 9 followed by number and save entry number followed by le entry number If programming more than le one entry enter lowest Enter F10 entry number 3 Erase current entry and Drop Alt P identify disallowed Dial number Type number number included in the list nnnnnnnnnnn nnnnannnnnnn 4 Save entry and either enter more items or exit m To save entry and entef next item in Disallowed List shown on line 1 a f next entry number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 a f next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential q Disallow F3
27. Accessories and Applications NN ee Call Accounting System CAS IS Il CAS collects and analyzes call information calculates the costs of calls by using rates selected by the business organizes calls by client or project and prints reports on a daily or as needed basis CAS IS II provides all the functionality of CAS Plus along with ANI For more information on the features of CAS see in this chapter m System Programming and Maintenance SPM IS II SPM is a programming package built into IS II that allows the system manager or a system technician to upgrade and maintain the system and its features and to add change or rearrange telephones Programming can be done on site or remotely The number of incoming lines and subscribers programmed for AVP or IVP AA and the number of busy hour calls determine how many voice channels are required for the user s system see Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Voice Channels Required No of Channels Lines Subscribers Busy Hour Calls Required 1 to 6 1 to 20 1 to 20 7 to 18 21 to 60 21 to 60 19 to 24 61 to 80 61 to 80 25 to 42 81 to 200 81 to 200 Over 42 201 to 300 201 to 300 Applications 6 23 Adapters Accessories and Applications IS Il also includes the following features m Dial by Name permits AVP users to call subscribers by dialing the last name of the subscriber instead of dialing the extension number Alternate Personal Greetings allows a user to reco
28. Display Group Calling Eoee one i F6 menu and select External More PgUp Alert for In Queue Alarm Grp Calling F4 Xtnl Alert F7 2 Identify calling group to Dial group Type group program and save entry calling exten calling exten sion no nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 169 Programming Procedures E __________ amp Step Console PC 3 Identify external alert to Dial extension Type extension assign for in queue alarm slot and x slot and for calling group port logical port or ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no 4 To remove external alert Delete F8 as in queue alarm for calling group m To remove external Exit F5 ae soot another Xtnl Alert F7 ee E Repeat steps Repeat steps 24 24 To assign external alert as in queue alarm for another calling group m f next group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 m f next group extension Enter F10 number is not Exit F5 sequential Xtnl Alert F7 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 170 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures E Group Type Step Console PC 1 Display Group Calling Extensions F6 menu and select Group More PgUp Type Grp Calling F4 More PgUp Group Type F1 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling program and save entry group exten group ex
29. Exit complete Exit Remote Access Automatic Callback Step Console 1 Display Remote Access LinesTrunks screen and select RemoteAccss Automatic Callback queueing Auto Queueing System PC F9 Repeat step 3 F10 F1 Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 F5 PC F4 F8 F6 Features 4 193 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Specify Automatic Callback use m lo allow Remote Enable F1 Access users to use Automatic Callback feature m To prevent Remote Disable F2 Access users from using Automatic Callback feature 3 Save your choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Remote Access Without Barrier Codes Class of Restriction Step Console PC 1 Display Remote Access LinesTrunks F4 DISA menu Remote F8 Access m TO program non tie Non TIE F2 lines m TO program tie trunks TIE Lines F3 4 194 System Features Programming Procedures Step 2 To change current call restrictions To remove restrictions w To restrict from making outside calls local and toll m To restrict from making toll calls To change ARS facility restriction level FRL m Erase current level assign new ARS FRL 0 6 and save your entry To assign Allowed Lists m Identify Allowed List 0 7 you want to assign m To assign another list m To view all lists assigned and Exit m To return to Remote Access menu without viewing lists Continued Console Restriction Unrestrcted E
30. Make a selection Choose the port you want Line Trunk Modem Station RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 Exit Line Trunk and Station Selections Choosing Line Trunk or Station gives you three options Status Busy Out and Restore Line Trunk or Station Status Select Line Trunk to pull up the following screen The steps to review the status of a station are the same as in the line trunk procedure Maintenance 5 23 Maintenance and Troubleshooting eee lt _ lt Line Trunk Enter the dial plan line Enter line number number for a particular line trunk and mess Enter XXXX Backspace Exit Enter Select Status Line Trunk xxxx Make a selection Status Busy Out Restore This screen appears with the current line trunk status Dial Plan XXXX information Label XXXXXXXXXX Maintenance Busy Line xxxx Exit This is the screen for station status information Station xxxx Dial Plan xxxx Profile Maintenance Busy Exit Line Trunk or Station Busy Out This allows you to busy out an individual line or station without affecting an entire module Note A telephone on a busied out line cannot be accessed The system provides a busy signal and as applicable a busy message to any incoming calls However when a queued call console QCC is busied out calls to that QCC remain in queue until the QCC is restored or the caller disconnects 5 24 Maintenan
31. One outlet must have an attached ground bar connected by a 6 AWG copper wire to an approved ground This ground bar is the system s single point ground see Table 2 5 contains the AC power requirements and specifica tions for the CU Table 2 5 AC Power Requirements Parameter Value Unit Voltage range 99 129 The system will bridge a 40 ms AC power supply outage without DC voltages being affected 2 8 Power and Grounding Preparation Each carrier requires one outlet receptacle Additional AC outlets may be required for auxiliary equipment All AC outlets must be connected to the same load center and must have the ground wire connected to the single point ground bar on the first AC outlet see If a printer or a PC is installed with the system it must be plugged into the same AC branch as the power supply module of the basic carrier If the printer or the PC is 50 or more feet from the CU asynchronous data units ADUs must be installed See Chapter 3 Installation for procedures for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer and PC installations A CAUTION The AC outlet for the CU should not be switch controlled Plugging the CU into an outlet that can be turned on and off by a switch invites accidental disconnection of the system The AC outlet must be properly wired see AC Outlet Tests below AC Outlet Tests The system must be connected to a properly grounded AC outlet The two method
32. Repeat steps 8 10 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 10 Continued m To allow telephone to Enter F10 forward calls to outside numbers when all entries are compiete 11 Exit Exit F5 Optional Telephone Features 4 131 Programming Procedures E Optional Operator Features Operator Hold Timer Step 1 Display Operator screen and select Hold Timer 2 Erase current number of seconds and enter new number of seconds 3 Save entry and exit Console Operator Hold Timer Drop PC F3 F3 Alt P Dial number of Type number of seconds nnn seconds nnn Enter Exit F10 F5 Direct Line Console Automatic Hold Option Step 1 Display Operator screen and select DLC Hold 2 Enable or disable Automatic Hold m To enable Automatic Hold m To disable Automatic Hold 3 Save entry and exit Console Operator DLC Hold Auto Hold Enable Auto Hold Disable Enter Exit 4 132 Optional Operator Features PC F3 F4 F1 F2 F10 F5 Programming Procedures Hold Return Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 ae and select Hold opel aa F2 Hold Rtrn F1 2 Set Hold Return m To specify that calls Return to F1 hold return to QCC Queue queue when hold timer expires twice m To specify that calls Remain on F2 remain on hold on Hold QCC position after hold timer expires twice 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional
33. Requires a protection unit System Description DS1 Capabilities A Digital Signal One DS1 facility is a transmission system that transports digital signals in the DS1 format The interface that allows the connection of DS1 facilities to the system is the 100D module Through this module voice and data calls can be placed on or received by a DS1 facility Twenty four Digital Signal Zero DSO channels each operating at 64 kbps plus framing bits are multiplexed forming a DS1 signal of 1 544 Mbps Each DSO channel within the DS1 signal corresponds to a logical endpoint Even though there is only one physical jack the 100D module supports up to 24 logical endpoints or ports one for each channel In DS1 format calls to other digital PBXs or COs remain digital and signals do not need to be converted to analog for acceptance by the connecting trunk In addition the 100D module can be configured to work with T1 or Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI service To connect the 100D module to an outside DS1 facility a channel service unit CSU is used The CSU regulates the transmission into and out of the 100D module so that the module matches the transmission of the outside facility Both ends of the DS1 facility must be able to speak the same language To ensure this the following options are set during system programming to match the transmission of the outside DS1 facility m type of s
34. Restart or Board Renumber are also included and are listed in System Programming menu order Each of the programming procedures assumes that you are connected on site or that you have established a remote connection to the control unit and that the System Programming menu is displayed Each procedure begins and ends with the System Programming menu For detailed information on system programming preparation and programming basics review Chapters 1 and 2 of System Programming Before you program changes to new system review Chapter 3 of System Programming which identifies the initial programming procedures the sequence that should be followed and the system forms necessary to plan and program each option If you are using a PC with SPM to program the system back up the system programming information on a disk using the backup procedure in this chapter Before you make changes to an established system read Chapter 4 of System Programming update the appropriate planning forms to reflect the changes you are making and if you are using a PC with SPM to make changes to the system back up the current system programming information on a disk using the backup procedure in this chapter If system programming was performed using a surrogate switch or if system programming was lost or corrupted due to a malfunction use the Restore procedure in this chapter to load the backup system programming information into the system s memory P
35. System Programming Reports E o Table l 1 Continued SMDR Min Call Time CallReport Format 20 sec In Out Basic Intercom Dial Tone Inside Reminder Service Cancel 18 00 Behind Switch Code Drop Transfer Conference Recall timer l 450 msec Rotary Line Cut Thru Delay Unassigned Extension 10 Slot 1 008 MLX Slot 2 408 GS LS Slot 17 Not Used System Programming Reports I 3 System Programming Reports mm Table l 2 Dial Plan Report Name Dial Plan Print Menu Choice Dial Plan Description Extensions assigned to pools paging zones calling groups lines trunks and stations Labels for lines trunks and stations Sample Report DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS POOL 1 70 POOL 11 899 DIAL PLAN FOR TELEPHONE PAGING ZONES TPZ T 793 TPZ 7 799 DIAL PLAN FOR DIRECT GROUP CALLING GROUPS DCGG 1 770 SALES DGCC 32 7929 SYSTEM DIAL PLAN DIAL PLAN FOR LINES TRUNKS LINE 1 801 CO LINE 2 802 CO LINE 3 803 WATS LINE 4 804 WATS Information is included for all available line trunk jacks in control unit DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN 1 10 WAYNE STN 2 11 MIKE STN 4 12 CONF STN 5 13 MARY Information is included for all available station jacks in control unit I 4 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports E i i_ CNNON N Table l 3 Label Information Report Name Label Information Print Menu Choice Labels Description Labels assigned to stati
36. The CAS Plus application does the following m Call Record Processing Screens call records calculates the cost of valid calls and stores the call records m Report Generation Prints the stored call record information reports a Summary Reports provide condensed information such as the number of calls duration and cost a Organization Detail Report shows departmental telephone activity allowing isolation of how specific extensions are used e Selection Report allows specification of report criteria so that only call records that meet the criteria appear on the report a Account Code Detail Report lists every call associated with each account code entered by users a Facility and Cost Center Reports show the distribution of line trunk usage over organizations or cost centers Applications 6 11 Adapters Accessories and Applications ee 6 m Preselected Reports provide a choice of up to five reports from any of the other report categories and can be printed on demand or at a specified time and date m System Management lets the system manager do administrative tasks such as editing tables setting up reports and keeping call rate information up to date m Directory Lookup and Message Center lets the user look up anyone in the organization by name or extension leave a message and print or display messages Other features of CAS Plus include mprocessing of local and short duration calls or only calls that excee
37. When the system is completely installed follow the steps in the sequence below to turn on the power to the power supply module 1 For each power supply module and auxiliary power unit see Install the Auxiliary Power Unit earlier in this chapter plug the AC line cord into the AC outlet Set the power switch on the power supply modules to ON for all expansion carriers The green power lights on the expansion carriers power supply modules go on Set the power switch on the basic carriers power supply module to ON The green light on the power supply module goes on The red light on the processor module goes on for 15 to 45 seconds and then goes off If the system is operating properly you will see the following indicators The green power lights on all the power supply modules remain on The red warning light on the processor module goes on for 15 to 45 seconds during power up and then goes off All indicators on the 100D and 400EM modules if present go on and then off They remain off when the modules are idle lf any of these conditions are not present see Chapter 5 The Control Unit 3 17 Installation Shut the Power Off During installation you may need to shut the power off for troubleshooting or because you need to add something to the carrier A CAUTION Follow the steps in exact sequence 1 Turn off the power at the power supply module in the basic carrier 2 Turn off
38. a PC running SPM To print a hard copy of the Highlight LPT1 report Enter To print reports to a hard disk m If print file does not Highlight exist MAKE NEW FILE Enter m To save to default Enter file name m To save to file name Highlight file of your choice name Enter Continued Backup Restore and Print 4 235 Programming Procedures Step Console 5 Continued m If print file exists To print reports to a floppy disk m If print file does not exist To save to default file name To save to file name of your choice m f print file exists 6 Return to System Exit Programming Menu 4 236 Backup Restore and Print PC Highlight file name Enter Highlight GOTO FLOPPY Enter Highlight MAKE NEW FILE Enter Highlight file name Enter Highlight file name Enter F5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintenance The purpose of maintenance is to detect report and clear problems quickly with minimum disruption of service To do this the system isolates troubles to a single replaceable module whenever possible To isolate problems the control unit CU runs automatic diagnostic auditing and monitoring tests Errors found by the automatic tests go into error logs In addition demand tests can be run by using an MLX 20L telephone or a PC with System Programming and Maintenance SPM software Notification of trouble comes from users who report problems or from alarm
39. f Enter all entries are 7 Exit complete Exit 4 68 DID Trunks PC F4 F4 F4 Type trunk block number n F10 Alt P Type added digits nnnn F9 Repeat step 3 F10 F5 F5 Programming Procedures TT E F5G35 s amp s Signaling Step Display DID Trunks screen and select Signaling 2 Identify trunk block 1 or 2 and save entry 3 Specify DID trunk signaling type m For rotary signaling m For touch tone signaling 4 Save choice and either program the other trunk block or exit m To save choice and specify signaling for the other trunk block m To save choice and exit when all entries are complete Console PC LinesTrunks F4 DID F4 Signaling F8 Dial trunk block Type trunk number n block number Enter n F10 Rotary F1 TouchTone F2 Next F9 Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 DID Trunks 4 69 Programming Procedures Invalid Destination Step 1 Display DID Trunks screen and select Invalid Destination 2 Specify invalid destination of calls to unassigned numbers m To redirect to backup extension m To specify fast busy signal 3 Save choice and exit 4 70 DID Trunks Console LinesTrunks DID InvalDstn Send to Backup Extension Return Fast Busy Enter Exit Exit PC F4 F4 F9 F1 F2 F10 F5 F5 Programming Procedures TT E PRI Facilities Telephone Number Step Console PC 1 Dis
40. home base of the display screen on digital ISDN telephones which shows time date and call information and when a feature is in use house cable Cable that runs from the equipment room to a small walk in closet called a satellite closet elsewhere in the building Hybrid PBX A mode of operation in which the communications system uses trunk pools and Automatic Route Selection ARS in addition to personal lines that is direct facility terminations DFTs on line buttons The Hybrid PBX mode also provides a single interface to users for both internal and external calling immediate start tie trunk A tie trunk on which no start signal is necessary and dialing can begin immediately after the tie trunk is seized in band signaling See robbea bit signaling Glossary inside dial tone A tone users hear when they are connected to an intercom line Inspect screen A display screen on digitalISDN telephones that allows users to preview incoming calls and see a list of the features programmed on line buttons integrated access The use by customers of voice data images and fax simultaneously on an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A public or private network that provides end to end digital connectivity for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user network interfaces defined by the CCITT I
41. m CAS software CAS H CAS Plus Installation CAS can be installed by using the instructions supplied with the product Highlights of these instructions areas follows 1 Set up the equipment and identify the PC and MS DOS software needed for CAS 2 Complete the worksheets Be sure the four CAS worksheets show all information you need on telephone lines and extensions calling patterns and processing options and departments and personnel 3 Install the software Load and test MS DOS version 3 3 or later and the CAS application 4 Enter the worksheet information Use the planning worksheets to adjust the software to meet the needs of the customer Applications 6 13 Adapters Accessories and Applications OK Product References m Call Accounting System Plus Business installation Guide m Call Accounting System Hospitality Installation Guide Call Accounting Terminal The Call Accounting Terminal CAT is a stand alone application that provides accurate and flexible call accounting at a low cost Two versions of this product are offered CAT Hospitality for hotels and health care facilities and CAT Business for other types of businesses The CAT has built in intelligence and memory for collecting and organizing call information including the duration of calls the area code dialed and the account charged The CAT is customized with the latest local and long distance rates for a company s location so the
42. m Pager Notification calls the user at a designated pager number when a new message is received However the user cannot log in to the voice messaging system a Broadcast Lists allows the system administrator to send a message to every user on the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System However this message does not light message waiting LEDs and does not cause ouitcalling m Fax Transfer directs an incoming fax call to a designated fax station a single machine or a calling group with several machines Announcement Service allows a caller to enter a code for information about specific subjects such as new product information or marketing programs 6 32 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications M OUl iSO Considerations m The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System cannot be connected to a system in the Behind Switch mode m The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is available in 2 port and 4 port configurations Both models have four hours of message storage capacity mw Only four ports on the same 012 basic telephone module can be used simultaneously with the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System When four ports are used for the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System only one other port can be connected to a telephone w The size of a users mailbox that is the number of minutes of messages that a mailbox can hold can be matched to individual needs A mailbox can be set up to hold a maximum of 15 minutes of messages
43. m To save entry and Next F9 specify expected digits Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 for the other trunk block m To save and exit when Enter F10 all entries are Exit F5 complete Exit F5 4 66 DID Trunks Programming Procedures mm Delete Digits Step Console PC 1 Display DID trunks LinesTrunks F4 Screen and select Delete DID F4 Digits Delete F6 Digit 2 To specify trunk block Dial trunk block Type trunk 1 or 2 and save entry number n block number Enter n F10 3 Erase current number of Drop Alt P deleted digits and specify Dial number of Type number of new number of digits to deleted digits deleted digits delete 0 4 n n 4 Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit m To save entry and Next F9 specify deleted digits Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 for the other trunk block m To save and exit when Enter F10 all entries are complete Prst na Exit F5 DID Trunks 4 67 Programming Procedures TT E KMhah slr ttt Add Digits Step Console 1 Display DID Trunks Tinea Trunks screen and select Add Digits Bali Add Digits 2 Identify trunk block 1 or Dial trunk block 2 and save entry number n Enter 3 Erase current added Drop digits and specify new Dial added digits to add 1 9999 digits nnnn 4 Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit m To save entry and Next specify digits to add Repeat step 3 for the other trunk block m To save and exit when
44. memory address and press Enter Maintenance and Troubleshooting Oxaaaaaaaa Enter data This screen appears and aa Hex you can enter any changes Enter you want to make Press Backspace Exit Enter when you are done Slot 00 System Erase If you selected System System will be down Erase this screen appears Do you want to continue Choose Yes or No ser Remember that System Erase wipes out the Exit system s memory System Erase If you chose to continue Full default Restarting with System Erase this screen appears Restore You must restore a module after a demand test has been run and after a module has been replaced Slot jat After entering the slot Make a selection number for the module this Status Demand Test screen appears Choose Busy Out Reset Restore Restore f Exit Maintenance 5 19 Maintenance and Troubleshooting rr hhh This screen appears and indicates that restore is in Restore in Progress progress Restore Slot xx Restore Slot xx When restore is successfully completed Restore Complete this screen appears If the restore fails this screen appears indicating Restore FAILED a board mismatch a Boare Mismatch different module from the one replaced has been Exit inserted in the slot Restore Slot xx 100D Module Selections The 100D module has three slot selections that are unique Error Events Clock
45. mode E ability to terminate a data call or dialing sequence when the data module turns off its Data Terminal Ready lead 3 70 Data Adapters Installation wo o m ability to turn off the Data Set Ready or Receive Line Signal detect lead for a minimum of 50 ms when hanging up at the termination of a data call m ability to turn on the Ring indicator lead for at least 100 ms in the presence of an incoming analog call m supports Electronic Industries Association EIA signals Cl and Cl2 if the modem is multispeed Note AT amp T model 2224G PEC 2224 CEO for stand alone PEC 2224 GED for rack mounting arrangement is recommended Option Settings Requirements The options set on a modem and a data module in a modem pool differ depending on whether the modem pool is digital to analog or analog to digital Following are the options required for the modem and data module for each type of modem pool See the user manuals provided with the modem and the ISDN 7500B Data Module for instructions on how the options are set and the meaning of each option Digital to Analog Modem Pool Option Settings Data Module Option Settings Use the following procedure to prepare the ISDN 7500B Data Module for operation in a digital to analog modem pool 1 Use the instructions provided in the 7500B user manual to set the DCE DTE flip board to the DTE position 2 Use the front panel controls on the 7500B to set the options on the display see T
46. or select Delete F8 to remove calls from QCC shown on line 1 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Trunks to Pools Assignment HybridPBX Only Step Console PC 1 Display Pools screen LinesTrunks F4 Pools F9 4 38 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Identify Pool to program Dial pool dial Type pool dial and save entry out code out code nnnn nnnn Enter F10 3 Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 ines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 ines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Tines 61 80 FA 4 Assign or remove trunks from pool m To assign trunks to Press line Press function pool button for each key for each trunk to turn red trunk to make LED on letter R appear on screen m To remove trunks from Press line Press function pool button for each key for each trunk to turn red trunk to erase LED Off letter R Note An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign the trunk to a pool or select Delete F8 to remove the trunk from the pool Lines and Trunks 4 39 Programming Procedures a i Step Console PC 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Copy Line Trunk Options Step Console PC 1 Display Line Trunk Copy LinesTrunks F4 men Co
47. signal Faulty cable Far end not disconnected within 4 minutes Replace the feature module If problem persists check or replace processor module Replace the feature module If problem persists check or replace processor module Swap the positions of similar line trunk and station modules If the problem follows the module replace the line trunk and station module If the problem stays at that position test the line trunk Check far end for proper operation and programming Check for faulty cable Replace the line trunk and station module as needed Check far end for proper operation and programming Check for faulty cable Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Screen Description ON HOOK BEFORE WINK ON HOOK BEFORE READY INTERDIGIT TOO SHORT BAD UPDATE Possible Cause a Far end went on hook before handshake was completed on an outgoing tie trunk with delay dial or wink start or on a DID trunk with wink start a Far end went on hook before guard time elapsed on an outgoing tie trunk with delay dial start or wink start or on DID trunk with delay dial start or wink start Noisy line Invalid trunk parameter Solution If problem persists check tie trunk configuration Check the far end for proper working and translation Check for faulty cable Replace the line trunk and station module as needed Check the far end for prope
48. signal of other means of automatic disconnect such as voice reset disconnect timer fixed recording time Adjuncts LS or GS LS T R 02 or 008 OPT Station Jack MLX ATL ATL Station Station Station Jack Jack Jack Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Requires Universal Paging Access Module UPAM to provide 48 VDC Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Must order through Sourcebook Adjuncts B 3 Adjuncts Table B 1 Continued Equipment Type Cordless telephone Credit card verification terminal Dial dictation Direct Station Selector B 4 Adjuncts Specifications Must have touch tone dialing capabilitiy when connected via MFM rotary or touch tone dialing can be used on T R port Single line Must have touch tone dialing capability when connected via MFM rotary or touch tone dialing can be used on T R port A device that requires contact closure can be used on LS GS line jack only with UPAM A maximum of two DSSs can be connected to a console A 329A power unit must be added to a console having two DSSs Connects to DSS jack on console AT amp T Products 5320 cordless Telephone 5200 Cordless Telephone 5500 cordless Telephone 3156 DCB black 3156 DCW white Adjuncts Interface 012 or 008 OPT Station Station Station Station Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Must order through Sourcebook 2 Device originates and receives c
49. telecommunications costs Call Accounting Terminal CAT A vendor supplied stand alone unit with a built in microprocessor and data buffer that provides simple call accounting at a low cost Callback queue The queue used to hold Callback callers who have requested a busy pool or extension calling group A team of agents who answer the same types of calls Call Management System CMS A DOS based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering and distributing calls CMS also produces management reports for call analysis campus cable Cable that runs between buildings connected to the same communications system central office CO The location of telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling central processor The part of a computer that interprets and executes instructions Also called central processing unit Centrex A set of communications system features a user can subscribe to on telephone lines from the local telephone company channel A telecommunications transmission path for voice and or data channel service unit CSU Equipment used at a customer s premises to provide DS1 facility terminations and signaling compatibility checksum The sum of ones ina sequence of ones and zeros used to detect or correct errors in data transmission Glossary GL 5 Glossar
50. violation bipolar violation A condition that occurs when two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession See also bipolar 8 zero substitution and bipolar signal bit binary digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible values zero or one bit rate The speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bits per second Also called data rate See also baud and bits per second GL 4 Glossary bits per second bps The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per second See also baudland bit rate blocking A condition in which end to end connections cannot be made on calls because of a full load on all possible services and facilities broadband A transmission path having a bandwidth greater than a voice grade channel bus A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations button A key on the face of a telephone or console that is used to access a line activate a feature or enter a code on a communications system byte A sequence of bits usually eight processed together Octet is used instead of byte in CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee documentation Glossary C Call Accounting System CAS A vendor supplied DOS or UNIX based application that monitors and manages
51. 40 viii 3 25 CSU Rear Panel Pin Assignments 3 44 3 27 AT amp T 475 476 Printer DIP Switch Settings 3 49 3 28 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for Digital to Analog Modem Pool Operation 3 72 3 29 Modem Option Setting for Digital to Analog Modem Pool Operation 3 73 3 30 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for Analog to Digital Modem Pool Operation 3 74 3 31 Modem Option Setting for Analog to Digital Modem Pool Operation 3 75 3 33 _ CO Network Interface Codes 3 80 3 34 _Insert Labels 3 97 4 Programming Procedures 4 1 SPM Main Menu Options 4 4 4 2 System Programming Menu Options 4 5 4 3 Commands Using Fixed Buttons 4 8 4 4 Commands Appearing on the Screen 4 9 4 5 Commands Applicable Only to SPM 4 10 Tables rr 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 1 Line Trunk Errors 5 44 5 2 Maintenance Problems and Solutions 5 46 6 Adapters Accessories and Applications 6 1 TTRs Required by VMS 6 10 6 2 Voice Channels Required 6 23 6 3 Number of Attendants 6 28 6 4 MERLIN MAIL Ports Required 6 32 EEE SeSe A 1 LS GS LS DID and OPT 6 Position Jacks A 2 A 2 Tie Trunk and DS1 PR1 8 Position Jacks A 2 A 3 Tie Line Jack to RJ2GX Network Interface A 3 A 4 T R Analog Multiline Telephone and MLX 8 Position Station Jacks A 4 A 5 Eight Pin RS 232 Flow Control Cable A 5 EE B Adjuncts B 1 Adjunct Types and Specifications B 2 CUSTOMER WARNING This manual is designed for use by qualified service
52. All button is needed so that calls can be answered automatically m to make and receive calls on the telephone while using a computer or modem that is attached to the GPA This is called simultaneous voice and data ISDN 7500B Data Module See ISDN 7500B Data Module in Chapter 3 Multi Function Module See Install the Multi Function Module in Chapter 3 6 2 Adapters Adapters Accessories and Applications T eO I Supplemental Alert Adapter An SAA allows the connection of an extra alerting device such as a bell or chime to an analog muitiline telephone Alerts notify people working in noisy areas of incoming transferred and inside calls Note The MFM allows the connection of alerting devices to an MLX telephone Follow these steps to install an SAA see Figure 68 1 Plug the telephone cord into the jack labeled Telephone 2 Plug the cord from the external alert device into the jack labeled ALERTER 3 Plug the cord from the station jack into the jack labeled Control Unit Unusable Adjuncts and Adapters The following analog telephone adjuncts and adapters are not to be used with the system and in some cases will damage the device or the system if connected w Basic Telephone and Modem Interface BTMI Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 BTMI 2 ATR Interface ATRI MTR Interface MTRI Off Premises Extension Unit OPX System 25 Direct Extension Selector DXS Adapters 6 3 Ada
53. Code Handsets and Cords continued Handset amplified 31053 push to listen Black 106382344 K8S2 003 White 106382369 K8S2 264 Misty cream 106382351 K8S2 215 Handset cord 9 black n a 105635429 H4DU 003 9FT Handset cord 9 white n a 105701809 H4DU 264 9 BULK Handset cord 12 white n a 102402609 H4DU 264 12 IP Handset cord 12 black n a 102401445 H4DU 3 12FT IP Handset cord 25 black n a 105523886 H4DU 3 25 DSS line cord 2 n a 106187545 CORD D8AC 87 Desk Stands and Use Trays Stand large black n a 846320851 STAND LARGE BL Stand large white n a 846320844 STAND LARGE WH Stand small black n a 846320810 STAND SMALL BL Stand small white n a 846320802 STAND SMALL WH User tray black n a 846320240 USER TRAY DWR B User tray white n a 846320232 USER TRAY DWR W C 12 Product Ordering Information Product Ordering Information mmm ee Component PEC Comcode App Code Designation Button Assignment Cards and Covers Designation card n a 106448707 KIT D182459 PRT MLX 10 MLX 10D Designation card MLX 20L n a 106448723 KIT D182461 PRT Designation card MLX 28D n a 106448715 KIT D182460 PRT Designation card sett DSS n a 106448756 KIT SET DSS Designation card coverst n a 106448731 KIT D182462 PRT DSS black Designation card coverst n a 106448749 KIT D182463 PRT DSS white Designation card sett QCC n a 106561673 KIT D182562 PRT Designation card covers n a 10644868
54. Connect the network cord to the CSU in one of the following ways m directly to the wire wrap connector see Table 3 14 m with a special cable adapter to the NET 15 pin male connector see Table 3 16 Channel Service Unit 3 31 Installation Table 3 13 100D Module Pin Assignments Designation RCV tip Table 3 14 Wire Wrap Connector Pin Assignments shield ground shield ground transmit data to the DTE ring receive data from the DTE tip receive data from the network tip transmit data to the network ring co shield ground N PO shield ground marg transmit data to the DTE tip NO oO receive data from the DTE ring NO o gt receive data from the network ring 3 32 Channel Service Unit Installation a I OSst CO O O O O C Table 3 14 Continued Pin No Signal 28 transmit data to the network tip 30 external ACO input 31 audible com 32 audible N C with ACO 33 audible N O with ACO 5 35 visual N C no ACO 36 visual N O no ACO Table 3 15 DTE 15 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 11 transmit data to the DTE ring Channel Service Unit 3 33 Installation Table 3 16 Network 15 Pin Connector Pin Assignments transmit data to the network tip receive data from the network tip a shield ground pe transmit data to the network ring T receive data from the network ring shield ground Front Panel The
55. DS1 facility to the CSU Some adapters connect directly to the CU system adapters while others connect to telephones telephone adapters See Chapters 3 and 6 for the installation procedures for these adapters m system adapters a ESF T1 CSU a 551 T1 L1 CSU a Universal Paging Access Module UPAM m telephone adapters a Multi Function Module MFM for digital telephones a General Purpose Adapter GPA for analog telephones a ISDN 7500B Data Module for connecting digital data equipment either directly to the CU or to an MLX telephone for simultaneous voice and data transmission modem for connecting digital equipment such as a personal computer PC to a tip ring T R interface Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA for connecting alerts such as horns or strobes to an analog multiline telephone 1 34 Adjuncts and Adapters oystem Descri ption System Capacities The system comes in two sizes large and small The large system supports up to 80 central office CO lines trunks and 144 stations such as telephones and fax machines and the small system supports up to 24 CO lines trunks and 56 stations The size of the system is determined by its memory capacity that is the processor module including the feature module located in the control unit CU The large system has a total capacity of 224 jacks 80 CO lines trunks plus 144 stations however each MLX module station jack supports two logical endpoints stat
56. Data Module Multi Function Module MFM or Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA General Purpose Adapter A GPA permits the attachment of a tip ring T R device such as a single line telephone modem or answering machine to an analog multiline telephone The device must be touch tone not rotary Adapters 6 1 Adapters Accessories and Applications i _ ee Note The GPA is intended for answer only service Calls must be originated dialed by using the associated analog multiline telephone The GPA has no touch tone receivers or pulse dial detectors for dialing Plug one end of a 4 pair cord into the V T jack on the back of the GPA and the other end into the OTHER jack on the underside of the telephone Plug the cord from the adjunct into the TEL EQUIP jack on the GPA see Slide the switch on the back of the GPA to the setting that provides the GPA service required m Basic This setting is used to dial and answer calls from an analog multiline telephone or to attach a T R adjunct such as a single line telephone answering machine or fax machine Incoming calls ring only on the analog multiline telephone m Join This setting is used to add a recording device or a single line telephone to a call that is in progress on the telephone You cannot originate or answer calls on this setting m Automatic This setting is used in two ways m with a device such as an answering machine or a modem to answer calls An Auto Answer
57. ESF T1 CSU s front panel consists of LEDs controls and test jacks see Figure 23 Tables and show the functions of these items 3 34 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 17 CSU Front Panel LEDs LOCAL POWER Network Side FAR END LOOPED CRITICAL PWR PULSES FRAME LOSS NEAR END LOOPED ALARM Color Yellow Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Red When Lit Indicates Local 117 VAC or 48 VDC is ON Far end CSU looped if initiated by near end CSU Power is on to critical circuits Normal incoming signal from network Loss of signal loss of frame synch improper frame sequence or unframed signal CRC error detected Non B8ZS violation detected when optioned for B8ZS other bipolar violations detected Loopback is activated BER threshold exceeded associated contacts for an audible alarm are also activated Channel Service Unit 3 35 Installation Table 3 17 Continued System Side LOOPED Yellow Loopback activated on system side FRAME LOSS Red Loss of signal loss of frame synch improper frame sequence or unframed signal LOW DENS Red Avg ones density below threshold or consecutive zeroes threshold Yellow Lights when ACO button is pressed when ALARM LED Is lit Table 3 18 CSU Front Pane l Controls Pe ee ae LOOPBACK Loops the incoming signal from the system to the system SENDCODE Sends loop up or loop down code to far end CSU
58. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Customer Support Information xxiii Customer Support Information Limitation Of Liability EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY DIRECT DAMAGES TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY PROXIMATELY CAUSED BY AT amp T AND LIABIILITY OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY ASSUMED IN A WRITTEN AGREEMENT SIGNED BY AT amp T THE LIABILITY OF AT amp T ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS FOR ANY CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES OR EXPENSES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THIRD PARTIES REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE LESSER OF THE DIRECT DAMAGES PROVEN OR THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM IN NO EVENT SHALL AT amp T OR ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS OR AUTHORIZED RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL RELIANCE CONSEQUENTLY OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH THE SYSTEM THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF neue REMEDY SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY xxiv Customer Support Information J O O About This Book This book provides technical information about the operation and installation of the communications system It is intended for qualified technicians who install maintain and repair the communications system Related Documentation The following books are available to h
59. Enter floppy m If backup file does not Press down exist arrow to highlight New File Enter Type file name m f backup file exists Press down arrow to highlight file name Enter 4 File information transfer Wait until begins and number on Backup the screen shows successful progress of transfer screen is displayed Note Interrupting an in progress backup will result in an incomplete backup file stored on the disk 5 Return to SPM Main Menu Enter Note After you complete a system backup you must press Enter to return to the Main Menu Backup Restore and Print 4 229 Programming Procedures Restore System Programming Step Console PC 1 Prepare to restore system Insert diskette programming from in drive A diskette 2 Select Restore F7 3 To restore from backup Press down file stored on hard disk arrows to highlight file name Enter To restore from backup Press down file stored on floppy arrow to highlight Floppy Disk Enter Press down arrow to highlight file name Enter 4 230 Backup Restore and Print Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 File information transfer Wait until begins and number on the Restore screen shows progress of successful transfer screen is displayed A CAUTION An unsuccessful restore procedure causes a frigid start If being performed remotely the system drops the connection immediately All system programming is lost and the system returns to the factory settings In add
60. Features 4 179 Programming Procedures EE SMDR Call Length Step Console PC 1 Display SMDR menu and select Call Length OPE LORS ue SMDR F8 Call Length F2 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of seconds and set minimum seconds nnn seconds nnn time 0 255 seconds before calls are recorded on SMDR reports 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Step Console PC 1 Display SMDR menu and F7 Options F7 select Call Report ae F8 Call Report F3 4 180 System Features Programming Procedures Step 2 Specify SMDR calls recorded m To specify that SMDR information is recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls m To specify that SMDR information is recorded only for outgoing calls 3 Save choice and exit Inside Dial Tone Step 1 Display Inside Dial Tone screen 2 Specify Inside Dial Tone m To specify that system dial tone is different from outside dial tone m To specify that system dial tone is same as outside dial tone 3 Save entry and exit Console In Out Out Only Enter Exit Exit Console Options Inside Dial Inside Outside Enter Exit PC F1 F2 F10 F5 F5 PC F7 F1 F2 F10 F5 System Features 4 181 Programming Procedures E Reminder Service Cancel Step Console PC 1 Display Reminder Service Options F7 Cancel screen Remind Svc F
61. G Note An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign a long hold disconnect or select Delete F8 to assign a short hold disconnect 4 20 System Renumbering Programming Procedures EEE Step Console PC 4 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Principal User for Remote Call Forwarding and Coverage Step Console PC 1 Display Principal User LinesTrunks F4 screen More PgUp PrncipalUsr F2 2 Identify line trunk to Dial line trunk Type line trunk program and save entry no 801 880 no 801 880 Slot and Slot and port or port or logical ID ancal ID Enter F10 3 Identify extension to Dial extension Type extension assign or remove as slot and slot and principal user of line trunk port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no 4 34 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures Step 4 To remove extension as principal user m To remove more To assign extension as principal user and assign extensions as principal users a principal user for another line trunk If next line trunk number is sequential If next line trunk number is not sequential Console Delete PrncipalUsr Repeat steps 2 4 Next Repeat step 3 Enter PrncipalUsr Repeat steps 2 4 PC F8 F2 Repeat steps 2 4 F9 Repea
62. Jack 1 see sales manual for requirements 2 For modem model 2224G only 1 Music Coupler required 1 Requires 2500SM telephone Adjuncts B 11 Adjuncts Table B 1 Continued Equipment Type Specifications SMDR printer m Connects to upper AT amp T 475 RS 232 jack on AT amp T 476 processor module AT amp T 572 m Must be relocated with 50 feet of CU or use ADU to extend distance B 12 Adjuncts AT amp T Products 3330 475 3330 476 3333 572 Adjuncts LS or GS LS TR MLX ATL ATL Station Station Station Adjuncts B 13 Adjuncts Adjunct Descriptions Answer Record Machine Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack an MFM port on an MLX telephone or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone Use any industry standard device that recognizes a 600 ins disconnect signal and connect a 267A2 bridging adapter to the telephone The 267A2 bridging adapter is not needed when the telephone is built in to the answering machine Answering devices such as voice reset disconnect timers and fixed recording timers that disconnect automatically can also be used Cordless Telephone Attached to the system through a single line telephone jack or an MFM port on an MLX telephone When connected through an MFM port the cordless touch tone telephone can place and receive calls independently of the MLX telephone Use with a GPA is not recommended because the cordless telephone cannot di
63. Operator Features 4 133 Programming Procedures rr ___ lt lt 5 Automatic Hold or Release Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 screen and select a carr F2 Automatic Hold or WUSHeoeCA Release Eon i Release 2 Specify that in progress calls are automatically put on hold or automatically disconnected when another call button is pressed m For Automatic Hold Auto Hold F1 m For Automatic Release Auto F2 Release 3 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 4 134 Optional Operator Features Programming Procedures Queue Over Threshold Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 screen and select Queue Over Threshold Queued Call F2 Threshold F3 2 To erase current number Drop Alt P of calls and specify whether QCC operators are notified when calls in queue are over threshold m To specify maximum Dial number of Type number of number of calls calls nn calls nn allowed in QCC queue 0 99 before operators are notified m To specify that Dial 0 Type 0 operators are not notified when calls are in QCC queue are over threshold 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Operator Features 4 135 Programming Procedures Elevate Priority Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 ated and select Elevate EN F2 ElvatePrior F 4 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of seconds and specify call priority interval m To specify
64. PC Type trunk number n F10 F1 F2 F9 Repeat step 3 FIO F5 F5 PC F4 F4 F3 Programming Procedures EE OOO Step Console PC 2 Identify DID trunk and Dial trunk no Type trunk no save entry 801 880 801 880 If you are programming slot and port or slot and port or more than one DID trunk logical ID logical ID enter the lowest trunk Enter F10 number 3 Specify disconnect time Dial number of Type number of 140 2400 ms in ms Nnnn ms nnnn increments of 10 4 Save entry and either program another DID trunk or exit m To save entry and specify disconnect time for another DID trunk If next tie trunk number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 If next tie trunk number Enter F10 is not sequential WUSESEROEE F3 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m T0 save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are Exit F5 complete Exit F5 DID Trunks 4 65 Programming Procedures A Expected Digits Step Console PC 1 Display DID Trunks LinesTrunks F4 screen and select D Expected Digits Fa Expect F4 Digit 2 Identify trunk block 1 or Dial trunk block Type trunk 2 and save entry number n block number n Enter F10 3 Erase current numberof Drop Alt P expected digits and Dial number of Type number of specify new number of expected expected expected digits 1 4 digits n digits n 4 Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit
65. PICKUP Group 1 STNS 14 15 17 19 23 25 27 Pickup groups without members assigned are not printed I 26 System Programming Reports T rrr i lt a _OOtststststs S System Programming Menu Hierarchy The system programming menu hierarchy is the sequence of menu screens that appear when you program the communica tions system On the first menu screen the choice of an item leads to either a secondary menu screen or a data entry screen A secondary menu screen may lead to still another menu screen and soon up to six separate screens as shown on the following pages You can use the Inspect feature in system programming to display the telephone or line trunk numbers that are programmed with a specific feature Inspect is helpful when you must assign a feature to many lines trunks or extensions and you do not have a Direct Station Selector DSS attached to the system program ming console or when you are programming a PC with SPM Inspect can be used with the menu options which have an asterisk next to them To use Inspect in system programming choose an eligible option and press Inspct or PgDn System Programming Menu Hierarchy J 1 System Programming Menu Hierarchy TE ah3E Err Slr ttt System l System Restart Programming SysProgPort Mode Key eorex Board Renum MaintenBusy Enable j AutBsyTieTr Enable oi a Sea Date Time SysRenumber Default Numbering e seas Single
66. Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Auxiliary Equipment 4 115 Programming Procedures EE Maintenance Alarms Step Console PC 1 ra Maintenance AuxEquip F9 re ee MaintAlarms F 4 2 Specify line jack to Dial line trunk Type line trunk connect to maintenance 801 880 801 880 alarm and save entry slot and port or slot and port or logical ID logical ID 3 To assign maintenance Enter F10 alarm to line jack To remove maintenance Delete F8 alarm assignment from line jack 4 To program more Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 maintenance alarms and 3 and 3 5 Exit Exit F5 Voice Messaging System VMS Automated Attendant AA Options Note Use Calling Group Type procedure in Group Assigned Features section to identify voice message interface VMI port and specify if VMI port is integrated or generic Step Console PC 1 Display VMS AA menu AuxEquip F9 VMS AA F6 4 116 Auxiliary Equipment Programming Procedures TC oo o _ S E sl i 83F hl a lt t a i lt 3NTCt Step Console PC 2 If no change to number of Gotostep4 Go to step 4 rings before transfer To change number of TransferRtn F1 rings before transfer display Transfer Retn Interval screen 3 To erase current setting Drop Alt P specifv that calls are not Dial 0 Type 0 transferred to the backup Enter F10 position and save entry To set number of rings Dial number of
67. Set m To add or change start Start F6 time 3 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed start day of week and time 4 Identify start day of the Dial day ofthe Type day of the week number and time week number week number use 24 hour clook and followed by followed by save entry 4 digit time of 4 digit time of day dtttt day dtttt Day of the week number Enter F10 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 5 Add or Change stop time Stop F7 6 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed stop day of week and time Night Service 4 219 Programming Procedures EE Step Console PC 7 Identify stop day of the Dialdayofthe Type day of the week number and time week number week number use 24 hour clock and followed by followed by save entry 4 digit time of 4 digit time of day dtttt day dtttt Day of the week number Enter F1 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 8 To program start and stop Repeat steps Repeat steps times for more days of the 2 7 2 7 week To suspend Night Service With Time Set or record current day of the week m Display Night Service Day of Week F8 Day of Week Screen m To suspend Night Dial 9 Type 9 Service with Time Set Continued 4 220 Night Service Programming Procedures EK i Step Console PC 8 Continued m To record current day Dial day of the Type day of the of the week number w
68. Signal Processing 1 47 System Description mm The digitally encoded signals are routed from one interface port to another interface port by assigning source and destination to specific time slots on the TDM bus In this way signals can be transmitted to one or several destinations and reconstructed at the original amplitude The result is no signal loss during switching and transmission from one point to another Quantizing The process of converting PAM samples into discrete PCM values is called quantizing In the case of voice grade signals eight bits are commonly used to encode one PAM sample Quantizing with eight bits allows 256 unique values to represent the range of amplitudes in the analog signal being sampled Quantizing causes distortion due in part to the rounding off of PAM samples into discrete PCM values This distortion can be minimized by increasing the number of bits used to encode each PAM sample or by increasing the sampling rate Using 8 bit coded samples taken at an 8 kHz rate results in toll grade transmission quality Companding Distortion also occurs in quantizing because equal consideration is given to all amplitude levels Linear quantizing divides the amplitude range into equal segments which results in unnecessary quality at levels where voice signals are unlikely to occur and not enough quality where they do occur Commanding eliminates this distortion by using a nonlinear scale that has smaller di
69. Speaker button again to disconnect the Intercom or System Access button The red and green LEDs next to the Intercom or System Access button should go off the green LED next to the Speaker button should go off and the dial tone should stop Test the Telephones for Outside Line Dial Tone Follow these steps to test for an outside line dial tone 1 Without lifting the handset press a line button The red LED next to this button should go on 2 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker button The green LED next to the red LED at the line button should go on and you should hear a dial tone 3 Hang up as needed and repeat steps 1 and 2 for each line button on the telephone Test the Analog Multiline and Single Line Telephones Follow these steps to test the basic functioning of analog telephones 1 If you are at a multiline telephone press the Intercom or System Access button 2 Pick up the handset You should hear a dial tone System Acceptance Test 3 119 Installation 3 10 11 2 Dial the extension number of another working telephone You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and ringing at the called telephone At the called telephone have someone pickup the handset verify that you have good two way communication At both telephones hang up If you are at a multiline telephone press an outside line button or the System Access button Pick up the handset You should h
70. T or an authorized representative Supplemental Alerts Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack an MFM port on an MLX telephone or an SAA on an analog multiline telephone The MFM and SAA support devices operating on 48 VDC Alerts operating on 20 30 Hz can be connected to either an MFM or a single line telephone jack Compatible alerts include horns and bells to audibly alert workers and strobes for use in quiet zones hospitals and libraries and noisy areas factories and for the hearing impaired Adjuncts B 17 Product Ordering Information The following table summarizes the equipment that can be connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and provides the corresponding ordering codes Component PEC Control Unit Small Analog Basic carrier and housing Power supply module Processor small Feature module small 408 GS LS Small Digital Basic carrier and housing Power supply module Processor small Feature module small 008 MLX 800 GS LS 6141 CUA 6141 CUD Comcode 06388614 05743801 05711972 05711998 05628010 05627996 App Code 403E 391A1 917A23 517A24 517A26 403E 391A1 917A23 517A24 517421 517A19 Product Ordering Information C 1 Product Ordering Information Component PEC o gt Small Digital 141 24D Basic carrier and housing Power supply module Processor small Feature module small 008 MLX 3 800 GS LS 400 GS LS
71. The PC s display shows the same button and screen layout as an MLX 20L telephone Either a PC with SPM can be connected directly to the system or SPM can be accessed remotely in one of the following ways m Using Remote Access the system programmer dials the system directly A password can be set up to prevent unauthorized access m The system programmer dials the system operator and asks to be transferred to the system s built in modem Considerations m SPM operates with MS DOS version 3 3 or later m Unless the system is being backed up or restored a remote user takes priority over a local user If the local user is programming when a remote user connects to the system the system sends a message to the local user that a remote connection has been made and disconnects the local user Applications 6 35 Adapters Accessories and Applications Saas a The PC with SPM connects to the RS 232 jack on the processor module of the control unit The RS 232 baud rate is 1200 2400 bps with auto speed adjust a The SPM reports can be printed out or can be saved to a disk hard or floppy SPM reports should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour a A printer connected to the PC with SPM can be used to print system programming reports Or reports can be sent to the printer that is connected to the SMDR port on the system s control unit a SMDR information maybe lost while system programmin
72. To save entry and Enter F10 copy restrictions from Exit F5 same extension on Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 line 1 of screen to another individual telephone Continued Optional Telephone Features 4 123 Programming Procedures mmm Ee Step Console PC 5 Continued m To Copy line assignments from another extension to an individual telephone a lf next extension Next F9 number is Repeat step4 Repeat step 4 sequential alf next extension Enter F10 number is not sequential BALE FS Single F1 Repeat steps Repeat steps 3 5 3 5 If block was selected Enter F10 save entry and identify Dial extension Type extension last extension in block of slot and Slot and telephones and save entry port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 6 When copy process is aes F5 complete Exit F5 Exit F5 4 124 Optional Telephone Features Programming Procedures Forced Account Code E Step ntry Console 1 Display Forced Account Extensions Code Entry screen 2 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming Account Go to step 3 console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached w To assign Forced Account Code Entry to telephones m To remove forced account code entry from telephones 3 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming Press DSS telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 Press DSS button for each tel
73. Troubleshooting Busy Out Slot xx This screen appears when busy out fails Busy Out FAILED Demand Tests Demand tests let you pinpoint module problems Note Before running any tests on the processor module back up the system translations by using the PC with SPM see Up System Programming in Chapter 4 After you run a demand test on a module you must restore the module See Restore later in this chapter Module Demand Test Request this demand test to find out if the module is functioning properly Note A module must be busied out before a demand test is run Slot xx Select Demand Test from Make a selection the Slot menu Status Demand Test Busy Out Reset Restore Demand Test Slot Xx Choose Go to run a test Make a selection once choose Repeat to Busy out port first repeat a test continuously 5 16 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting lt Demana Test Siete ae If you selected Go the test Board aaaaaaaa runs A screen appears with Test FAILED Test in Progress Test Contents of test reg Successfully Completed or Test FAILED and the Exit contents of the test register a sin this example Demand Test Slot 2x If you selected Repeat Run continuously this screen appears and zee r you choose whether to ance continue the test or not Exit Processor Module Demand Test If you select Demand Test for the
74. Type number of 1 9 before calls are rings n rings n transferred to the backup Enter F10 position and save entry 4 If VMS AA equipment is Go to step 6 Go to step 6 generic or no change to touch tone duration If VMS AA equipment is TT Duration F2 integrated to change current setting for touch tone duration display Touch Tone Duration screen 5 Erase current setting Drop Alt P enter new setting 50 Dial number of Type number of 200ms in multiples of 25 milliseconds milliseconds and save entry nnn nnn Enter F10 Auxiliary Equipment 4 117 Programming Procedures B amp a Step Console PC 6 If VMS AA equipment is Go to step 8 Go to step 8 generic or no change to touch tone intewal If VMS AA equipment is TT Interval F3 integrated to change current setting for touch tone interval display Touch Tone Interval screen 7 Erase current setting Drop Alt P enter new setting 50 200 Dial number of Type number of ms in multiples of 25 milliseconds milliseconds and save entry nnn nnn Enter F10 8 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 4 118 Auxiliary Equipment Programming Procedures i Optional Telephone Features Pool Dial Out Code Hybrid PBX only Step Console PC 1 Display Pool Dial Out Extensions F6 Code screen Dial Outed F3 2 Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension program and save entry slot and Slot and port or port or logical ID or logical ID p
75. You must record each station jack connection and each station change on the System Technician s Run Sheet see 24 Stations and Under For a system with up to 24 stations direct wiring is recommended To do this plug in one end of a DIW cord into the station jack on the CU module and connect the other end to the 103 104 wall jack of the station Hardware see F igure 42 m DIW cords m Unicon plug m cable ties Tools see F igure 40 m 4 pair plug presser System Wiring 3 87 Installation Procedure 1 Run the DIW cord from the CU to the station and cut it Allow enough slack for dressing the wire Attach a Unicon plug to the CU end of the DIW cord by using the 4 pair plug presser Plug the DIW cord into the CU and connect the other end to the station jack see Terminating Cable at a Station Outlet in this chapter Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each station line Dress the wires properly by using cable ties Fasten wire runs vertically to the left or right of the CU The final horizontal wire run to the CU must be fastened within 12 inches of the CU Allow sufficient slack to reach any port on the CU Label the CU module jacks station jacks and DIW cords properly see Label the System Wiring in this chapter Over 24 Stations For systems with more than 24 stations the two recommended methods are Interconnect Wiring and SYSTIMAX Interconnect Wiring Interconnect Wiring is required when t
76. and 12 4 If the CSU is to be locally powered connect the power supply leads to terminals 14 and 15 Insert the Signal Monitor Unit After setting the option switches plug the SMU into the right side of the 551 T1 L1 CSU chassis The SMU has six LEDs and six bantam jacks see Figure 25 Tables and show the functions of the LEDs and the test jacks on the front panel Channel Service Unit 3 41 Installation Table 3 23 SMU Front Panel LEDs Avg Dens Red Low average ones density Zeroes gt 50 consecutive zeroes needed for encryption or gt 16 consecutive zeroes option switch S4 closed fe ra errs Table 3 24 SMU Front Panel Test Jacks ee ee EQ IN OUT MON Access to transmit input and receive output of the 100D module SM IN OUT MON Access to CSU transmit input and receive output Insert the Office Repeater Plug the OR into the left slot of the 551 T1 L1 CSU chassis see Figure 26 The front panel has m six 310 jacks for in line access and monitoring of the span line and the SMU card 3 42 Channel Service Unit Installation two GMT fuses for protection of the local powering circuitry m four test points Note The transmit path in the OR has an adjustable artificial line this allows the transmit level to be adjusted to 0 7 5 or 15 dB to meet the required 15 or 22 5 dB section loss The receive path contains a fixed 7 5 dB artificial line and an Automatic Line Build Out ALBO circ
77. any kind on this product m Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners on this product Use a damp cloth for cleaning xiii B eee Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number AT amp T provides a toll free customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hours a day U S A only Call the Helpline or your authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Federal Communications Commission FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information This eg ment has been tested and found to eee with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generals uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Customer Support
78. been translated for System Speed Dial Get the list of translated numbers from the system manager 2 Pick up the handset and dial a System Speed Dial code Verify that you have good two way communication and that the correct party was reached Coverage Test Follow these steps to test Coverage 1 Have someone call the covered telephone System Acceptance Test 3 127 Installation 2 Count the number of rings that occur at the covered telephone before the covering telephone starts ringing This should be the same as the programmed number of rings 3 Pick up the handset at the covering telephone and verify that you have good two way communication 4 Hang up at the covering telephone 5 Check both individual and group coverage Test the Operator Console Testing the operator console whether it is analog or digital is the same as testing an MLX telephone except for testing the console s unique feature buttons Follow these steps to test the operator console 1 Pick up the handset of the telephone being tested and push an Intercom button Key or Behind Switch mode or an System Access button Hybrid PBX mode After receiving the intercom dial tone dial 00 to activate the test mode You should hear a steady test tone over the handset and a ring burst over the speaker The telephone s red and green LEDs should be on 2 To test the line buttons press any line button with two LEDs The diagnostic tone should st
79. buttons 1 20 Page 1 F7 m To select buttons Page 2 F8 21 34 4 Indicate button wanted Press button Press function as System Access Ring being key for button Voice Originate Only or programmed being Shared button programmed 5 Continue programming List F10 process Feature Telephones 4 101 Programming Procedures Step 6 Assign the type of System Access button Note To speed programming dial codes are shown in this step Items can also be selected from the display m To program System Access Ring button m To program System Access Voice button m To program System Access Originate Only Ring button m To program System Access Originate Only Voice button Continued 4 102 Telephones Console Dial 16 Dial 16 Press button being programmed again Enter Dial 19 Dial 18 Dial 18 Press button being programmed again Enter Dial 19 PC Type 16 Type 16 Shift function key for button being programmed again F10 Type 19 Type 18 Type 18 Shift function key for button being programmed again F10 Type 19 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 6 Continued m To program System Dial 17 Type 17 Access Shared button extension no of extension no of principal principal telephone telephone nnnn button nnnn button number of number of specific button specific button being shared being shared nn nn m To remove System Dial 21 Type 21 Acce
80. callers hear the main menu immediately and if no response is received after the main menu is played calls are transferred to the system operator IVP AA is a low cost alternative for businesses that need enhanced call handling without the added voice messaging capabilities of AUDIX Voice Power IS Il m AUDIX Voice Power AVP IS Il AVP offers all the features of the IVP AA combined with the following services Call Answer When callers reach a busy extension or there is no answer this service allows callers to leave a message transfer to another extension or transfer to a system operator Users can program a personal greeting or select a standard greeting and can program a password to prevent others from getting their messages a Voice Mail This service allows users to send messages to other extensions in the system forward received messages along with comments and reply to received messages The system manager can send general messages to everyone in the system Information Service This service provides a call in information service that plays a recorded message and then disconnects the caller Message Drop This service offers an answering service similar to an answering machine that gives the caller a message and then allows the caller to drop off a message such as a request for service or an order Callers cannot direct their messages to specific extensions 6 22 Applications Adapters
81. calling unit function is to be used connect a 25 pin EIA cable between the RS 366 interface PORT 2 and the computer s RS 366 ACU interface Plug the power cord for the 7500B into the AC outlet Plug the D8W cord into the telephone wall jack Note Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter If you need it see Installing the Terminating Resistor Adapter later in this chapter Stand Alone High Speed Synchronous DCE Configuration Follow the steps below to configure the ISDN 7500B Data Module for high speed synchronous modem operation 1 Remove the 7500B from its box or turn off the power if the 7500B is already installed Remove the high speed synchronous enhancement board from its box Open the door panel on the 7500B a Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel b Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull upon that side of the door c Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking the pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label d Lift off the door and set it aside Data Adapters 3 65 Installation ee 4 Remove the protective cover from the PORT 2 slot see a Hold the cover the marked area for the PORT 2 slot in one hand and the rest of the rear panel in the other b Gently move the cover back and forth until the cover separates from the rear panel c Discard the c
82. can be changed to the second or third module Backup synchronization in the event of a maintenance failure can be provided by programming the second and third installed modules as secondary and tertiary synchronization DS1 Capabilities 1 59 System Description In addition the source of synchronization can be factory set to loop clock reference source the clock is synchronized to the external endpoint or set to local clock reference source the clock is free running This setting must be made for the primary secondary and tertiary synchronization modules Signaling Mode Signaling is the process of communicating channel state information such as dialing from endpoint to endpoint Two types of signaling can be used in T1 transmission robbed bit signaling RBS and common channel signaling CCS Choosing a signaling mode pertains only to T1 service ISDN PRI always uses common channel signaling 23 B channels and 1 D channel Robbed Bit Signaling RBS replaces robs the least significant bit of every sixth frame of each DSO channel with signaling information RBS is also called in band signaling since signaling information is embedded in the least significant bit of every sixth 8 bit word RBS is appropriate for voice and voice grade data up to 1200 baud but facilities using RBS cannot accurately transmit digital data because digital data uses high speed data rates such as 64 kbps Therefore the
83. concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth m ground ring consists of at least 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than 2 AWG encircling the building The ground ring must be in direct contact with the earth and buried at least 2 5 feet below the earth s surface Power and Grounding 2 13 Preparation E i i OCOC S Power Surge and Lightning Protection For most surges the following standard grounding requirements provide adequate lightning and power surge protection m properly wired grounded bonded CO line protectors m properly wired grounded AC outlet m properly grounded single point ground bar m properly wired connection between single point ground and power supply modules Additional Protection The 391A1 power supply module and the line trunk and station modules have built in AC line protection This built in protection handles almost all situations Occasionally additional protection may be needed if the customer is located in a heavy lightning area A 147A protector can be connected to the system to limit surges from the AC lines and CO lines One 147A protector provides protection for four CO lines Up to three 146A protectors can be added to the 147A to provide protection for a maximum of sixteen CO lines For more than sixteen lines additional 147A protectors are required See Figure 13 for a typical 147A protector installation Note The 147A protector is us
84. console DLC and queued call console QCC In a DLC configuration lines trunks are assigned to individual buttons and the console can have several calls ringing at the same time In a QCC configuration incoming calls are held in a queue and calls are directed to a QCC as a position becomes available Only one call rings at a time The following telephones can function as DLCs m MLX 20L telephone m MLX 28D telephone m MERLIN II System Display Console with built in DSS m BIS 34D m BIS 34 m BIS 22D Note In a Hybrid PBX system only the MLX 20L telephone can function as a QCC DLCS are connected either to an analog station jack on a 008 or 408 analog multiline telephone module or to a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module QCCs must be connected to a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module The QCC system operator console must be connected to the first jack on the first 008 MLX module One or two DSS adjuncts can be added to provide 50 or 100 additional extension buttons Telephones and Consoles 1 33 System Description Adjuncts Adjuncts are pieces of equipment that connect directly to the CU or to a telephone through an adapter see Adapters below Answering machines credit card verification terminals and external alerts are examples of adjuncts For more information on adjuncts see Adapters Adapters enable a proper connection of equipment or in the case of the channel service unit CSU of a
85. customer translations The entire system must be rebooted Note After a frigid start the default printer is the PC printer not the SMDR printer If you want printouts on site from the SMDR printer make sure you change the option Cold start A power interrupt of more than one second causes a cold start All calls are dropped but customer translations are saved Notes m A cold start does not blank out the screen on an MLX 28D telephone until the end of the cold start m A cold start can cause stations with the Extension Status feature to lose their toll restrictions 5 4 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting mm ee m Warm start Loss of power for less than 250 ms causes a power transfer to the internal battery backup and causes a warm start Stable calls are not dropped but calls in the process of being established may be Call processing resumes from the point where new and stable calls are handled Notes mw Power interruptions of less than 100 ms generally are not noticed by the system m Warm starts can cause a telephone to ring without having an associated call To stop the ringing place a new call to the telephone Every restart causes an error log entry and each type of restart has its own error code System Status Displays The power supply module processor module 400 EM module and 100D module are the only modules that physically have LEDs However the System Status screen displays simulated
86. department as quickly as possible In addition the Automated Attendant can direct calls to a fax machine If the fax machine is busy or does not answer the call is automatically disconnected A call transfer by the Automated Attendant is either blind or supervised A blind transfer means the Automated Attendant dials the extension or department requested by the caller and disconnects If the call is not answered or the telephone is busy the call is routed to the system operator With a supervised transfer the Automated Attendant transfers the call and can retrieve it if the transfer is unsuccessful The Automated Attendant then directs the call to another telephone allows the caller a second route choice or provides a failed transfer announcement depending on how the application has been programmed 6 30 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications mmm i tCCtsiC aySDW USMC Call Answer When callers reach a busy extension or there is no answer Call Answer connects the caller to the personal greeting of the called person and allows the caller to leave a message in that person s mailbox If no personal greeting is available the caller gets a general message with the recorded name of the called person and then is instructed to leave a message If the called person s mailbox is full Call Answer connects the caller to a general mailbox Here the caller gets a message with the recorded name of
87. even though they are receiving calls Maintenance 5 37 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ee Procedure Using a single line telephone test the touch tone receivers TTRs as follows 1 Pick up the handset and dial 04 and the 2 digit number of the TTR to be tested m lf you hear a busy tone the receiver is in use m lf you hear a reorder tone you have misdialed or have reached an invalid TTR m f you hear a dial tone continue this test 2 Dial the digits 123456789 0 You should hear a DTMF signal as each button is pressed If the test is successful you will hear a dial tone within one to three seconds after you enter 3 Repeat the test for each TTR 4 Replace the module containing the faulty TTR if this test fails Symptom User cannot make outside calls on touch tone telephone Procedure Check the individual line trunk for rotary dial programming Call Forward Problems Symptom Users are getting other people s calls Procedure Usually this problem results from someone unknowingly activating Call Forward Cancel the forwarding of calls to the receiving telephone as follows 5 38 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting m For multiline telephones 1 Press the Feature button 2 Dial 34 m For single line telephones 1 Pick up the handset 2 Dial 34 3 Hang up Central Office Troubles The automatic maintenance program takes the ports out of service when a line trunk is malfuncti
88. hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place 7 Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE 8 Plug the power supply cord into the connector labeled POWER on the 7500B 9 Plug the male end of the EIA 232D cable into the connector labeled PORT 1 10 Connect the other end of the EIA 232D cable to the modem a male to male cord or a male to female cord with a gender changer is needed 11 Plug the power cord into an AC power outlet 12 Plug the D8W cord into a telephone wall jack Note Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter If you need it see Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation later in this chapter Stand Alone Multipurpose Enhancement DCE Configuration Follow the steps below to configure the 7500B for use with the multipurpose enhancement board to work with modems 1 Remove the 7500B from its box or turn off the power on installed sets 2 Remove the multipurpose enhancement board from its box 3 Open the door panel on the 7500B a Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel b Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull up on that side of the door Data Adapters 3 63 Installation c Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking the pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label d Lift off the door and set it aside 4 Remove the
89. indication from telephone m To remove message Repeat step 9 Repeat step 9 waiting indication from more telephones for fax on line 1 m To remove message Exit F5 waiting indication from Repeat Repeat telephones for another steps 7 10 steps 7 10 fax To assign message Enter F10 waiting indication to Repeat step 9 Repeat step 9 telephone and assign message waiting indi cation to more tele phones maximum 4 for fax shown on line 1 To assign message waiting indication to telephone and assign message waiting to telephones for another fax m f next extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeatstepo9 Repeat step 9 m If next extension Enter F10 number is not Exit F5 Peauenig Repeat Repeat steps 7 10 steps 7 10 Continued 4 114 Auxiliary Equipment Programming Procedures TEE O Step Console PC 10 Continued To assign message Enter F10 waiting indication to telephone and assign message waiting to telephones for another fax 11 To view telephones with _Inspct PgDn receiving message waiting indication from fax on line 1 Return to Fax menu Exit F5 without viewing telephones with message waiting 12 To change length of time Threshold F3 before system is notified that fax message has arrived display Fax Threshold Duration screen 13 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of seconds and specify new seconds nn seconds nn number of seconds 0 30 14
90. jack 39 connects to the jack labeled EVEN on the bridging adapter The label on the bridging adapter refers to the default intercom number which does not necessarily match the station jack number in terms of odd and even Odd even wiring refers to jack numbers not intercom numbers Terminate Cable at a Station Outlet There are many kinds of station outlets which are fundamentally all the same Some are wall mounted affixed directly onto a wall surface and others are flush mounted where the jacks are located inside a wall housed in a regular electrical box On the workstation side a cord plugs into the jack on the closet side the 4 pair wire is hardwired to the outlet 3 94 System Wiring Installation Following is one method to use when connecting 4 pair wire to a wall mounted station outlet You should be able to adapt the method used to join 4 pair wire to flush mounted outlets Note In some cases the electrical boxes will already be mounted in others the installer must do the job In either case the box should be installed before the wire is terminated on the outlet 1 Take the outlet apart by first unscrewing the screw that holds the sections together then pull off the termination clips Pull out a few feet of slack from the wall Use diagonal pliers to strip 3 to 4 inches off the end of the 4 pair wire Thread the conductors through a hole in the base of the outlet Press the wires into appropriate sl
91. locking tab remove the module check for any obstruction and reinsert the module Replace the Feature Module A CAUTION Make sure that you have all the necessary records to reprogram the system before you replace the feature module When the feature module is replaced all system memory is lost and the system must be reprogrammed It may become necessary at some point to replace the feature module because of upgrades or malfunctions Follow these steps to replace the feature module in a fully installed system 1 Turn off the system see Shut the Power Off later in this chapter Make sure the ON OFF switch on the power supply module is set to the OFF position 2 Remove the processor module from the carrier a Press up on the tab on the bottom of the module b Pull the bottom of the module away from the carrier c Lift upward to disengage the module from the rod on the top of the carrier 3 Lay the processor module on its left side The Control Unit 3 11 Installation 5 8 Grasp the metal rings on the outside of the feature module and pull up Check the HDR4 header on the processor module circuit board for proper mode operation see Modify the Processor Module for Key Only Operation earlier in this chapter Align the connectors on the new feature module with the connectors in the processor module Firmly press the new feature module into the processor module Insert the processor module back into
92. logical ID no copy assignments to Telephones 4 99 Programming Procedures i Step Console PC 5 If Single was selected m Tosave entry and Enter F10 copy line assignments from extension on line 1 of screen to another individual telephone Exit F5 Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 m To copy line assignments ftom another extension to an individual telephone a f next extension Next F9 number is Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 sequential alf next extension mates F10 number is not z sequential nies FS Single F1 Repeat steps Repeat steps 3 5 3 5 If block was selected Enter F10 save entry and identify Dial extension Type extensions last extension in block of slot and slot and telephones and save entry port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 6 When copy process is Exit F5 complete oe F5 Exit F5 4 100 Telephones Programming Procedures oo Intercom or System Access Button Assignment Step Console PC 1 Display Centralized More PgUp Programming screen Cntr Prg F4 2 Identify telephone save Dial extension Type extension entry and start slot and slot and centralized telephone port or port or programming process logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 Start F10 3 Select specific line buttons associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or PC with SPM m To select
93. modem interfaces m local host computer and workstation on local area network LAN access only via an RS 232 interface m DS1 facility interface analog data via T1 or ISDN PRI or digital data via ISDN PRI Data Capabilities 1 41 System Description E _ rrr Networking Capabilities The system can connect to another system via the two CUs or via the tie trunks Control Unit to Control Unit This system s CU can connect to another system s CU in three ways m from an off premises telephone OPT line to an LS line trunk or vice versa via analog facilities m via an analog tie trunk 400EM module m via a digital tie trunk using emulated E amp M in the T1 mode ona 100D module A back to back connection from one DS1 facility to the other can be used when the total cable distance is fewer than 1300 feet OPT LS Connection A 008 OPT module on system A s CU can be connected to an LS port on system B s CU This enables the user on system B to access all the stations and facilities on system A If system B has Remote Access the user on system A can directly access stations and facilities on system B without operator intervention Conversely an LS port on system A can be connected to an OPT port on system B Note If the systems are on the same premises the connection can be made to any T R port 1 42 Networking Capabilities System Description With the OPT LS connection glare is more frequent as the vo
94. more TTRs are needed to support these services 400 or 400 GS LS TTR modules can be added each module provides four TTRs shows the estimated number of TTRs needed in the system depending on the call volume and the types of services 1 20 Control Unit System Description Table 1 2 Touch Tone Receiver Requirements Total Number of TTRs Required No Account Account Codes Account Codes Codes or or AVP AA and AVP AA Calls hr Application or equiv or equiv System is assumed to already have basic phones Remote Access and tie trunks Reusable MERLIN II Modules Table 1 3 shows the MERLIN II line trunk and station modules that are usable in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Limitations are noted in the comments column Control Unit 1 21 System Description Table 1 3 Reusable MERLIN II Line Trunk and Station Modules Apparatus Type Code Comments Fully compatible Fully compatible 517A13 Compatible but does not support the downlink disconnect needed for voice mail does not meet Megacom transmission requirements 517B13 Compatible but does not support the downlink disconnect needed for voice mail does not meet Megacom transmission requirements 517013 Compatible but does not meet Megacom transmission requirements 517D13 Compatible but can be used for Megacom only when the customer does not have to meet EIA transmission standards 517E13 Fully compatible 517A15 Outgoing Call Management
95. nnnnnn or nnnnnn or in the list nnn nnn 4 Save entry and either enter more items or exit m To save entry and enter next item in Allowed List shown on line 1 m f next entry number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 m f next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential REAR F1 4 186 System Features m To save entry and exit when all entries are complete Repeat steps 2 4 Enter Exit Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 Programming Procedures mm Allowed Lists Assignment to Telephones Step Console PC 1 Display Assign Allowed Tables F8 Lists To screen AllowTo F2 2 Identify Allowed List 0 7 Dial lit Type list to assign to telephone s number n number n and save entry Enter F10 3 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 4 Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign Allowed List Press DSS to telephone button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove Allowed List Press DSS assignment from button for each telephones telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 4 If a DSS is not attached Dial extension Type extension to system programming no slot no slot console or if program and port no or and port no or with SPM identify logical ID logical ID telephone to program System Features 4 187 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 To remove Allowed List Delete F8
96. numbering plan Two Digit Numbering Plan K 3 System Technician s Run Sheet When you install a new MERLIN LEGEND Communications System or when you change any existing station wiring record information about the station wiring on the System Technician s Run Sheet Figure L 1 shows the first page of the System Technician s Run Sheet and the text that follows explains how to complete it System Technician s Run Sheet L 1 System Technician s Run Sheet Logical ID Type Wire No Old Ext No New Ext No Miscellaneous Person Location or Function 12 17 18 Figure L 1 System Technician s Run Sheet L 2 System Technicians Run Sheet System Technician s Run Sheet e The following explains the information you enter in the columns on the System Technician s Run Sheet The number in the Logical ID column refers to the number of the station jack in the control unit 1 On the first line of the Type column enter the type of device such as an MLX 20L telephone connected to the station jack On the second line enter any attached adjuncts such as an answering machine 2 In the Wire No column enter the number of the wire as indicated by the label on the wire 3 In the Old Ext No column if the wire run is being changed enter the extension number of the old station If you are working with a new installation leav
97. overheard in a public location through theft of a wallet Or purse containing access information or through carelessness writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it A aomona n hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the information to other hackers Enormous charges can be run up quickly It is the customer s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly implement the features evaluate and administer the various restriction levels protect access codes and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access information Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges While these charges are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long distance or other network charges AT amp T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access Customer Support Information xxi Customer Support Information To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system m Use a nonpublished Remote Access number m Assign authorization codes randomly to users on a need to have basis keeping a log of ALL authorized users and assigning one code to one person m Use random sequence authorization codes which are l
98. permanent Note The test is not run on auto out tie trunks Maintenance Busy Programming You can select automatic maintenance busy as a system programming option If you do there is also a menu selection to include tie trunks Maintenance 5 41 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual Correction of Line Trunk Problems If the system cannot seize a line trunk even after repeated attempts you may have to replace the module To identify the line trunk problem first check for a dial tone at the CU If you do not hear a dial tone check the error logs and make a line trunk test call It is sometimes difficult for the customer to detect line trunk troubles If a line trunk is down an error is recorded in the error log and the line trunk is taken out of service If an incoming only line trunk is down however the only sign of trouble is customer complaints that incoming calls are not being received Check the error log for messages about trunk type such as DID tie and T1 Also check the wiring and the system parameters for example touch tone rotary toll restriction and disconnect time interval Outgoing Line Trunk Problems Symptom Outgoing lines trunks cannot be seized Procedure 1 At the network interface check for a dial tone from the CO If a dial tone is not present notify the customer Note For GS lines trunks apply ground to the ring lead to get a dial tone 2 Pickup the handset at a test station to g
99. processor module you get three choices Peek Poke and System Erase A CAUTION Peek and Poke should be done only at the direction of the NTSC Demand Test Slot 00 With Peek you can Make a selection examine system memory or Sates circuit board memory but ra cannot change anything System Erase Exit Poke allows you to change a configuration but this also changes the memory System Erase is a frigid start and erases all system memory Maintenance 5 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting eT ___________ Slot 00 EnterHexAddress aaaaaaaa Hex Enter Backspace Exit Peek Address Oxaaaaaaaa OxFFFF OxFFFF OxFFFF OxFFFF OxFFFF OxFFFF Exit gt OxFFFF OxFFFF Poke WARNING SYSTEM MEMORY WILL BE MODIFIED Continue Cancel Exit Slot 00 Enter address aaaaaaaa Hex Enter Backspace Exit 5 18 Maintenance If you selected Peek this screen appears Key in the memory address and press Enter This status screen appears Press More to view the next 16 bytes of memory locations The first 2 byte word of data at the requested address is shown in the upper left hand part of the screen The next two byte word is shown in the upper right hand part of the screen If you selected Poke this screen appears Choose to continue or cancel If you selected Continue this screen appears Key in the address of the desired
100. representative can remotely access the maintenance program This remote access is provided by a built in 1200 bps modem in the processor module Note Line noise can distort the SPM screen When this happens the remote administrator should hang up and redial Once in the maintenance program the remote administrator can use the menu screens as the on site technician does to check error logs check system status and even cause restarts Maintenance 5 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting The remote administrator can access the maintenance program dialing the listed directory number for the customer s system Usually this rings at the system operator s console and the operator transfers the call to the system programming maintenance SPM port The remote administrator then enters the password When remote SPM is in use any local administration is blocked directly dialing the SPM port by using the Remote Access feature The administrator enters an access barrier code and the password to connect to the SPM port Note The on site system technician can also call the SPM port by using either method above However it is recommended that the technician connect the laptop PC directly to the RS 232 port on the processor module Security Certain security measures guard against unauthorized remote access A barrier code can be used for access to the built in modem In addition to the barrier code the SPM software has password
101. see Tandem The tandem network has a station on one system connected to a station on a third system via a tie trunk connection in a second system The tandem network can also be used to connect to an external facility in the third system but the grade of service will be fair to poor if one or both tie trunks are analog see Intertandem The intertandem network has a tandem tie trunk connected to tie trunks at both ends It is not recommended for analog tie trunks see 1 44 Networking Capabilities System Description Functional Units The functional units are the processor module which controls the operation of the system and its features the line trunk and station modules which connect the central office CO lines trunks to the stations the power supply module which supplies power to the control unit and the carrier with its backplane assembly which contains the input output I O bus and the time division multiplex TDM bus All the modules are electrically connected to the backplane which provides common circuitry for the I O bus the TDM bus and power distribution See Figqure 10 tor a functional block diagram of the system architecture The processor module is connected to intelligent ports on the line trunk and station modules through the I O bus by the digital switch element DSE on each line trunk and station module The TDM bus also is connected to the DSE of each line trunk and station module The two
102. slot number nn F10 F2 F1 F2 4 Save choice and exit 4 46 DS1 Facilities Enter Exit Exit F10 F5 F5 Programming Procedures Zero Code Suppression Step Console PC 1 Display Loop Start LinesTrunks F4 Ground Starl DS1 screen LS GS DS1 F4 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 in control unit that number nn number nn contains 100D save Enter F10 entry and display zero Suppression F3 code suppression selection screen 3 Specify type of zero code suppression m For AM Zero Code AMI ZCS F1 Suppression m For Bipolar 8 Zero B8ZS G2 Code Suppression 4 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Signaling Mode Step Console PC 1 Display Loop Start LinesTrunks F4 Ground Star DS1 screen Fe7eg7p81 F1 DS1 Facilities 4 47 Programming Procedures Step 2 Identify slot number 1 17 in control unit that contains 100D save entry and display Signaling screen 3 Specify type of signaling m For Robbed Bit signaling For Common Channel signaling 4 Save choice then exit Line Compensation Step 1 Display Loop Start Ground Start DS1 screen 2 Identify slot number 1 17 in control unit that contains 100D save entry and display Line Compensation screen 4 48 DS1 Facilities Console Dial slot number nn Enter Signaling Robbed Bit Common Channel Enter Exit Exit Console LinesTrunks LS GS DS1 Dial slot number nn Enter Li
103. steps 2 5 2 5 To save entry when all Enter F10 entries are complete 6 If you selected Allowed Inspct PgDn List or Disallowed List in nea F5 step 2 to view all lists assigned and exit 7 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 System Features 4 201 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection 1 7 Digit Dialing Requirements Step Console 1 Display Automatic Route Tables Selection menu and select ARS ARS 1 7 Dialing ARS 1 7 Dial 2 Specify dialing for 1 7 digit dialing m To specify 1 7 digit Within Area dialing is valid within o e area code m To specify 1 7 digit Not within dialing in not valid SESescece within area code 4 Save entry and exit Enter Exit ARS Tables Step Console 1 Display Automatic Route apies Selection menu and select ARS Table Input ARS ARS Input 2 Identify table 1 16 you Dial table want to program and save number nn entry Enter 4 202 Automatic Route Selection PC F8 F6 F1 F1 F2 F10 F5 PC F8 F6 F2 Type table number nn F10 Programming Procedures OO _________ Step 3 Specify ARS Table type m Io specify 6 Digit Ta Ble type 9 m TO Speci Area Code Table type m To specify Exchange Table type m To specify 1 7 Table type 4 Save entry 5 Identify entry number 1 100 and save entry If programming more than one entry enter lowest entry number Identify area code or exchange included on table a
104. steps to verify ARS patterns 1 Determine which toll numbers to call by examining the system administrators ARS patterns 2 At any multiline telephone pickup the handset dial the ARS access code and dial one of the toll numbers Make sure that the call is completed before hanging up 3 Repeat step 2 for any additional toll numbers 4 At the SMDR printer verify that the call was placed over the correct line trunk group and check the number of seconds before the call is reported on the SMDR printout If there are errors check the translations 3 126 System Acceptance Test Installation B _ SEhhrlrlrmrmrmrm lt lt 3 Okt i titi SN Group Calling Test Follow these steps to test the Group Calling feature 1 At any telephone pickup the handset dial the CO line trunk access code and dial a calling group listed directory number 2 At the ringing telephone in the calling group have someone pick up the handset verify that you have good two way communication 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each calling group 4 Make additional calls to check each member of each calling group 5 Test the calling group delay announcement if provided by making the whole group busy or by logging out all members of the group 6 At any telephone dial the calling access code and repeat step 2 System Speed Dial Test Follow these steps to test System Speed Dial 1 From the test telephone determine which numbers have
105. system access or intercom dial tone dial the feature code 09 to activate the test The diagnostic test tone connects to the B channel 2 Press the sequence 123456789 0 and then quickly press the switchhook The CU should send a confirmation tone 3 Hang up The CU should send a ring burst to the MFM turn on the Message LED and resume normal operations Fixing Telephone Problems When a user complaint or a system test identifies the telephone as the problem area the trouble can be in the telephone itself in the mounting cord or in the wiring between the CU and the telephone Check the wiring and the mounting cord before checking the telephone Note If the wiring has been crushed or severed the 48 VDC power supply may be shorted General Telephone and Wiring Troubles Symptom Intermittent telephone trouble Maintenance 5 35 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedure 1 Swap a known good telephone with the suspect telephone to determine if the problem is localized to the suspect telephone If local power is provided check the power supply 2 If trouble disappears the fault is with the suspect telephone Replace it 3 If the known good telephone does not work properly the fault is in the wiring or the line trunk and station module 4 Check the other telephones connected to the same module If they are working properly the fault is probably in the wiring or it may be a single port failure on the line t
106. technicians only Technician qualification includes completion of an AT amp T hands on instructor led course covering installation and maintenance for this product Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than a qualified service technician may void the warranty Hazardous electrical voltages are present inside this product The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When installing telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including m Read and understand all instructions m Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product m Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm xi xii Never install telephone jacks in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Use only AT amp T manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Com munications System circuit modules carrier assemblies and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System 511A control unit Use only AT amp T recommend
107. the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require that you obtain such a license from AT amp T or your authorized dealer Hardware and Software Requirements an approved AT amp T PC with 640K RAM 3 5 inch floppy disk drive and 20 Mbyte hard disk drive m an approved AT amp T monochrome or color monitor CMS interface card with two 14 foot 4 pair modular plug station cords and one 14 foot DIN connector cord for connection to DA 5 Digital Voice Announcer CMS software DA 5 Digital Voice Announcer parallel printer AT amp T 570 or 571 printer parallel printer cable to connect the printer to the PC supervisor console MERLIN II System Display Console agent telephones any MLX or analog multiline telephones supported by the communications system m two analog multiline modules 008 or 408 one to connect the two PC ports to the operator positions and one to connect the CMS supervisor console Note For a list of optional hardware that can be used with CMS see the documentation provided with CMS 6 20 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications eee L_6 Installation CMS comes with a hardware installation checklist and information on installing the CMS software creating an agent directory programming lines and groups and testing and managing calls The system CU permits
108. the Disallowed List is assigned to tie trunk users and 18 means the Disallowed List is assigned to non tie trunk users Sample Report ACCESS TO DISALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 amp 18 MEAN TIE AND NON TIE RESTRICTIONS List 0 STNS 15 1617 18 19 20 21 RACC 0 2 3 4 5 17 18 Empty lists and empty entries on lists are not printed System Programming Reports I 15 System Programming Reports mm EEE Table l 13 ARS Report Name ARS Print Menu Choice ARS Description Table type area codes and exchanges subpattern A and subpattern B routes FRL absorb digit delete digit Dial 0 tables and N11 tables Sample Report AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION ARS IS ACTIVE ACCESS CODE 9 TABLE 1 Area Code 01 303 02 505 03 602 03 619 Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 70 2 12345 3 08 00 A 2 890 3 08 00 A Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 891 12345 3 17 00 B 2 70 3 17 00 B Above tables are numbered from 1 16 Empty tables lines and entries are not printed Continued I 16 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports E S Table I 13 Continued TABLE 17 Default Toll Output Table Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 70 2 12345 3 08 00 A 2 893 3 08 00 A Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 891 12345 3 17 00 B 2 70 3 17 00 B TABLE 18 Default Local Output Table Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 70 2 12345 3 08 00 A 2 894 3 08 00 Pool Absorb Ot
109. the PC 3 49 Installation Er Connect a Printer 50 or More Feet from the CU Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a printer to the CU that is m 50 or more feet from the CU m not grounded to the same AC outlet as the CU m not grounded to an outlet that is on the same 117 VAC branch as the CU and that is 50 feet or less from the CU Hardware m Z200A EMI filter m adapter for the interface cable connector m 355A for the male connector m 355AF for the female connector gw 400B2 power adapter mw Z9A2 ADU asynchronous data unit a BRI1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block EIA crossover cable ADU crossover cable 2012D transformer 248B adapter D8W cords D6AP power cord RS 232 cable 3 50 The Printer and the PC Installation Procedure see F igure 29 1 Take the end of the Z200A EMI filter cord that is closest to the filter and plug it into the SMDR port the top one on the processor module Plug the other end of the EMI filter cord into a 355AF adapter Connect the female connector on the 355AF adapter to one end of the EIA crossover cable Connect the other end of the EIA cable to the 25 pin male connector of a Z3A2 ADU A caution If the printer is in a building outside the main building CU location an ADU and an additional protector must be installed in each building The ADUs and protectors provide both the CU and the printer additional protection against exposure to ligh
110. the all ones pattern depending on the chosen CSU option 2 Plug the other end of the patch cord into the EQ IN jack on the CSU 3 Using the maintenance screens busy out the 100D module see Line Trunk or Station Busy Out later in this chapter Select CSU lpbk from the 100D module Slot screen to start the 100D module to test data looping through the CSU Four tests are run for each channel The following screen appears CSU lpbk Slot xx This screen indicates that the loopback test is CSU lpbk in Progress running CSU lpbk Slot xx This screen appears if the loopback test is CSU lpbk Passed successfully completed 5 22 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting eee L_ lt CSU lpbk Slot x This screen appears if the CSU lpbk Failed loopback test fails The XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX screen shows the number ee B of failures for each channel XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Exit After the test is completed restore the 100D module by using the maintenance screens see Line Trunk or Station Restore later in this chapter and unplug the patch cord first from the EQ IN jack and then from the EQ OUT jack Port Screens Port screens show information for individual lines trunks and Stations as well as information for RS 232 ports and modems They also allow you to busy out and restore these lines trunks and stations Select Port on the main menu screen Port This screen appears
111. the carrier see Insert the Processor Module earlier in this chapter Install the Auxiliary Power Unit If the system must support more than 54 unit loads install an auxiliary power unit the Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 see in Chapter 2 Note An already installed 335A auxiliary power unit can continue to be used if no new telephones or modules are added to the system Follow these steps to install an auxiliary power unit see 1 Make sure that the ON OFF switch on the power supply module is set to the OFF position Mount the auxiliary power unit on a surface within 2 feet of the CU probably the backboard on which the CU is mounted Insert one end of the modular line cord that comes with the auxiliary power unit into the jack labeled AUX POWER INPUT on the power supply module Insert the other end of the modular line cord into the jack labeled AUX POWER on the auxiliary power unit 3 12 The Control Unit Installation CAUTION Do not plug the power supply module or the auxiliary power unit into the AC outlet until you are ready to turn on the system See Turn the Power On later in this chapter A CAUTION Do not attach the power cord s to any building surfaces Install the Line Trunk and Station Modules Use caution when installing the line trunk and station modules to prevent damage to the connectors See for specific wiring applications A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic disch
112. these steps 1 2 At any telephone that has access to a dial repeating tie trunk press the first tie trunk button The red LED next to the pressed tie trunk button goes on Note In Hybrid PBX systems with pooled tie trunks press the System Access button and dial the pool dial out code Pick up the handset System Acceptance Test 3 123 Installation OOOO The green LED next to the red LED at the tie trunk button goes on 3 Dial the tie trunk number of the station where someone is waiting for your call You hear ringing 4 When the person answers verify that you have good two way communication and hang up 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each tie trunk administered Test The Incoming and Two Way Automatic Start Tie Trunks Follow these steps to test incoming and two way automatic start tie trunks 1 Ata preset time have someone at the far end tie trunk site place a call to your telephone by dialing the proper tie trunk number You hear ringing at the telephone connected to the tie trunk and the green LED next to the tie trunk button flashes 2 Pick up the handset The red LED next to the tie trunk button goes on and the green LED becomes steady 3 Verify that you have good two way communication and hang up 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each tie trunk administered 3 124 System Acceptance Test Installation Test the Incoming and Two Way Dial Repeating Tie Trunks Follow these ste
113. to step 6 4 146 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Nee L__ oo Step Console PC 4 Ifa DSS is not attached Dial extension Type extension to system programming slot and slot and console or if programming port or port or with SPM identify logical ID logical ID telephone to program 5 Toremove telephone from Delete F8 call pickup group m To remove more Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 telephones from call pickup group on line 1 m To remove telephones Exit F5 from another call Cat eat F9 pierup group Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 To assign telephone to Enter F10 call pickup group and Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 assign more telephones to call pickup group shown on line 1 To assign telephone to call pickup group and assign telephones to another call pickup group m f next group number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 Continued Optional Group Assigned Features 4 147 Programming Procedures CT Step 5 Continued Console m f next group number is Enter not sequential 6 When all entries are complete to view telephones assigned to call pickup group 7 Exit Group Paging Step 1 Display Group Page screen 2 Identify paging group to program and save entry If programming more than one group enter lowest group extension number Exit Call Pickup Repeat steps 2 5 Inspct Exit Exit Console Extensions M
114. to test the DID trunks 1 Pick up the handset at the test terminal Dial 03 and then dial a DID number You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and should hear ringing and see the green LED turn on at the called teleohone Note Dialing 03 on a single line telephone works only if the line trunk accepts touch tone dialing After you dial 03 on a single line telephone you may have to wait for a click before dialing the line trunk number Have someone pick up the handset on the called telephone verify that you have good two way communication At the calling telephone put the call on hold Have the person at the called telephone keep the call active by either placing it on hold or laying the handset down System Acceptance Test 3 121 Installation 4 Call all the DID numbers by repeating steps 1 through 3 Note If there are not enough dial out trunks work with the CO to check all the DID trunks or have someone call from the outside to check each DID trunk 5 Hang up all the telephones used in this test Note Before making the following tie trunk tests make sure that the tie trunks for the system are connected and properly configured Test the Incoming Tie Trunks Follow these steps to make sure the incoming tie trunks work 1 At the far end tie trunk site have someone pickup the handset and access a tie trunk assigned to a button on your telephone Your telephone should ring and the gre
115. underneath the termination block and through the fanning slots 2 Insert the conductors into the designated 110 connecting blocks already on the termination block Follow the color sequence shown in 3 Use the D impact tool to seat the conductors see 4 Remove any insulation fragments with a spudger d Repeat steps a through c above for each termination block 5 Mount the wire troughs 6 As needed mount the D rings 7 Label the D8W cords termination blocks and DIW cords properly see Label the System Wiring in this chapter 8 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the station jack on the CU module and the other end into the designated jack on the termination block Do this for all stations 9 Dress the wires through the wire troughs and D rings see SYSTIMAX SYSTIMAX is a wiring method that uses kits containing all the hardware you need to build a cross connect field between the CU and the station jack A CAUTION To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU 3 90 System Wiring Installation With each kit you can build up to 24 jacks The maximum number of stations on the system is 144 and would require six kits Hardware see Figures 39 and Each kit includes m instructions and parts sheet template m two 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with
116. unit if they are not within 50 feet of each other and or are not on the same AC branch circuit m Any additional hardware required by the individual applications included in IS Il including the cables and adapters for connecting the applications to the system m IVP4 boards m 012 basic telephone module to provide the tip ring interface for IVP AA or AVP Installation Install IS Il by using the instructions supplied with the product Highlights of these instructions areas follows 1 Setup the equipment and identify the hardware for IS Il 2 Connect the hardware as shown in the instructions 3 Install the software Test the IS II application If a voice application is installed you will need two 125 Mbyte tape cartridges for system backup Product References Integrated Solution II Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 26 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications ee lt _ lt MERLIN Attendant The MERLIN Attendant is a stand alone application that provides operator like services through the use of prerecorded messages and electronic switching The Attendant automatically answers incoming calls on designated lines with a recorded greeting and transfers these calls to extensions or departments based on information provided by the caller Since the Attendant can respond only to touch tone telephone signals the announcement asks callers who dial from rotary telephones to wait for the system operator Cal
117. which a binary 1 is represented by a positive or negative pulse a binary 0 is represented by no line signal and subsequent binary 1 s must alternate in polarity or there will be a bipolar violation AMI is used in the DS1 interface analog transmission A mode of transmission in which information is represented in continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency phase or resistance See also transmission Glossary GL 1 Glossary application Audix Voice Power Package Software and or hardware that adds functional capabilities to the communications system For example the Call Management System CMS is a DOS based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering calls and distributing them to individual telephones asynchronous data transmission A method of transmitting a short bit stream of data such as printable characters represented by a 7 or 8 bit ASCII code Each string of data bits is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit permitting data to be transmitted at irregular intervals See also synchronous data transmission AVP A voice processing application part of Integrated Solution Il that provides automated attendant call answering voice mail message drop and information services for use with the communications system automatic number identification ANI The process of automatically identifying a caller s billi
118. 0 F4 4 Specify dial mode m For touch tone dial Press line Press function mode button foreach key for each tie tie trunk to turn trunk to make green LED on letter G appear on screen m For rotary dial mode Press line Press function button foreach key next to rotary tie trunk each rotary tie to turn green trunk to erase LED Off letter G Note An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the tie trunk dial or type trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign touch tone or select Delete F8 to assign rotary dial 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Tie Trunks 4 57 Programming Procedures Tie Trunk Dial Tone Step Console PC 1 Display Tie Lines screen LinesTrunks F4 and select Dial Tone TIE Lines F2 Dialtone F8 2 Select the specific tie trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Lines 61 80 F4 3 Specify dial tone m For remote dial tone Press the Press the button for each function key for lineltrunk to turn each line trunk green LED on to make letter G appear on screen m For local dial tone Press the Press the button for each function key for line trunk to turn each line trunk green LED off to erase letter Gq Note An alternate method for step
119. 08 and 408 GS LS TTR modules or to the MU telephone jacks on the 008 MLX module that is located in a different building from but within 1000 cable feet of the CU requires IROB in range out of building protection units These IROBS protect the equipment and the CU from lightning strikes and power surges Two units are required for each piece of equipment one for the CU end of the wire run the other for the equipment end Note No 012 basic telephone modules can be used in IROB applications Use the following IROB protectors m TIl Model 343 PEC 32918 for analog multiline telephones and equipment see Figure 54 m AT amp T Model 505A PEC 32919 for MLX telephones and equipment see Figure 55 A WARNING The IROB protectors must be installed by an AT amp T service technician or an authorized representative or a qualified installer For installation instructions read the CIB that comes with the ROB protector Make sure each IROB protector is properly connected and is grounded to an approved building ground Note The 505A IROB protector contains fused primary and secondary protection for two pairs of wires Auxiliary power cannot be fed through the 505A protector to terminal equipment 3 102 IROB Protection Installation Telephones and Consoles The telephone system supports the MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 20L and MLX 28 telephones see Figures 5 B as well as analog multiline and single line telephones
120. 0B Data Module 2164 BDM 105657654 Z7500B L1 Stand alone power supply 21625 405509852 WP90110L7 Multiple mounting 21626 105441166 Z77A 7500A upgrade kit 21627 105888501 D182208 Magic on Hold player 3128 010 405143827 DECK MMP RCA PR Modem 2224G 2224 CEO 105659965 2224C L1 D 2 Music coupler 61398 406143925 ASSY KS23395L3 PagePac 6 5323 006 405701277 22052 006 PG PC PagePac 6 Plus 5323 008 405701608 22052 000 PG PC6 PagePac 20 Power Matet 5323 005 403308026 ADP06 with three speakers 9323 001 403308067 ADP06 Ring generator unit 61388 105213201 129B RING GEN SMDR printers 475 80 column serial 3330 475 403318942 475 8510BR2 476 132 column serial 3330 476 403818495 476 1550BR2 572 80 column serial 3333 572 406152983 972 9500DR 10IN Any multiline off premises telephone must have an appropriate IROB protector at the control unit location and at the off premises location t Trademark of Plantronics Corporation C 8 Product Ordering Information Product Ordering Information Component PEC System Adjuncts Adapter continued Uninterruptible Power Source UPS 500 VA 15 minutes Reserve 1 hour Universal Paging Access Module UPAM TAM B PRS 48 WMT 1A ZoneMate 9 Dialer unit Control unit ZoneMate 39 Dialer unit Control unit External Alerts Loud external ringer E1CM type Gray Ivory E1CM ringer and parts 290A adapter Ringer Mounting plate Cord 2403 050 24035 58500 n a n a n a 53505 5
121. 1 KIT D182457 PRT MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 20L Designation card covers n a 106448699 KIT D182458 PRT MLX 28D Analog Multiline Telephones Miscellaneous Add Ons Replacement Parts Desk Stands and Wall Mounts Adjustable desk stand 32002 103746855 11A 10 button Adjustable desk stand 32003 103746863 11C 34 button Fixed desk stand 32004 103746848 10A 5 amp 10 button Desk stand wall mount 14A n a BIS 10 Desk stand wall mount 14B n a BIS 22 103804290 14A 003 103964458 14B 003 Twelve per package t Includes both top and bottom cards or covers Eight cards per kit four sets Four per package Product Ordering Information C 13 Product Ordering Information Component PEC Comcode App Code Desk Stands and Wall Mounts continued Desk stand wall mount 14C n a 103979837 140 003 BIS 34 Fixed desk stand and 32000 103804290 10A wall mount 5 button Kit of parts 32000 103995882 D 181230 Wall mount 10 button 32001 103747846 201A Kit of parts 32000 103995882 D 181230 Wall mount 34 button 32006 103747853 203A Kit of parts 32000 103995882 D 181230 Faceplates BIS 10 n a 105203186 KIT PRTS D181582 BIS 22 n a 105336986 KIT PRTS D181784 BIS 22D n a 105690762 D 182210 BIS 34 and BIS 34D n a 105203194 D 181583 Button Label Sheets 10 button BIS n a 105336978 D 181785 22 button BIS n a 105336960 D 181784 22 button BIS with display n a 105690770 D 182211 34 button BIS n a 105336956 D 181783 Display c
122. 10 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed time of day and set or deactivate Reminder Service Cancel m To deactivate paeem F10 Reminder Service Exit F5 Cancel m To setthe time of day Dial time of Type time of that all reminders are day hhmm day hhmm cancelled Enter F10 Exit F5 Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Step Console PC 1 Display Redirect Options F7 Unassigned Extension PoU Numbers screen Mone gp Unassigned F1 4 182 System Features Programming Procedures E _ Eeeee Step Console PC 2 Redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers m To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to QCC queue Hybrid PBX only To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to another extension To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to a calling group QCC Queue F1 Enter Exit Extension Enter Dial extension slot and port logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter Exit Grp Calling Enter Dial calling group exten sion no nnnn Enter Exit F10 F5 F2 F10 Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 F5 F3 F10 Type calling group exten sion no nnnn F10 F5 System Features 4 183 Programming Procedures Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode Step Console PC 1 Display Behind Switch Options F7 menu More PgUp BehndSwitc
123. 100D module to the CSU see Table 3 6 Note Setting SW7 or administering line compensation for the 100D module can provide for cable distances up to 655 feet If the SW7 is set and the 100D module is administered the maximum cable distance between the 100D module and the CSU can be up to 1310 feet Note In the following tables up is the physical position of the setting and represents off or open Down is the physical position of the setting and represents on or closed To effect option changes you must power down the CSU and then power up 3 20 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 1 SW1 Default Settings Channel Service Unit 3 21 Installation Table 3 2 SW2 Default Settings BER threshold is 10 BER threshold is 10 BER threshold is 10 BER threshold is 10 not used not used not used up Alarm LED relay operation is momentary 3 22 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 3 SW4 Default Settings em ee fo man down TABS protocol enabled Channel Service Unit 3 23 Installation Table 3 4 SW5 Default Settings DTE is D4 framed Network is AMI DTE is AMI generate CRC 6 to DTE EE E generate CRC 6 to network 6 e Part 68 Density enforcement 7 up does not poll far end CSU for alarms o pe ee 3 24 Channel Service Unit Installation Table3 5 SW6 Default Settings Position Status send received signal to DTE or
124. 20 105167027 105630529 105217426 105217509 105371942 103842050 105217715 103981965 103981981 105335285 105330419 105480578 105480560 105414130 105414122 App Code 7312H01A 003 7313H01A 003 7314H01A 003 7315H01B 003 7317H01A 003 7317H01B 003 Z7302H01D 003 Z7303H01D 003 Z7309H01C 003 Z7305H01B 003 Z7305H02D 003 Z7305H03D 003 Z7305H04C 003 7102A01A 003 7102A01A 215 2500YMGK 003 2500YMGK 215 2500MMGK 003 2500MMGK 215 Product Ordering Information Component PEC Single Line Telephones continued Model 2500 MMGJ 3101 EBD touch tone desk Black Misty cream Model 2554 MMGJ touch tone wall Black Misty cream Model 500 MM rotary desk Black lvory Beige Model 554 BMPA rotary wall 3100 ORW Black Ivory Beige Consoles MERLIN II System Display 61392 Console 3101 EBW 3100 ORD DSS console black 3156 DCB DSS console white 3156 DCW Applications Call Accounting System CAS CAS Plus LEGEND 1201 DR1 Custom Tariff 12010 CAS Plus upgrade 12009 CAS H CAS H LEGEND 100S 1201 H10 CAS H LEGEND 200S 1201 H20 CAS H Custom Tariff 12050 Comcode 105414155 105414148 105480081 105480032 103870234 103870226 103870267 103823498 103823506 103823555 105229744 105685481 105685499 406362244 406158444 406158394 405799255 405799289 405799420 E hr AppCode 2500MMGJ 003 2500MMGJ 215 2554MMGJ 003 2554MMGJ 215 500MM 03 500MM 50 500MM 60 554BMPA
125. 207 IN 2 Index Automatic Route Selection cont d N11 special number table loudspeaker paging maintenance alarms Music on Hold Voice messaging system Automated Attendant options Auxiliary power 1 25 Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 3 12 lt 3 110 16 5 installation B B channel groups Backboard requirements Backplane Backup Backup power for RAM BB Barrier code 5 8 Basic carrier 3 200 O installation 3 2 Index n SCC Basic system operating conditions automatic maintenance bus C board renumbering Cable labels mode Call Accounting System CAS restarting the system cold Is Il start Call Accounting System CAS system date 4 15_ dg t o system programming position CAS Plusl6 11 assignmenl iia CAS Hospitality 6 11 system time 4 16 Call Accounting Terminal CAT le 4 16 SCS Call Forward problems er Switch mode Call Management System CMS 2 16 4 13 Bipolar 8 zero substitution B8ZS BIS HFAI Bit error rate threshold option Block assignment Block renumbering Board renumbering cold start after adding or changing modules Bridging adapter Busy out 5 6 Busy out andreset 5 15 lt CAS Hospitality 6 8 6 11 _ Central Office troubles Index IN 3 Index Channel service unit CSU chassis connection to the 100D module and the DS1 network Cold start
126. 29A power unit is required The 329A power unit must be ordered separately m A longer D8W telephone cord is required if the wall jack is more than 7 feet from the MLX telephone Note The MFM uses one of the two B channels when it is active This means that when an accessory such as a fax machine and the MLX telephone are in use at the same time Voice Announce to Busy is not possible Voice Announce to Busy is a feature that allows users to be paged on the speakerphone even if they are on a Call Procedure A WARNING Before installing the MFM disconnect all cords line and or power attached to the MLX telephone This is to ensure that no hazardous voltages are present during assembly Ringing voltage from the MFM attached to the MLX telephone can cause electrical shock if adjustments are made while the cords line and or power are connected Follow these steps to install and replace an MFM and change its pin settings 1 Remove the user card tray from the bottom of the desk stand on the telephone 3 104 Telephones and Consoles Installation 2 Remove the desk stand and the module cover see Figure 57 Note To install or replace an MFM in a previously wall mounted MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone go to step 2c a Place the telephone face down on a flat surface Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab Pull the stand toward you and away from the telephone Use a screwdriver to remove th
127. 3 554BMPA 50 554BMPA 60 7318H01A 003 604A1 003 604A1 264 Consult AT amp T or an authorized dealer for other area specific information Product Ordering Information C 5 Product Ordering Information Component PEC Comcode App Code Application continued Call Accounting Terminal CAT CAT B 150S 3600 023 406478800 CAT H 150S 3600 024 406478818 CAT B update 36023 406478792 Custom Tariff CAT H update 36024 406478784 Custom Tariff Call Management System CMS 1207 100 5 1 4 floppy disk 106496540 3 1 2 floppy disk 106496532 Board 8301 100 106198815 MERLIN LEGEND Integrated Solution II AUDIX Voice Power IS II AVP2 1 for LEGEND 1234 VR1 106491608 LEGEND Integ SW 1234 SR1 106491590 IVP4SS R1 2 1234 BR1 106491616 IVP4 Board LEGEND 8306 100 106248651 Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant SAA LEGEND 1234 AA1 106491624 IVP4SS R1 2 LEGEND 1234 BR1 106491616 IVP4 Board LEGEND 8306 100 106248651 Call Accounting System IS Il 1201 U12 406478537 System Programming and 61496 106496565 Maintenance ls Il MERLIN Attendant 6125 ATT Hardware 406221499 Documentation 106431265 Consult AT amp T or an authorized dealer for other area specific information C 6 Product Ordering Information Product Ordering Information Component Applications continued MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System Two port MERLIN MAIL unit Remote maintenance device Four port MERLIN MAIL unit Remote maintenance device Two port line car
128. 303 200 105311401 517A14 400 GS LS TTR 61483 105627988 517A18 408 GS LS 61481 106064678 517A26 800 DID 61488 105628002 517A20 800 GS LS 61484 105627996 517A19 Vintage Line Station Modules 400 with TTRs 61379 105408892 517B12 408 LS 61482 105512495 917C1 800 LS 61384 105351100 517B4 Telephones Digital ISDN MLX Telephones MLX 10 black 3156 02B 105685440 7712D01A 003 MLX 10 white 3156 02W 105665457 7712D01A 264 MLX 10D black 3156 03B 105688303 7712D02A 003 MLX 10D white 3156 03W 105688311 7712D02A 264 MLX 20L black 3156 05B 105685465 7713D01A 003 MLX 20L white 3156 05W 105685473 7713D01A 264 MLX 28D black 3156 048 105688329 7713D02A 003 MLX 28D white 3156 04W 105688337 7713D02A 264 Product Ordering Information C 3 Product Ordering Information Component PEC Analog Multiline Telephones black MLC 5 3168 MLC BIS 10 3165 10B BIS 22 3166 22B BIS 22D 3166 DSB BIS 34 3167 34D BIS 34D 3167 DSB Vintage Analog Multiline Telephones black 5 button 3160 111 10 button 3161 172 10 button HFAI 3161 161 34 button 3162 412 34 button Deluxe 3162 417 34 button BIS 3162 BIS 34 button BIS DIS 3162 DIS Single Line Telephones Model 7102 3185 MWR Black Misty cream Model 2500 YMGK 3178 NHL message waiting recall touch tone desk Black Misty cream Model 2500 MMGK 3101 ETR recall touch tone desk Black Misty cream C 4 Product Ordering Information Comcode 105515332 105161061 105188809 1056304
129. 3506 31016A 31019A Comcode 105610141 105610174 405891698 405899972 405742735 405891680 404057911 405024134 404057929 405024134 103117016 102872934 102917952 02992252 02872934 02988466 03938494 sr D App Code 515 UPS 0050111 ERC W BAT 005E5 KIT UPAM D181900 0181900 D181900 DIAL UNIT 9ZONE CNTL 22050 020 39 ZONE SELECT CNTL 22050 020C RINGER L1AMP 49 RINGER E1CM 49 RINGER E1CM 50 D 181233 290A ADPTR E1CM 49 1049A CORD D4CH 87 20 Product Ordering Information C 9 Product Ordering Information Eee i Component PEC Comcode App Code Supplemental Alerts Bell 61212A 403349962 BELL KS23053L1 Horn 61213A 403349970 KS23053L2 Deluxe horn 61223A 406207217 SIG THET4 1 Strobe 61221A 403319197 STROB SCOPE Chime 61222A 405136060 CHM CHBT2 S1 Telephone Adapters General Purpose Adapter GPA 2301 GPA 103977997 Zic Multi Function Module MFM 3156 MFM 105736474 540A1 Supplemental Alert 2301 SSA 105031199 ADPTR 856A Adapter SAA Telephone Adjuncts Headset adapter 3164 HFA 105752042 ADPTR 502C 003 Headset adapter 62524 105471304 ADPTR KS 23552 Single line telephones 4A Speakerphone 3120 02W 4A Power unit 102139938 PWR UNIT 85B1 Block connector 102434925 BLK CON 82B 49 Adapter for 102813888 ADPTR 223C single line telephone Adapter for 102949013 ADPTR 223D IP muitiline telephone Transmitter 103971891 TRMR 680AF 03 Black 103873873 LSPK 108AA 03 Ivory 103
130. 48B adapter see 3 54 The Printer and the PC Installation 7 Connect the spade tip wires on the 248B adapter to the screws on a 2012D transformer see 8 Plug the 400B2 adapter into a BR1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block 9 Place a plug onto the end of the inside wiring DIW on the CU side and plug the DIW cord into the BR1A 4P adapter 10 On the PC side of the inside wiring punch down the DIW cord onto a 102 or 103 connecting block 11 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the 102 or 103 connecting block and the other end into a Z3A2 ADU 12 Connect one end of an RS 232 cable to the Z3A2 ADU and the other end to the COM1 port on the PC 13 Plug the 2012D transformer into a wall outlet The Printer and the PC 3 55 Installation Data Adapters Adapters are needed to connect data equipment to the control unit The kind of adapter used depends on whether or not the data is analog or digital For analog data a modem or modem pool is used for digital data an ISDN 7500B Data Module is used ISDN 7500B Data Module The ISDN 7500B Data Module is used to connect a digital data terminal to the system on a 008 MLX module The data module is used at the digital data station to make and receive data calls When a data terminal is used to make calls the keyboard is used to dial the number Instead of converting digital data signals to analog signals as a modem does the 7500B maintains a digital data form
131. 5 After all modules have been installed label all jacks with the numbered labels provided with the feature module The labels for lines trunks have a cream colored background and green numbers The labels for stations have a cream colored background and blue numbers a Label each line trunk jack on the modules sequentially from 01 up to 80 Begin with the module in slot 01 numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier b Label each station jack on the modules sequentially from 01 up to 144 Begin with the module in slot 01 numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier 3 14 The Control Unit Installation TT Note For each 400EM module set the dual in line package DIP switches on the module for the desired tie trunk options see and Tie Trunk Signaling in Chapter 1 Follow these steps to remove a module 1 Press upon the tab on the bottom of the module 2 Pull the bottom of the module away from the carrier 3 Lift upward to disengage the module from the rod on the top of the carrier Provide Proper Grounding Proper grounding of the system protects it from m lightning m power surges m power crosses on CO lines trunks m electrostatic discharge ESD A WARNING Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation There is a risk of electric shock if the system is not properly grounded Follow these s
132. 5 4 Commands appearing on the screen applicable only to SPM using fixed buttons 4 8 omen een signaling Connecting block damaged 3 101 Control unit yi s 82 backboard 26 to an AC outlet 3 160 dimensions 270 0 sis eavronmental requirements housing 1 tsj o location 2 6 2 7 _ power TE Copy call restrictions Copy line trunk assignments Copy line trunk options Copy telephone number to number to send 4 77 ed Cordless telephone Coverage IN 4 Index Coverage delay interval 4 153 Coverage test 3 127 3 128 Credit card verification terminal B 4 B 14 D D4 framing Data adapter Data capabilities Data entry screens 4 7_ __ Data hunt groups 1 39 Data module see ISDN 7500B Data Module Delay announcement 4 161 Delay dial start 1 16 HG ee Delayed ring interval 4 153 467 00 Delete digits 4 67 Demand tests Dial 0 tables 4 212 Dial access code format Dial signaling for loop start ground start lines or trunks Dial tone Dialed Number Identification service DNIS Dictation system access testing 3 131 Index DID see Digit absorption Digital switch_element DSE Digital switching Digital ISDN MLX telephones 26 DIP switches DID Direct inward dialing 1 39 trunks Disallowed Lists 1 39 4 189 assignment to telephones 4 190 Disconnect time
133. 873881 LSPK 108AA 50 Green 103873899 LSPK 108AA 51 Beige 103873907 LSPK 108AA 60 White 103873964 LSPK 108AA 58 202A Speakerphone 3152 008 Black 105721088 TEL S202A 003 Misty cream 105721096 TEL S202A 215 C 10 Product Ordering Information Product Ordering Information A Component PEC Comcode App Code Telephone Adjuncts continued S203A Speakerphone 3131 008 Black 106058340 MOD S203A 003 Misty cream 106058365 MOD S203A 215 Bracket 106284011 BRKT S203 WL oT Message Waiting Indicator 31032 103966396 Z34A Hands Free Unit HFU 3163 HFU 103953790 MOD S102A 185 Headsets Analog Multiline Telephones Supra 3122 011 403350085 HDST KS22990L1 3122 012 403350077 HDST KS22990L2 3122 013 403350051 HDST KS22990L3 StarSet II 3122 001 403241540 HDST KS22915L1 3122 002 403241557 HDST KS 22915L2 3122 003 403241565 HDST KS 22915L3 3122 004 403350093 HDST KS23080L1 StarMate E 3122 204 403412307 HDST KS23080L4 3122 214 403973431 HDST KS23080L5P Digital ISDN MLX Telephones StarSet II StarMate E 3122 304A 405211723 HDST KS23080L7 Supra StarMate E n a n a HDST KS23080L8 MLX Telephones Miscellaneous Add Ons Replacement Parts Handsets and Cords Handset black n a 106050065 K2S1 003 Handset white n a 106053408 K2S1 264 Handset amplified hearing 31052 Black 105581896 K6S2 003 White 106248248 K6S2 264 Misty cream 105581904 K6S2 215 Product Ordering Information C 11 Product Ordering Information I l Component PEC Comcode App
134. A 14 Wiring Diagrams Wiring PAGE PAC 20 POWERMATE MODEL 22050 001 MAGIC ON HOLD Figure A 9 Multizone Paging with Background Music MOH and Talk Back Wiring Diagrams A 15 Adjuncts The following table summarizes the types and specifications of adjuncts that can be connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System the available AT amp T products and associated ordering codes PECs and the appropriate interfaces A description of each equipment type follows the table Adjuncts B 1 Adjuncts Table B 1 Adjunct Types and Specifications Equipment Type Alerts AC Alerts DC Answer record machine B 2 Adjuncts Specifications AT amp T Products m Any audible or visual External ringer alert that operates loud on 20 30 HZ External ringer ringing signals mA device associated with a specific sta tion supplemental alert or that works on a programmed line trunk port external alert m Any audible or visual Alert bell alert that operates Alert horn on 48 WC ringing Alert Strobe signals Alert chime m A device associated Alert deluxe with a specific sta horn tion supplemental Alert switch alert or that works on a programmed line trunk port external alert Em Industry standard Model 1330 machine Answering m Low ringer Machine equivalence less Model 1531 than 0 15 or lt 1 0 Remote total REN for T R Answering port system m Ability to recognize Telephone 600 ms disconnect
135. AA Transfer Rtn TT Duration TT interval LinesTrunks Extension Trunk info The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option Press Inspct or PgDn J 6 System Programming Menu Hierarchy Two Digit Numbering Plan The following figure and text explain the two digit numbering plan Two Digit Numbering Plan K 1 Two Digit Numbering Plan Operator Console not flexible 0 Stations 1 10 19 Stations 20 29 Stations 3 30 39 Stations 40 49 Stations 50 59 OnE Extra Stations Extra Adjunct 60 67 6800 6885 6900 6985 Main Pool MFMs 7500Bs MLX Adjuncts Calling Group Page 70 710 767 770 791 7920 7929 793 799 Lines Park Pools 801 880 881 888 B 890 899 ARS Access Hybrid PBX Mode Idle Line Access 9 3 0 al 4 a B o Figure K 1 Two Digit Numbering Plan A 800 Listed Directory Number QCC Queue B 889 Remote Access The numbers in the figure are arranged in blocks according to the first digit The type of equipment jack or feature to which they are assigned is indicated in the block Each of the first 58 station jacks is assigned a two digit extension number beginning with extension 10 and ending with extension 67 The rest of the stations 68 144 are assigned four digit extension numbers 6800 6885 Extra adjuncts are assigned as extensions 6900 6985 The extension numbers shown for MFMs 7500Bs 710 767 are reserved for digital station jacks Thes
136. AT amp T 555 610 140 Issue 1 i p A ee August 1991 T T ee MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation Programming amp Maintenance Copyright 1991 AT amp T AT amp T 555 610 140 All Rights Reserved Issue 1 Printed in U S A August 1991 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Department Of Communications DOC Information For important FCC and DOC interference registration and repair information see in this book Trademarks Accunet is a registered trademark of AT amp T Dimension is a registered trademark of AT amp T Horizon is a registered trademark of AT amp T Magic on Hold is a registered trademark of AT amp T Megacom is a registered trademark of AT amp T MERLIN is a registered trademark of AT amp T MERLIN LEGEND is a trademark of AT amp T MERLIN MAIL is a trademark of AT amp T MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 20L and MLX 28D are trademarks of AT amp T MultiQuest is a registered trademark of AT amp T SYSTIMAX is a trademark of AT amp T MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation PagePac is a registered trademark of DRACON a Harris Corporation Starset is a registered trademark of Plantronics Corporation Supra and StarMate are trademarks of Plantronics Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark o
137. AT amp T system xxii Customer Support Information Customer Support Information If you purchased your system arecty from AT amp T AT amp T will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific Nee of AT amp T maintenance coverage you selected A written Spanair of amp T s types of maintenance coverage maybe obtained from AT amp T by calling 1 800 247 7000 If you purchased your system from an AT amp T authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This AT amp T limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges including power surges due to lightning The following will not be deemed to impair the good working order of the system and AT amp T will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from m failure to follow AT amp T s installation operation or maintenance instructions m unauthorized system modification movement or alteration m unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system m abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control m acts of third parties and acts of God AT amp T S OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE AT amp T ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES
138. B hhmm hhmm Start Time for Sub pattern A 7 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Pool Routing Step Console PC 1 Display Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu mae F6 2 Select subpattern to program pool routing for m TO program pool Sub A Pools F3 routing for Subpattern A m O program pool Sub B Pool F10 routing for Subpattern B Automatic Route Selection 4 205 Programming Procedures lt S rt C lt 7T 7 7 S t lt St Step Console PC 3 Identify table number Dial table Type table 1 18 and route number number number 1 6 to program and followed by followed by save entry route number route number ttr ttr Enter F10 4 Identify pool on which to Dial pool dial Type pool dial route calls and save entry out code nnn out code nnn m o save entry and enter pool dial out code for another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1 m f next pool route Next F9 number is Repeat this Repeat this sequential step step alf next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential or Sub A Pools F3 or or Sub B Pools F10 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 m To save your entry Enter F10 when all entries are complete 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 4 206 Automatic Route Selection Programming Procedures i Facility Restriction Level save entry If programming more than one pool route enter lowest pool route number route number ttr Enter Step Console PC 1 Dis
139. Behind Switch mode only 2 Square Indicate configuration of lines then go to step 5 Q Modified 3 Hybrid PBX mode only Q Yes Do all modules in the carrier have MLX and or LI No analog multiline station jacks alf no auxiliary power is not required a lf yes continue to step 4 4 Hybrid PBX mode only Calculate the total number of MLX and analog multiline telephones Number of MLX 20L telephones connected to modules in the carrier Number of MLX 28D telephones connected to modules in the carrier Number of 34 button analog multiline telephones connected to modules in the carrier Total of MLX 20L MLX 28D and 34 button analog telephones UL a lf total is less than 45 auxiliary power is not required a f total is 45 or more continue to step 5 D 2 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 5 Calculate the estimated unit loads Module Qty x Unit Load Total 008 MLX mem o e f fe m fe Total Estimated Unit Load a f total is less than 54 auxiliary power is not required a lf total is 54 or more continue to step 6 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 3 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 6 Calculate the actual carrier unit load Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX Equipment or Modified Square Network Access Lines DID DS1 GS LS Tie Telephones MLX 10 MLX 10D MLX 28D MLX 20L BIS 10 BIS 22 BIS 22D BIS 34 BIS 34D MLC 5 10 B
140. Console PC 26 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change T308 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 25 Repeat step 25 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential KAS F5 Repeat Repeat steps 24 26 steps 24 26 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 27 If no change to setting for Go to step 30 Go to step 30 T309 Timer To change T309 Timer T309 Timer F10 setting display T309 Timer screen 28 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting Dial number of Type number of 30 120 sec seconds nnn seconds nnn PRI Facilities 4 91 Programming Procedures A Step Console PC 29 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change T309 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 28 Repeat step 28 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential exit F5 Repeat Repeat steps 27 29 steps 27 29 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 30 If no change to setting for Go to step 33 Go to step 33 T310 Timer To change T310 Timer More PgUp setting display T310 T310 Timer F1 Timer screen 31 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting 2 10 sec 4 92 PRI Facilities Dial number of seconds
141. D1D1D1D1D1D1D1 Exit gt 5 12 Maintenance inventory information appears Press the More button to show the inventory information for the other modules Maintenance and Troubleshooting es The inventory information System Inventory Slot xx for the first line trunk and Board xxxxxx station module appears Hardware Vintage Press More to show information for the next Exit module Firmware Vintage Slot Screens Slot screens let you check the status of the module in a particular slot and to perform maintenance activities such as demand tests and restore Note On the maintenance screens the power supply modules are not represented and the processor module is numbered 00 To get to all slot functions select Slot from the main menu Slot The slot screen appears Enter slot number 00 17 Enter the slot number of the module you want by keying in the number using the Backspace dialpad MLX 20L Exit telephone or the keyboard PC and pressing Enter XX Slot Status Slot Status gives information about the module in a particular slot Enter the slot number of the module you want Maintenance 5 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting I Slot 00 Make a selection Status Auto Test Demand Test Exit Status Slot 00 LED Raaa Errors Alarms Exit Slot xx Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy Out Reset Restore Exit Status Slot xx LED Raaa
142. Display Tie Lines screen and select Disconnect Time 4 60 Tie Trunks LinesTrunks TIE Lines Disconnect F4 F2 F10 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no Type trunk no entry 801 880 801 880 If you are programming slot and port or slot and port or more than one tie trunk logical ID logical ID enter the lowest trunk Enter F10 number 3 Specify disconnect time Dial number of Type number of 140 2400 ms ms Nnnn ms nnnn 4 Save entry and either program another tie trunk or exit m To save entry and specify disconnect time for another tie trunk If next tie trunk number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 If next tie trunk number Enter F10 is not sequential WISSenneee F10 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m To save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are complete vase FS Exit F5 Tie Trunks 4 61 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Block Assignment Step Console PC screen and select Block DID F4 Assignment Block F4 2 Identify block 1 or 2 and Dial trunk block Type Trunk save entry number n block number n Enter F10 3 Select specific DID trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Lines 61 80 F4 4 62 D
143. Dry loop DS1 facilities 1 8 1 42 1 43 448000 O 4 43 channel service unit 4 51 ss clock synchronization framing format framing mode i 1 57 signaling formats signaling mode type of service zero code suppression DS1 facility interface 1 41 DTMF signaling E E amp M mode E amp M signal Elevate priority 4 136 Entering system last 10 system errors ESF T1 Channel Service Unit Exiting system programming 4 3 Expansion carrier 3 3 o installation 3 3 Index IN 5 Index T amp Expected digits Features cont d Extended superframe ESF framing format Extension Directory 4 222 Extension Status External alert fo Alarm 4 169 F Facility restriction level Fax machine Feature module replacement Features Feature capacities 4 222 r Calls In Queue Automatic Callback interval Extension Status 4 178 general use F 1 F 2 host system Behind Switch mode inside dial tone One Touch Transfer Recall timer IN 6 Index dial codes for 4 178 4 207 1 39 4 111 B 6 Allowed Lists 4 186 assignment to telephones 4 187 redirect outside calls to unassigned extension numbers Reminder Service Cancel 4 182 Remote Access Automatic e barrier codes class of restriction with barrier codes 4 199 Without barrier cod
144. E ports Voice Messaging System VMS 4 116 6 93 oZ Index IN 17 Index N OOO Oo o3 _ ____ Workstation on local area network LAN 1 41 ead W WP90110 L1 power unitl3 58 Warm start WATS service Wet loop 3 29 290 Wink start 1451 46 _ Ad Wiring A 1 Z connections Z77A data mounting H a re Zero code suppression ZCS 8 position station jacks back to back 100D modules A 10 back to back tie trunk ae Behind Switch Wirig multizone paging with background music MOH and talk back A 15 si RS 232 flow control cable A 5 single zone paging with background music and MOH A 14 single zone paging with customer supplied amplifier single zone paging with PagePac 20 single zone paging with paging access module tie trunk jack to RJ2GX network interface tie trunk wiring diagrams A 8 A 15 _ ZoneMate 9 IN 18 Index ILLUSTRATIONS taxes Gee ERIE a Monins 55 ie E a b N WIRE ENCLOSURE CLIPS BASIC CARRIER 00 01 02 03 04 05 ft PEP dda td r PEEELELttl BACKBOARD EXPANSION CARRfER 06 07 08 09 10 11 PROCESSOR MODULE odule Label Processor SMDR Port System Programming aintenance Port LED Warning Light Power Indicator Green LED Auxiliary Power Input Jack On Off Switch Power Connection Grounding Screw 19 i Off Premises Telephone L OPT Jacks
145. F adapter m 400B2 power adapter m BRI1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block m Z3A2 ADU asynchronous data unit m EIA crossover cable m ADU crossover cable The Printer and the PC 3 53 Installation i ee 2012D transformer 248B adapter 102 or 103 connecting block DIW cable D8W cords D6AP power cord RS 232 cable Procedure see F igure 32 1 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the system programming maintenance jack the lower one on the processor module Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter 2 Connect an EIA crossover cable to the 355AF adapter 3 Connect one end of an RS 232 cable to the EIA crossover cable and the other end to a ZBA2 ADU A CAUTION If the PC is in a building outside the main building CU location an ADU and an additional protector must be installed in each building The ADUs and protectors provide both the CU and the PC additional protection against exposure to lightning inadvertent contact with power lines and power currents induced by nearby power lines See the installation notes packed with the ADU for more information 4 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into an ADU crossover cable 5 Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks on a 400B2 power adapter 6 Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the other jack of the 400B2 adapter Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the jack on a 2
146. F4 and select E amp M Signal TIE Lines F2 E amp M Signal F4 2 Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no Type trunk no entry 801 880 801 880 if you are programming _ slot and port or slot and port or more than one tie trunk logical ID logical ID enter the lowest trunk Enter F10 number 3 Specify E amp M trunk signaling m For type 1S signaling Type 1S F1 m For type 1C signaling Type 1c F2 m For type 5 signaling Tpye 5 F3 Tie Trunks 4 55 Programming Procedures pE Step Console PC 4 Save choice and either program more tie trunks or exit m To save choice and specify signaling for another tie trunk If next tie trunk number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 If next tie trunk number Enter F10 is not sequential E amp M Signal F4 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m To save choice and RIAA F10 exit when all entries 7 are complete Baat ae Exit F5 Dial Mode Step Console PC 1 Display TIE Lines screen LinesTrunks F4 TIE Lines F2 2 Program tie trunk dial mode m For incoming tie trunk Inmode F6 dial mode m For outgoing tie trunk Outmode F7 dial mode 4 56 Tie Trunks Programming Procedures m n LL Step Console PC 3 Select the specific tie trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 ines 61 8
147. Frwd Message Queue Alarm Xtni Alert Overflow Members Line Poo Group Type Auto Login Auto Logout integ VMI Generic VMI The Inspect festufe can be used with this menu option Press Inspect or PgDn J 4 System Programming Menu Hierarchy System Programming Menu Hierarchy eee lt S FFS C lt S t t tCSt Options Transfer Retum Time CampOn One Touch loa Manual Hold Automatic Delay Ring Callback Audible Music On Hold Ringback Type Filipe Ring Ext Status Hotel GrpCalVCMS SMDR j Format EA Call Length ISDN SMOR Call Report in Out New Page Out Only insideDial 1 insid Remind Svc Outside Unassigned QCC Queue Grp Calling BehndSwitch Transfer Conference Drop RecaliTimer 30 ms 450 ms 650 ms 1 sec Rotary No Delay Cover Delay Tables AllowList AllowTo Disallow DisallowTo ARS ARS 1 7Dial WihnAreaCod NotWthnArCo ARS input 6 Digit Sub A Pools Area Code Sub A FRL Exchange SubA Absorb 147 Sub A Digit Sub B Start Sub B Stop Sub B Pool Sub B FRL SubB Absorb Sub B Digit SpeciNumber ARS FRL ARS Digits Dial 0 ARS Pool ARS FRL ARS Digits The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option Press Inspct or PgDn System Programming Menu Hierarchy J 5 System Programming Menu Hierarchy rr AuxEquip Music On Hold Ldspkr Pg Fax Port MaintAlarms Msg Waiting VMS
148. GISTER BAD TEST STATUS REGISTER BAD DPR TEST NOT COMPLETED a Station port board failure No port boards are present m Station board failure m Faulty module detected during cold start m Faulty module detected during cold start or background check m Faulty module detected during cold start or background check m Faulty module detected during cold start or background check m Faulty module detected during cold start or background check If problem persists check or replace module No action is needed Remove entry from transient log If problem persists check or replace module Contact the NTSC If problem persists check or replace module If problem persists check or replace module If problem persists check or replace module If problem persists check or replace module If problem persists check or replace module Troubleshooting 5 53 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 780C RAM TEST N A Contact the NTSC FAILURE 7800 780E 8001 8402 8403 5 54 Troubleshooting ROM TEST FAILURE UPPER ROM TEST FAILURE TEST TA HARDWARE ERROR WINK TOO SHORT NO EXTERNAL RELEASE a Memory failed ROM test a Memory failed ROM test Wink from far end is less than minimum for an outgoing tie trunk with delay dial or wink start Line is waiting for valid
149. I loop start ports should be programmed for reliable far end disconnect m The Attendant can answer every call that comes in or just answer calls that ring on certain lines m Unanswered transferred calls do not return to the Attendant they are redirected to a designated extension such as the system operator m If the extension called is busy or unanswered or if it is after business hours calls can be directed to an answering machine to allow callers to leave messages m The Attendant can direct and transfer calls to fax machines m The system may need more touch tone receivers if a Single line telephone users do not get dial tone a AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls a Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage prematurely 6 28 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications m When the Attendant is set up for after hours operation the time on the Attendant s clock must match the system clock so the end of the business day is recognized m The Attendant provides 64 seconds for recording up to five standard messages including the caller greeting used during and after business hours a hold announcement for a caller who Is being transferred a connect announcement for the department or extension receiving a transferred call and a message explaining that a call cannot be completed Hardware Requirements m 012 basic telephone module e MERLIN Attendant unit and cords Installation Although the Attenda
150. ID Trunks Programming Procedures E Step Console PC 4 Assign or remove DID trunk To assign DID trunk to Press line Press function block button for each keys for each trunk to turn trunk to make green LED on letter Q appear on screen To remove DID trunk Press line Press function from block button for each key for each trunk to turn trunk to erase green LED off letter G Note An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the DID trunk dial or type trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign to the block or select Delete F8 to remove from the block 5 When all entries are Exit F5 complete z Exit F5 Exit F5 DID Trunk Type step Console PC 1 Display DID Trunks LinesTrunks F4 screen and select DID DID F4 Trunk Type Type F4 DID Trunks 4 63 Programming Procedures Step 2 Identify block 1 or 2 and save entry 3 Specify type for trunk block For immediate start m For wink start 4 Save choice and either program the other trunk block or exit m To save entry and specify type for the other trunk block m To Save and exit when all entries are complete Disconnect Time Step 1 Display DID Trunks screen and select Disconnect Time 4 64 DID Trunks Console Dial trunk block number n Enter Immed Wink Next Repeat step 3 Enter Exit Exit Console LinesTrunks DID Disconnect
151. INFORMATION GENERAL OPTIONS ACCESS CODE 889 Barrier Code required for Non TIE DISA Lines Yes Barrier Code required for TIE DISA lines No Automatic Queuing enabled for DISA lines No SYSTEM DEFAULT CLASS OF RESTRICTIONS NON TIE Restriction OUTWARD RESTRICTED ARS Restriction Level 3 Allowed Lists 12 Disallowed Lists 12 SYSTEM DEFAULT CLASS OF RESTRICTIONS TIE Restriction UNRESTRICTED ARS Restriction Level 4 Allowed Lists 12 Disallowed Lists 12 BARRIER CODE ADMINISTRATION Barrier Code Number 1 Barrier Digits 1234 Restriction UNRESTRICTED ARS Restriction Level 4 Allowed lists 12 Disallowed Lists 12 Information for unassigned barrier codes is not printed System Programming Reports I 9 System Programming Reports T lt E Table l 8 Operator Information Report Name Operator Information Print Menu Choice Oper Info Description For each operator position the logical ID extension number label type DLC or QCC and all general system operator options such as back up positions etc Sample Report OPERATOR INFORMATION OPERATOR POSITIONS PORT CALL ALERT ADDR EXT LABEL TYPE QCC ONLY 3 5 10 MIRIAM QCC YES GENERAL OPTIONS Length of hold reminder timer 20 sec DLC Automatic hold enabled YES DIRECT STATION SELECTOR DSS OPTIONS BUTTON FIRST NUMBER DIAL CODE 0 2 50 3 100 Operator Call Park codes 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 Contin
152. Information xv Customer Support Information Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicable aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le ministere des Communications du Canada FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be prong a standard network interface jack USO RJ11C RJ14C RJ21X Connection to E amp M tie trunks requires a USOC RJ2GX Connection to off premises stations requires a USOC RJ11C or RJ14C Connection to 1 544 Mbs digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ48C or RJ48X Connection to DID requires a RJ11C RJ14C or RJ21X These USOCs must be ordered from your telephone company This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines m Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this obren you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following a The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment a The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the back or bottom of the control unit is as follows If this equipmen
153. L WEGSSY epeues np suojerunWwwo Sap zsjuju aj Jed P p anbuyaja0lper abeyjinoig aj Ins juawalbay suep sayosad Y assed e ap sanbuawnu saedde xne sajqeridde say s juessedap sanbuyejaoipe syindg ap sed jawa u anbijawnu jiasedde juasaid aq suojediunwwo jo Juawyedaqg uelpeue gt ayy JO suogen aduaJapaqul Ope y Ul INO Jas SuUOISsiWa SJOU opea 10 SWI Y SSE ay paddxa Jou s op smeedde jeibip Siu ed pue ad uas 104 Juahe pazuoujne nok zeuo apisul syed jqe u s Jasn ou ae 31y JONpoud Siy ul enuey uogeezsu au ul p yp ds se syun Jamod pue saljquasse 193123 s npow PUD GNIOIT NITHAW pamoenuew L91Y juo asn YSN NI JQVW LNAWdINOA aes 3NOHda1al aasn if Bay 994 Sainy 394 89 Wed YM saldwo uoneiado pausapun Customer Support Information Location Label Placement MERLIN LEGEND D O C asned Aew yey adualapajul BGulpnjoul PIAI JUJU Aue dade Jsnw arinap SIY Z pue adualapayul jnjwuey asned Jou ew ariAap Siy T suoppuos om Burmojjoz y 0 p fqns s uoneladQ sainy J94 ay JO GT Ye M Saldwiod JA P SIUL w 0N39341 NNJN HU 104 U09 V LLS I POWN A xx Customer Support Information Customer Support Information Security of Your System Preventing Toll Fraud As a customer of a new telephone system you should be aware that there exists an pha problem of telephone toll fraud Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms despite the nu
154. LEDs for all the modules except the power supply module The simulated LEDs are R red Y yellow and G green R indicates an alarm or standby state when a module enters a normal state the R LED goes off When a call is in progress on a module the Y LED is on The word on or off appears after the R Y or G Automatic Tests The system automatically runs tests to monitor the status of equipment m audit operations consistency m detect hardware malfunctions Maintenance 5 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting OO EEE lt 6 os The tests check hardware and software that are in service but do not disrupt normal service Any errors detected are registered in the error logs Errors are corrected automatically whenever possible As necessary automatic testing causes an alarm Demand Tests Demand diagnostic tests for the line trunk and station modules are selected and scheduled by using the menu screens Demand tests m increase the effectiveness of on site troubleshooting and repair m verify complaints of malfunctioning equipment Note For some modules the demand test does not test the shared memory When a demand test fails the module being tested either was not busied out or is faulty and may have to be replaced To run demand tests the processor module the power supply module and the MLX 20L telephone or PC must be working Note You cannot run a demand test on the 008 MLX module to which the M
155. LX 20L telephone is attached However you can run a demand test on this module from the PC To run a demand test you must take the equipment out of service You can choose Busy Out or Reset to do this but Busy Out is preferred since m Busy out removes lines and stations as they become idle but does not disrupt calls in progress m Reset drops all calls in progress and removes equipment from service 5 6 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting E h lt 3K S ks hs kr Once the equipment is out of service you can select demand tests After testing is finished choose Restore from the menu to cancel Busy Out or Reset Note A cold start or a warm start does not restore equipment that has been busied out or reset On Site Maintenance You can do on site maintenance with an MLX 20L telephone or a PC with SPM software The MLX 20L plugs into whichever of the first five jacks on the first MLX module is being used as the system programming maintenance port The default is the first MLX jack Only one jack at a time can be used for system programming or maintenance The PC plugs into the RS 232 system programming maintenance port Remote Maintenance By using a PC with System Programming and Maintenance SPM software the maintenance technician and personnel from the National Service Assistance Center NSAC and the National Technical Service Center NTSC or an authorized AT amp T
156. MERLIN II System Display Console CMS agents can have any MDX telephone or any analog multiline telephone that can be used with the system CMS agent telephones must be connected to the first 58 telephone jacks on the control unit CMS allows only a two digit method to specify an extension number jacks 59 to 144 are designated by four digits a The two CMS interface card ports on the PC must be connected to two analog multiline telephone jacks on the same analog multiline telephone module these jacks must be operator positions If two operator position jacks are not available on the same module another analog multiline telephone module must be installed in the control unit to provide these jacks a CMS lines trunks can be loop start ground start T1 emulated ground start or ISDN PRI a Up to four CMS external alerts can be used for agents and supervisors For example an alert sounds if the number of calls waiting to be answered nears a programmed threshold a A MERLIN Attendant can be used to direct callers to the appropriate CMS group Applications 6 19 Adapters Accessories and Applications E m To play music for waiting callers you must attach a Music on Hold MOH product to the system that is compatible with an AT amp T MOH coupler Note If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as
157. Pin Color Strep Color A 2 Wiring Tables Wiring Table A 3 Tie Trunk J ack to RJ 2GX Network Interface C U Trk Trk Trk Trk Trk Trk Trk Trk Pin Jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T 5 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 4 R 4 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 T1 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 Wiring Tables A 3 Wiring a e ea e amp Table A 4 T R Analog Multiline Telephone and MLX 8 Position Station J acks Analo Multiline D8W 103A DIW 25 Pr T R Jack Telephone MLX Pair Cord Term Cable Conn Desig Pin Desig Desig Color Strep Color Pin T 5 V1T TRMT G 1 W BL 1 R 4 VIR TRMT 1 R 2 BL 26 CT n c BL 3 z n c 1 W O 2 CR 2 V2T 48V V2R GND 4 S These leads are connected at telephones for Voice Announce to Busy but are not connected at the CU Voice Announce to Busy and Simultaneous Voice and Data require two adjacent odd even jacks connected to the station via adapter BR 241 B1 A 4 Wiring Tables Wiring gt EEE Table A 5 Ejight Pin RS 232 Flow Control Cable Pin No Processor DCE Data Term DTE Wiring Tables A 5 Wiring o Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations are examples of different wiring applications for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System A 6 Wiring Diagrams Wiring Digital PBX System 25 Pair Cable 25 Type System 75 To Telephones and Adjunct Equipment Figure A 1 Behind Switch Wiring Wiring Diagrams A 7 Wiring Figure A 2 Tie T
158. Repeat step 4 Disallowed List shown on line 1 to more telephones To assign Disallowed List to telephone and assign another Disallowed List to telephones m If next list number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 m lf next list irs IS Enter F10 not sequentia E F5 DisallowTo F4 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 6 When all entries are Exit F5 complete exit Exit F5 System Features 4 191 Programming Procedures Remote Access Line Trunk Assignment Step Console PC 1 Display Remote Access LinesTrunks F 4 screen and select Lines Remote F 8 and Trunks Access LinesTrunks F 1 2 Identify line trunk to Dial line trunk Type line trunk program and save entry no 801 880 no x slot slot and and port no or port no or logical ID logical ID Enter F10 3 Specify Remote Access use m To specify line trunk is Dedicated F1 always used for Remote Access m Tospecify line trunkis Shared F2 used for Remote Access only when Night Service is activated m To remove Remote No Remote F3 Access 4 192 System Features Programming Procedures Step Console 4 Save entry and either program more lines trunks or exit m To save entry and assign Remote Access to another line trunk Next m f next line trunk number is Repeat step 3 sequential m f next extension Enter number is not LinesTrunks sequential Repeat steps 2 4 m To save entry and exit Enter when all entries are
159. Requiring Simultaneous Voice and Data Feature Step Console PC 1 Display Data Voice Data More PgUp screen F2 Voice Data F1 2 Ifa DSS is not attached Go to step 3 Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign voice data Press DSS pairing for button for either Simultaneous Voice extension to and Data feature turn red LED on red LED for other extension in pair automatically goes on Go to step 6 Continued Telephones 4 107 Programming Procedures Step 2 Continued m To remove voice data pairing for Simultaneous Voice and Data feature 3 If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify extension number for either pair 4 To assign voice data pairing for Simultaneous Voice and Data feature To remove voice data pairing for Simultaneous Voice and Data feature 5 To program more telephones To view extensions with Simultaneous Voice and Data feature 6 Exit Console Press DSS button for either extension to turn red LED off red LED for other extension automatically goes off Go to step 6 Dial extension slot and port or logical ID Enter Delete Repeat steps 3 and 4 Inspct Exit PC Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 F8 Repeat steps 3 and 4 PgDn F5 F5 Exit 4 108 Telephones Programming Procedures
160. S wide area telecommunications service m 800 service In WATS m foreign exchange FX 1 14 Control Unit oystem Description Tie Trunks Tie trunks provide private communication between two systems Tie trunks tie the two systems together making it seem that all the telephones are on the same system See Networking Capabiliies in this chapter for more information on how tie trunks connect to other systems Tie trunks provide efficient communication between systems at different locations These locations can be different floors of the same building different buildings in the same campus or different cities or states Tie trunks can be added to the system via the 400EM module The 400EM module has four ports that must be programmed individually by selecting trunk options and setting the DIP dual in line package switches located on the front of the module for different signaling modes and types see The following tie trunk options need to be programmed Direction a Two way factory setting Calls can be made in either direction m Outgoing only Calls can be dialed but not received no ringing a Incoming only Calls can be received but not dialed no dialing m Signaling Type can be any of the following types programmed via the 400EM module The type of signal can be set separately for incoming and outgoing calls for example a tie trunk can be wink start for incoming calls and delay dial start for o
161. SS Direct Station Selector DTE data terminal equipment DXS direct extension selector EIA Electronic Industries Association E amp M ear and mouth receive amp transmit EPROM erasable and programmable read only memory FACE Forced Account Code Entry fax facsimile FCC Federal Communications Commission FRL Facility Restriction level FX foreign exchange GPA General Purpose Adapter HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Abbreviations ABB 1 Abbreviations SS O HFU hands free unit SA System Access ICOM Intercom SAA Supplemental Alert VO input output Adapter IROB __in range out of SMDR Station Message building Detail Recording IS Il Integrated Solution Il SPM System Programming ISDN Integrated Services and Maintenance Digital Network SSN Switched Services IVP Integrated Voice Network Power Automated T R tip and ring Attendant TDM _ time division multiplex kbps kilobits per second TEI terminal equipment LAN local area network identifier LDN listed directory TTR touch tone receiver number UPAM Universal Paging LED light emitting diode Access Module LS loop start UPS uninterruptible power Mbps megabits per second supply MET multibutton electronic VA volt ampere telephones VAC Volts AC MFM Multi Function Module VMI voice messaging MIS management interface information system V T voice terminal modem modulator WATS wide area demodulator telecommunications MOH Music on Hold service NSAC National Service ZCS zero co
162. SS button for extension no Enter Delete Exit DelayAnnce Repeat steps 2 4 logical ID F10 F8 F5 F2 Repeat steps 2 4 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 161 Programming Procedures OEE lt Step Console PC 4 Continued To assign delay announcement device to calling group and assign delay announcement device to another calling group m f next group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 m f next group extension nter F10 number Is not Exit F5 sequential DelayAnnce F2 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit FS 4 162 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Group Coverage Step 1 Display Group Calling menu and select Group Coverage 2 Identify calling group to program and save entry 3 Identify coverage group 1 30 to assign to calling group as receiver 4 To remove calling group as receiver for coverage group m To remove calling group shown on line 1 as receiver for another coverage group m To remove another calling group as receiver for coverage group Continued Console Extensions More Grp Calling GrpCoverage Dial group calling exten sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter Dial coverage group number nn Enter Delete Repeat step 3 Exit GrpCoverage Repeat steps 2 4 F3 Type group calling exten sion no nnnn F10 T
163. System Acceptance Test Installation Test the Dictation System Access Place a call to verify that the dictation equipment can be accessed If dictation equipment has not been installed this feature cannot be tested 1 At the test telephone pickup the handset 2 Dial the access code and the number associated with the dictation equipment 3 Verify that the ready tone is being transmitted 4 Test the transmission in both directions Make a recording and play it back 5 Hang up Test the Paging Interface Note If testing ZoneMate 9 paging equipment used with PagePac 20 get an acknowledge tone Then dial the zone code and make an announcement Follow these steps to test the paging interface 1 Pick up the handset at the test telephone and dial the access code or extension number for a particular zone You may hear a confirmation tone 2 Make an announcement into the handset You should hear the announcement from the loudspeaker s 3 Hang up 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all paging zones provided Trademark of Dracon a division of Harris Corporation Registered trademark of Dracon a division of Harris Corporation System Acceptance Test 3 131 Installation pE Test Music on Hold Follow these steps to verify that music is provided to outside callers placed on hold Inside callers do not receive Music on Hold MOH 1 Pickup the handset at the test telephone Dial the CO lin
164. TTR Large Basic carrier and housing Power supply module Processor large Feature module large Upgrade from MIl to Large Digital Cover 6140 CUL 6140 UDLA Processor large 008 MLX Feature module large MLX 20L telephone choose one Black White Expansion cover zero one or two Upgrade from MII to Large 6140 UULA Cover Processor large Feature module large Expansion cover zero one or two Upgrade from Small to Large 6140 USLA Processor large Feature module large C 2 Product Ordering Information Comcode 106388614 105743801 105711972 105711998 105628010 105627996 105627988 106388614 105743801 106215159 106064660 106388234 106215155 105628010 106064660 105685465 105685473 106388259 106388234 106215155 106064660 106388259 106215155 106064660 App Code 403E 391A1 917A23 517A24 517421 517A19 517A18 403E 391A1 517A27 917A25 16A 917A27 517A21 917A25 7713D01A 003 7713D01A 264 17A 16A 917A27 917A25 17A 917A27 917A25 Product Ordering Information nna Component PEC Comcode AppCode Expansion Unit 61490 Expansion carrier and housing 106388630 403F Power supply module 105743801 391A1 Expansion Cover n a 106388259 17A Line Station Modules 008 ATL 61485 105351092 517B3 008 MLX 61486 105628010 517A21 008 OPT 61489 106387525 517A28 012 T R 61487 106397631 517E13 100D DS1 61491 105461560 517B15 400EM tie trunk 8
165. U in a relay rack or on a shelf as a stand alone unit Plug the CSU into a 117 VAC outlet Note Before the CSU can be installed the local telephone company must be contacted for information such as services available equipment options and 48 VDC power on the line Also a completed Request for 1 544 Mbps End Section Characteristics form must be submitted to the telephone company To install the ESF T1 CSU set the switch options mount the CSU as needed and connect the wires from the 100D module and the DS1 network Follow the procedures below to install an ESF T1 CSU Set the DIP Switches on the Rear Panel The seven 8 position dual in line package DIP switches on the rear panel are set for operating features and for diagnostic tests m SW1 sets the CSU address which must be confirmed with the local telephone company see Table 3 1 m SW2 sets the bit error rate BER alarm threshold see Table 3 2 Channel Service Unit 3 19 Installation a SW3 is not used m SW4 sets the Errored Seconds threshold positions 7 and 8 can be changed to match diagnostic equipment see Table 3 3 m SW5 sets signal processing parameters according to the services required by the customer and provided by the telephone company see Table 3 4 m SWG6 sets signal processing parameters according to the services required by the customer and provided by the telephone company see Table 3 5 m SW7 sets the distance from the
166. Yaaa Gaaa Errors Mode Alarms Maintenance Busy Exit Slot xx Make a selection Status Demand Test Busy Out Reset Error Events Clock Restore CSU 1pbk Exit 5 14 Maintenance This is the slot menu for the processor module Select Status from the Slot menu This is the screen for the processor module If you entered a slot number other than 00 and the module in that slot is not the 100D module this screen appears Select Status This screen appears with information for the module in the numbered slot If you entered the slot number of the 100D module this screen appears Select Status Maintenance and Troubleshooting Status Slot xx The 100D module status LED Raaa Yaaa Gaaa information appears Errors Mode Alarms Maintenance Busy Exit Busy Out and Reset You must busy out or reset any module before you run a demand test for it and before you replace it Busy Out is the preferred choice because it does not drop calls in progress In the following screens Busy Out is used but choosing Reset works the same way Slot xx Choose Busy Out from this Make a selection Slot screen Status Demand Test Busy O0ut Reset Restore Exit Busy Out Slot xx This screen appears Busy Out in Progress Busy Out Slot xx This screen appears when busy out is successfully Busy Out Complete completed Maintenance 5 15 Maintenance and
167. a It also performs the operations for commanding schemes such as Mu Law and A Law Each module has a DSE to interface codecs or digital transceivers to the TDM bus The actual digital switching occurs when the DSE is programmed by the system I O bus to transmit data on or receive data from the TDM bus in specific time slots For example the digital station can send data on time slot 200 and receive data on time slot 220 Signal Processing 1 49 System Description CC a lt lt _ _ This process also involves time slot interchanging so that an available slot in the TDM cycle can be filled with a transmit or receive slot The DSE allows up to 16 time slots to be conference and sent out to a single station port Tie Trunk Signaling Tie trunks transmit via three different signaling formats each made up of a specific mode and a specific type The DIP switches on the 400EM module select the signaling modes needed for tie trunk transmission see Figure 72 the signaling type is selected during system programming Signaling Modes There are two signaling modes Simplex mode Two signaling leads superimposed onto the analog transmission leads provide a 2 pair wire interface for connecting two local systems at minimal cost m E amp M mode This is a standard interface The E amp M signaling leads are isolated from the transmission leads requiring a 3 pair wire interface In the simplex mode protective resist
168. a Module or a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer can also be connected to the CU This chapter tells you how to install the system Follow the recommended sequence whenever possible Note You must record each station jack connection and each station change on the System Technician s Run Sheet see Installation 3 1 Installation The Control Unit Use these instructions to install a basic system control unit Instructions for installing other equipment such as an SMDR printer or an ISDN 7500B Data Module are also given in this chapter All connections to the CU must be made with the control unit housing removed A CAUTION The system contains components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD To prevent ESD m Properly ground yourself when working on the control unit m Have the customer maintain relative humidity between 20 percent and 80 percent Install the Basic Carrier Place the backboard and the basic carrier by using the instructions n Chapter 2 under Space and Location a Nout the basic carrier onto the plywood as far left as possible to leave space for system expansion up to a total of three carriers Follow these steps to install the basic carrier see 1 Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard by using the basic carrier as a guide Make sure the carrier is level before marking the holes 2 Lay the carrier to the side 3 Drill a pilot hole in the center of each
169. a flat surface with the right side up as viewed from the front edge The Control Unit 3 7 Installation 2 Wipe the module free of any dust or dirt 3 Peel the backing paper from the smaller copper foil shield to expose the adhesive Note Check the position of the foil shield before sticking it to the side of the module Once in place the foil is difficult to remove 4 Position the foil on the upper part of the module Work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place 5 Peel the backing paper from the larger copper foil shield to expose its adhesive 6 Position the foil on the lower part of the module the shields should meet and not overlap or leave space between Tuck the foil shield tightly along the ledge or crease of the housing Work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place 7 With the copper foil shield in place put the power unit information label on the lower piece of foil 8 Attach the UL or CSA label on the power supply module below the copper foil shield Install the Processor Module There are three steps to installing the processor module m As necessary modify the processor module for Key only operation m Install the feature module in the processor module m Insert the processor module into the carrier 3 8 The Control Unit Installation A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other
170. abilities 1 61 Preparation Certain hardware placement and connection requirements must be met before installation This chapter tells you how to meet these requirements to ensure proper operation To verify that the requirements have been met you must have the following information about the system m location of the control unit CU wiring fields network interface and power for the system m type and number of central office CO facilities provided by the local telephone company hardware requirements for the CU wiring fields telephones data equipment and optional equipment m location of the telephones data equipment and optional equipment m types and placement of CU modules jack assignments for lines trunks and stations m requirements for voice and data features Preparation 2 1 Preparation Planning Forms First review the completed planning forms service order forms and floor plan If you do not have these forms contact the customer s AT amp T representative the Customer Service Center CSC or the authorized AT amp T dealer The planning forms are listed in Tables 2 1 2 2 and 2 3 Not all of them are necessary for each system Table 2 1 Required Planning Forms Form No Description Form 1 System Planning Form 2a System Numbering Station Jacks Form 2b System Numbering Digital ISDN Station Adjuncts Form 2c System Numbering Line Trunk Jacks Form 2d System Numbering Spe
171. able 3 28 See the ISDN 7500B Data Module user s manual for detailed information on using the front panel controls and the meaning for each option Data Adapters 3 71 Installation Table 3 28 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for Digital to Analog Modem Pool Operation Position No 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16 Li 333000600101 1 0111000310000 b blank L Line Modem Option Settings The following procedure is one method to prepare the AT amp T model 2224G modem for operation in a digital to analog modem pool The procedure is only a recommended method and may be different if you are using another type of modem 1 Connect a data terminal such as a PC to the modem and plug both the modem and data terminal into an AC outlet 2 Use the instructions provided with the modem to set all bit switches to their default positions except set the switch 1 bit 2 to the right 3 Save all bit switch settings by unplugging the modem from the wall outlet and then plugging it back in 4 Set the data terminal speed to match the modem s default speed 5 The modem is now operating in the AT amp T command protocol Set the default software options m Type od m Press Enter 6 Set all bit switches according to Table 3 29 3 72 Data Adapters Installation E r 7 Unplug the modem from the wall outlet then plug it back in Set switch 1 bit 2 to the left This stores the switch settings in the modem
172. acement of the hardware 6 Mount the wire troughs and termination blocks on columns 1 and 3 as needed 7 Mount the field terminated blocks on column 2 and terminate the station cable If the station cable is bottom feed start at the top and work down If the station cable is top feed start at the bottom and work up In either case work on one field terminated block at a time a Run the station cable underneath the field terminated block 3 92 System Wiring Installation b Strip 12 inches of jacketing off the cable exposing the conductors c Press the conductors into the index strip on the field terminated block according to the color sequence shown in Figure 43 Make sure each pair keeps its twist up to the index strip Each pair is split by a raised tooth on the index strip d Use the 788J1 impact tool to seat and trim the conductors see Figure 48 Make sure the blade edge is positioned properly blade up for rows 1 and 3 blade down for rows 2 and 4 e Continue seating and trimming conductors from left to right for each row Note The last two right hand slots must remain vacant f Reverse the blade edge on the 788J1 impact tool and use the tool to seat the connecting blocks on each index strip see Make sure the slate strip on each connecting block is facing down As shown on the template mount the wire troughs on column 2 after all the field terminated blocks have been wired Mount the D ri
173. added to the system CAT adds this information automatically the first time a new line or code is used m LCD display instead of a printed menu Automatic number identification ANI for AT amp T Megacom 800 service Note The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local serving caller s jurisdiction availability or CO equipment Considerations m Only one CAT can be connected to the system A serial printer such as the AT amp T 572 should be used so that the CAT can be connected directly to the SMDR port on the system s control unit A parallel printer cannot be attached directly m The CAT is unable to process ANI information from the Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN a The CAT can store call information on 5600 calls made from up to 125 telephones that share up to 49 lines When 5040 of these calls have been processed reports are printed and memory is cleared Any calls that come in during this process are held until reports are printed again Applications 6 15 Adapters Accessories and Applications Hardware Requirements m Call Accounting Terminal m Serial printer model 572 is recommended connected via a serial cable to the SMDR port of the CAT m D8W modular cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the CAT Installation The CAT can be installed by using the instructions supplied with the product Highlights of these instru
174. aey Upper Copper Foul Shield Lower Copper Foil Shield Power Unit Information Label UL Label or CSA Label SETTELLI TLLLLLL me tonnau RARROR RE eeewent MARE D a Q 4 z a rd iy FRONT ESF T1 CSU IN OUT MON MON IN OUT es eee ed LOCAL LOOPEE ALARN POWER LOW DENS NEAR END LOOPEE FRAME LOSS P DIAGNOSTIC RC ERROR INTERFACE rF A PULSES CRITICAL POWER FAR END LOOPED DC POWER AC POWER DC FUSE TERMINAL BLOCK AC FUSE CONNECTION DATA PORT REAR FAULT LOCATION FILTER 551 T1 Channel Service Unit OFFICE REPEATER SIGNAL MONITOR UNIT 00 o OOOO OF a D8W Cord TO NETWORK YOWS Hod HAWS Z200A EMI Filter Control Unit 2012D e D Transformer H AC Outlet 248B ADAPTER TRANSFORMER WITH 248B ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER Pipe erie A System Programming Maintenance Port 102 or 103 Connecting Block 33 DCE DTE Flip Board 7500 ON ON IN POWER TEST POL Female 25 Pin EIA MLX Jack 440A4 Terminating Resistor Adapter WP90110 L1 Power Supply gp 117 VAC S ISDN 2 i2fiiss 7500 13579 1113 15 POWER TEST ENHANCEMENT BOARD asp Rai eer Single Line Adapter RJ11 Line Tip Ring Phone Number 1 if 26 555 3827 2 2 27 555 3828 a 28 555 3829 oje ze cae eee 25 25 50 555 3851 66 Type Block RJ21 type 25 Lin
175. ain plugged into the CU the display on the telephone may disappear Press the Home button to bring back the display Telephones and Consoles 3 111 Installation Assemble the MLX Telephone or Console Before installing an MLX telephone or console consider the following m A 630B Phonemount not included is required to mount an MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone to the wall m To connect an adjunct you must first have a Multi Function Module MFM Adjuncts include answering machines alerts and fax machines If you are installing an MFM do it now by using the procedure in instal the Multi Function Modul earlier in this chapter After the MFM is installed go to step 1 Procedure 1 Remove or adjust the desk stand see MLX telephones are packed fully assembled with the desk stand in the low position The angle of any MLX desk telephone can be adjusted to the high position If you are wall mounting an MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone you must first remove the desk stand To remove the desk stand or adjust its angle place the telephone face down on a flat surface and follow these steps a Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab s Pull the stand toward you and away from the telephone Note If you have removed the stand to wall mount an MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone set the stand aside and go to step 2 b To adjust the stand to the high position insert the tab s at the bottom of the stand into the slot
176. air 3 pair modularity modularity use blank labels If a system has customized labels for the auxiliary system use them System Wiring 3 97 Installation Table 3 34 Continued What It Identifies Special Features Orange Connections from Supplied by the transmission electronics equipment manufacturers equipment such as multiplexer or concentrators Labeling 4 Pair Wire and Outlets It doesn t matter whether you pull the 4 pair wire from the station to the CU or from the CU to the station In either case mark one end of the 4 pair wire with the location or destination of the other end Note In the following procedure it is assumed you are pulling from the station to the CU 1 If you have not already received labeling instructions from the designer of your system assign a number to each jack on the floor 2 Put the boxes of wire near the offices and jacks to which they have been assigned 3 Mark the end of each 4 pair wire with the number of the jack to which the wire has been assigned 4 Mark the box with the letter of the closet to which the 4 pair is pulled and with the circuit number of the wire This is the same as the number you wrote on the wire sheath Wire 1 becomes circuit 1 wire 2 becomes circuit 2 5 At the boxes next to the offices pull out enough wire to reach the wall jacks Allow plenty of slack Cut the wire and mark the end of the 4 pair wire with the closet letter and the cir
177. aker The telephone s red and green LEDs should be on 2 To test the line buttons press any line button with two LEDs The diagnostic tone should stop and the LEDs for that button should go off 3 Press the same line button repeatedly to toggle between the green and red LEDs 3 116 System Acceptance Test HSH 4 To test a fixed feature button with one LED press the button The Feature and HFAI LEDs should go off The first press of the Speaker button should turn off the Mute LED The second press of the Speaker button should turn off the Speaker LED Note If the Mute button has been pressed before the Speaker button the Mute LED cannot be turned off it will wink 5 Press the fixed feature buttons repeatedly to toggle the LEDs on and off 6 To test the red Message light press either a fixed feature button without an LED such as Transfer or Drop or any dialpad button The Message LED should go off 7 Press the fixed feature or dialpad button repeatedly to toggle the Message LED on and off 8 Hang up the handset to leave test mode Test the MLX Telephones with a Display While the telephone is in the test mode follow these steps to test the display buttons 1 Press the labeled display buttons Home Menu Inspct and More The display should spell out these button labels 2 Press the unlabeled display buttons The display should spell out Display Button and the number of the button pr
178. al out through the GPA Credit Card Verification Terminal Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack or an MFM port on an MLX telephone Use with a GPA is not recommended because the credit card verification terminal cannot auto dial through the GPA When connected through an MFM port the transaction terminal makes and receives calls independently of the associated MLX telephone B 14 Adjuncts Adjuncts a Group Calling Delay Announcement Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack an MFM port on an MLX telephone or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone An industry standard announcement device such as a DA 5 Digital Voice Announcer announces to a caller that calling groups are busy or provides Night Service information Dial Dictation Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack an MFM port on an MLX telephone or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone Dial dictation can also be connected by using a commercially available trunk adapter or UPAM with a loop start LS CO line jack and an external power supply unit Dial dictation equipment requiring contact closure cannot be connected via the UPAM Fax Machine Connected to the system through a single line telephone jack or an MFM port on an MLX telephone Use with a GPA is not recommended because the fax machine cannot auto dial through the GPA The fax machine originates and receives fax calls independently of the asso
179. aling E amp M type 1S type i woes i E 400 GS LSorGSand PFT Capacity 4 lines trunks LS TTR TTR telephone 4 TTRs 1 PFT telephone button Signaling LS or GS optioned needed for per port GS PFT telephone 408t LS Analog Capacity 4 lines trunks multiline 8 stations 1 PFT telephone telephone Station signaling pe CMS PFT multiline telephone 40 kbps telephone Signaling LS line trunk analog voice Loop range 1000 feet in building and in range out of building with analog IROB protectors service only T Although these MERLIN II modules are supported in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System the 400 GS LS and 408 GS LS are the recommended modules 1 12 Control Unit System Description Table 1 1 Continued Line oo Ae Trunk Type Station Type Specifications 408 LS or GS Analog Capacity 4 lines trunks GS LS multiline 8 stations 1 PFT telephone telephone Station signal analog CMS PFT multiline telephone 40 kbps telephone Line trunk signaling LS or GS line trunk optioned per port voice Loop range 1000 feet in building and in range out of building with analog IROB protectors service only 800 LS PFT Capacity 8 lines trunks 2 PFT telephone telephones Signaling LS 800 DID N A Capacity 8 lines trunks 2 TTRs Protocol incoming calls only 2 way 1 pair fixed impedance to DID trunks no outgoing calls Signaling loop reverse battery wink start or immediate start accepts touch ton
180. alls independently of associated telephone when used with an MFM used with a GPA the analog telephone dials and receives calls Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Device originates and receives calls independently of associated telephone Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 UPAM required Adjuncts B 5 Adjuncts Table B 1 Continued Equipment Type Specifications AT amp T Products PEC Fax m Must have touch AT amp T 3410D 3509 PFX tone dialing AT amp T 3500D 3514 DFX capability when AT amp T 3510D 3510 DFX Connected via MFM AT amp T 3520D 3515 ADX rotary dialing can be AT amp T 3530D 3512 SAF used on T R port AT amp T Fax 4515D 3517 DFX Industry standard AT amp T Fax 4525D 3515 DFX analog interface AT amp T Fax 9015 3504 AT amp T Fax 9020 3505 902 AT amp T Fax 9022 3508 902 AT amp T Fax 9025FX 3502 HFX AT amp T Fax 9035FX 3503 SFX Group Calling m Industry standard DA 5 Digital Voice 62523 delay announcement Announcer announcement device m Must provide auto Model 1330 matic disconnect Answering m Each calling group Machine can have its own announcement maximum 32 m A device can provide delay annoucement for more than one group Hands free unit m For use with analog 3152 008 multiline telephones m Connects directly to telephone B 6 Adjuncts Adjuncts Interface 008 OPT Station Station Station Jack Jack Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Device originates and receives fax messages in
181. analog to digital or digital to analog Data Adapters 3 69 Installation CG Ne a Hardware Requirements A modem pool requires an ISDN 7500B Data Module PEC2164 BDM and a 2224G modem or its equivalent Since the 7500B in a modem pool operates without an MLX telephone a 100 ohm 440A4 terminating resistor adapter PEC 2709 A59 must be installed on the line near the 7500B The ISDN 7500B Data Module can be configured as a stand alone by ordering a WP 90110 L1 power unit PEC 21625 The 7500B can also be configured in a multiple mount arrangement by ordering a Z77A data mounting PEC 21626 which provides a common power supply for up to eight data modules Both the power unit and the data mounting require a 115 VAC power outlet Neither is provided with the data module and both must be ordered separately The modem used in a modem pool must have the following features m full duplex operation m 10 bit code support start 8 data bits stop m RS 232 asynchronous interface m any or all of the following data rates 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 bps m supports DTMF dialing via the RS 232 interface m ability to turn on or maintain the Clear to Send indicator when it is ready to receive ASCII dialing sequences from the data module in response to a Data Terminal Ready signal from the data module m ability to keep the Data Set Ready lead on and not turn it off during transition from the interactive dialing mode to the data
182. ance is always included in the circuit The E amp M mode can be either protected or unprotected from high voltage transients or fluctuations In the protected mode a resistance is added to the leads to reduce current peaks The protected mode is used when there is no network interface to protect the circuit from outside interference 1 50 Signal Processing System Description The unprotected mode must be used for an E amp M type 1 standard interface see below to meet the specified voltage drop criteria This mode is used when there is a network interface A CAUTION The protected mode must be used whenever the E amp M leads extend out of building and are not connected to the network interface Signaling Types Three different signaling types combine with the signaling modes Together these create the proper signaling format for each system m Type 1 standard This is the factory set type which is used to connect two systems through two intermediate COs The switches must be set for E amp M mode m Type 1 compatible This type is used to connect directly without intermediate COs One system is set to type 1 standard the other to type 1 compatible The switches must be set for E amp M mode m Type 5 simplex This type is used to connect similar systems or systems with compatible signaling that are located in the same building or on the same business campus The choice of a tie trunk signaling format depends on the
183. and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Troubleshooting 5 49 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 6C05 DS1 LOSS OF MULTIFRAME 6C06 DS1 REMOTE MULTIFRAME 6C07 DS1 MAJOR ALARM 6C08 DS1 MINOR ALARM 6C09 6COA DS1 SLIP ALARM 5 50 Troubleshooting Service on link is lost Far end is experiencing loss of multiframe Service on link is lost Average bit error rate is greater than 10E 3 Service on link is lost Average bit error rate is greater than 10E 6 Misframe count reached 17 Slip count reached Occurs only with common channel signaling Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Occurs only with common channel signaling Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider
184. and either assign or remove more restrictions or exit m To save choice and assign or remove restrictions to another extension Continued Optional Telephone Features 4 121 Programming Procedures N Step Console PC 4 Continued If next extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 If next extension Enter F10 number is not Restriction f4 sequential Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 m To save choice and Enter F10 exit when all entries Exit F5 are complete Copy Call Restrictions Step Console PC ured RestrctCopy F6 2 To copy calling Single F1 restrictions to an individual telephone To copy calling Block F2 restrictions to a sequentially numbered block of telephones 4 122 Optional Telephone Features Programming Procedures A Step Console PC 3 Identify telephone to copy Dial extension Type extension calling restrictions from slot and slot and and save entry port or port or logical ID or logical ID If copying from more than press DSS one extension enter button for lowest extension number extension no Enter F10 4 If Single was selected Dial extension Type extension identify telephone to copy slot and x slot and assignments to port or port or logical ID or logical ID or press DSS button for lf Block was selected extension no identify the first telephone in block of telephones to copy assignments to 5 If Single was selected m
185. and save the options into protected memory to prevent loss of settings in case of a power failure m Type AT and press Enter to enter the local mode m Type AT amp D2 and press Enter Option set drop call when DTR low m Type AT amp C1 and press Enter Option set data carrier detect follow call m Type ATSO 1 and press Enter Option set Auto Answer m Type ATQ1 and press Enter Option set disable result codes m Type AT amp W and press Enter to write options to protected memory 3 76 Data Adapters Installation System Wiring System wiring involves two installations m connecting the network interface to the control unit CU m connecting the CU to the stations On the network interface side the method of connection depends on the type of network interface that is installed On the station side the method of connection depends on the number of stations 24 stations and under uses direct connection while over 24 stations requires building a cross connect field The recommended options for building the wiring field on the station side are Interconnect Wire a complete wiring kit that uses 110 jack panel blocks a template wiring troughs D rings and D8W cords or SYSTIMAX a complete wiring kit containing 110 termination blocks with modular jacks a 110A field termination block a template wiring troughs D rings and patch cords A CAUTION To avoid coupling power supply
186. announcement Forced Delay option which connects calls to the recorded delay announcement regardless of whether all agents are busy when the calls come in designation of priority lines to ensure that calls coming in on these lines are answered first display of current agent activity on system status screens to allow monitoring tracking and analyzing of short and long term performance ability to connect Music on Hold to callers waiting for agents up to four external alerts to show when an exception has occurred for example an LED lights when the oldest call has waited longer than 30 seconds Exception thresholds are programmed summary reports from 1 to 93 days real time dynamic reconfiguration which lets the user modify the call flow on line 6 18 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications aN tT GT EE lt Considerations a The CMS cannot be connected to a system that is in Behind Switch mode a The CMS can handle calls for up to 28 agents on up to 28 lines and it can answer calls on two lines at the same time with the same announcement w There can be up to six agent splits with 28 agents per split Up to two CMSs can be installed on a system to handle a second set of lines if a business requires more than 28 lines or employs more than 28 agents m CMS operates on an approved AT amp T PC with MS DOS version 3 3 The PC must be dedicated to CMS a The CMS supervisor s console is the
187. ansfers the call to that person s telephone CMS is appropriate for businesses with large groups of personnel who perform a common function such as airline ticketing filling catalog orders and providing customer service Agents within these groups can be divided into agent splits to handle different types of calls or customers For example the agents in a travel agency can be divided into three splits one that handles personal vacations one that handles business trips and one that handles group charters Another split can be designated for support when the call traffic is heavy in the other splits Calls come into each of the splits on a group of lines designated to ring into the split Agents make themselves available and unavailable to take calls by logging in and out Also agents can enter the after call work ACW state which allows them to complete work on their last call without being interrupted by new CMS calls Applications 6 17 Adapters Accessories and Applications The system can be setup so that agents are automatically in the ACW state whenever they complete a CMS call or so that agents must press a programmed button or dial a feature code to enter ACW Other features of CMS include easy to use management reports that analyze call volume and patterns as well as agent activity Answer Delay option which determines how long a call rings before it is designated as unanswered and is connected to the recorded
188. ansion carrier to the side Drill a pilot hole in the center of each of the four marked mounting hole locations Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard Place the control unit housing clips around the right hand molding for the screws on the back of the last carrier The Control Unit 3 3 Installation 8 Position the expansion carrier on the screws and slide it to the left reconnecting the card extender on the expansion carrier to the connector on the already mounted carrier Make sure the connection is secure 9 Check to see that the carrier is level and that the housing clips extend as far as possible from the right side of the carrier Tighten the screws Install the Power Supply Modules A WARNING Do not attach any cables or power cords to the power supply module until it is installed in the carrier Do not apply power to the CU until all the modules and power equipment are installed Once they are installed follow the procedures unde Tam the Power On in this chapter Failure to comply can result in shock hazard or damage to the equipment If a ring generator is needed install it in the power supply module before the power supply module is installed in the carrier see Install a Ring Generator in the Power Suppl dule in this chapter A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Use a properly grounded wris
189. anyway b Dial the programming code The feature is programmed 4 End programming by sliding the T P switch to the center position The telephone stops ringing General Telephone Programming E 3 General Telephone Programming CS To Program MLX Telephones 1 Label the button Note Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button a Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling upon the tab that extends from the top of the cover b Write the feature name on the card next to the button to be programmed c Replace the cover 2 Begin programming a Press Feature b Dial 00 The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in program mode 3 Select the feature a Press the button you labeled b Dial the programming code Note If the feature does not get programmed onto a button press any line button This does not affect the button in any way The feature is programmed 4 End programming a Press Feature b Dial 00 The telephone stops ringing E 4 General Telephone Programming General Telephone Programming ON O O l To Program MLX Display Telephones by Using the Display 1 Label the button to be programmed Note Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button a Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling upon the tab that extends from the top of the cover b Write the feature name on the card n
190. ar on screen m To remove line trunk Press line Press function from group button for each key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED off erase letter G Note An alternate method for steps 7 and 8 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number or logical ID and select Enter F10 or Next F9 to assign the line trunk to the group or select Delete F8 to delete the line trunk from the group 9 When all entries are Exit F5 complete Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 PRI Facilities 4 75 Programming Procedures Network Service Step 1 Display B Channel Groups screen and select Network Service 2 Identify B Channel group 1 69 and save entry 3 Specify service m For Megacom WATS m For Megacom 800 m For ACCUNH switched 56 64 digital service SDS For Software Defined Network SDN m To specify another service 4 Save choice 4 76 PRI Facilities Console LinesTrunks PRI B Chann1Grp NetworkServ Dial group number nn Enter MegacomWATS Megacom800 ACCUNET SDS SoftDefNetw Other Enter PC F4 F6 F2 F3 Type group number nn F10 F1 F2 F3 F4 F6 F10 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 If you selected Megacom Exit F5 WATS Megacom 800 exit F5 ACCUNET SDS or SDN in step 3 exit Exit F5 If you selected Other in Dial binary Type binary step 3 enter 5 digit binary code nnnnn code nnnnn co
191. arge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Use a properly grounded wrist strap Note Do not leave empty slots between modules in the carrier The system will ignore modules installed beyond any empty slot Follow these steps to install line trunk and station modules see 1 Review the system planning form to verify slot placement on the carrier for each module According to the system planning form install line trunk and station modules in slots 01 through 05 on the basic carrier slots 06 through 11 on the first expansion carrier and slots 12 through 17 on the second expansion carrier The Control Unit 3 13 Installation Note Whenever possible place all 012 and 008 OPT basic telephone modules in the same carrier so that the same ring generator can support them A CAUTION Remove the protective cover from each module s gold finger connector before installing the module into the carrier 2 Lower the module onto the rod on the carrier in the appropriate slot 3 Be sure that the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier 4 Swing the module into the slot and firmly push the module into the carrier until it locks into place Note If you have difficulty installing a module check the module for alignment problems Inspect the carrier for damage If no damage is present the modules should snap into place If the carrier is damaged you must replace it
192. assed by the ESF T1 CSU but not by other CSUs The CSU is a hardware component needed when two endpoints are located in different buildings or when the distance between the two endpoints makes office or line repeaters necessary The CSU is located on the customer s premises and is used to connect the system to DS1 network facilities see Install the Channel Service Unit in Chapter 3 Installation Line Compensation Line compensation adjusts for the amount of cable loss in decibels dBs based on the length of cable between the 100D module and the CSU or other far end connection point The factory setting is a value of 1 which allows a maximum loss of 0 6 dB The other possible settings are shown in 1 58 DS1 Capabilities System Description Table 1 11 Line Compensation Settings Clock Synchronization Clock synchronization is an arrangement where digital facilities operate from a common clock Whenever digital signals are transmitted over a communications link the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the digital signals The system synchronizes itself to the network by extracting the timing signal from the incoming digital stream If the system has more than one 100D module the module that provides the primary synchronization for the other 100D modules and for the TDM bus must be identified during system programming The factory setting is the first 100D module in the carrier This
193. at that allows transmission to another digital station or over the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI telephone network The ISDN 7500B Data Module provides an RS 232 interface for asynchronous data terminal equipment operating at speeds up to 19 2 kops The data module also provides a CCITT V 35 interface for synchronous data terminal equipment operating at speeds up to 64 kbps Optional enhancement boards must be ordered separately The 7500B can be setup to handle a variety of data communications equipment DCE and is the only digital adapter that can be used with the system The 7500B front panel has the following see Figure 33 POWER TEST LED Lights when power is supplied to the 7500B flashes when 7500B tests are performed 3 56 Data Adapters Installation m e o o m DATA LED Flashes to indicate an incoming data call and lights when a call is in progress flashes when 7500B tests are performed m Display Displays status information and option settings m NEXT BACK and ENTER buttons Used to operate the 75008 and to adjust the screen s contrast The 7500B back panel has the following see Figure 34 m PHONE jack Connects a digital ISDN MLX telephone to the 7500B m LINE jack Connects the 7500B to an MLX system module m POWER connector Connects the 7500B to the DC power supply which connects to an AC outlet m PORT 1 Connects the 7500B to a data terminal co
194. ata terminal being called auto adjust or the ability to adjust to the speed and parity of the data terminal being used call setup dialing from the keyboard of an ASCII data terminal by using the local command CMD mode or AT mode automatic or manual answering of incoming data calls Synchronous Features with Multipurpose Enhancement Board m RS 232 interface m half or full duplex operation using the RS 232 interface at data rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19 200 using data transport Mode 2 m half or full duplex operation at 56 kbps via the V 35 interface adapter cable Data Adapters 3 59 Installation E O R NYNWSNNCNSNCS a full duplex operation at 64 kbps via the V 35 interface adapter cable m automatic answering of incoming data calls g ability to place outgoing data calls manually and select user programmable telephone numbers from the data module display on the front panel m RS 366 interface to an Automatic Calling Unit ACU Synchronous Features with High Speed Synchronous Enhancement Board m V 35 interface The adapter cable is provided when the board is ordered by using PEC 21624 full duplex operation at 48 56 and 64 kbps half duplex operation at 56 kbps only automatic answering of incoming data calls ability to place data calls manually and select user programmable telephone numbers from the data module display on the front panel Installation Various configurations ar
195. ation shown on display Use template provided with the System Progmming Guide or PC keyboard Erase currently assigned telephone number Assign telephone number to dial code entered in step 2 and save entry m If you want the telephone number displayed when dialed m lf you do not want the telephone number displayed when dialed To add or change another System Speed Dial number When all entries are complete Console Enter label Enter Backspace Dial telephone number nnnn nnnnannnnnnnn Enter Yes Enter No Enter System Repeat from step 2 Exit PC Type label Pe F2 Type telephone number nnnn nnnnnnnnnnnn F6 F1 F10 F2 F10 F1 Repeat from step 2 F5 Labeling 4 227 Programming Procedures Backup Restore and Print System Programming Reports Back Up System Programmimg Step Console 1 Prepare to back up system programming onto diskette 2 Display Backup Screen 3 To store backup file on hard disk m Backup file does not exist To use default file name default ams To specify a name of your choice m f backup file exists Continued 4 228 Backup Restore and Print PC Insert diskette in drive A F2 Press down arrow to highlight New File Enter Enter Type file name Enter Press down arrow to highlight file name Enter Programming Procedures mm ee Step Console PC 3 Continued To store backup file on
196. ave a dial tone check for a bad adapter or loose connections 7 If adapters and wiring are in working order but you still don t hear a dial tone notify the customer 8 If outward dialing is not possible on any of the lines notify the customer Note It is the customer s responsibility to report service outages to the local telephone company Labeling CO Lines Trunks You can have up to 80 CO line jacks on the communications system 01 to 80 Follow the procedure in this chapter to label each D2R or D8W cord network interface jack and CU module jack Procedure 1 Review the system planning forms to determine each CO line assignment on the CU 2 Place a green cord label packaged with the basic carrier at each end of every D2R or D8W cord The green label indicates the number of the CO line jack to which the cord is connected 3 86 System Wiring Installation 3 Label the jacks on the termination blocks 4 Leave a copy of the CO line assignment planning form in a secure spot near the CU Connect the CU to the Stations The following recommended methods of wiring the system from the CU to the stations are divided according to the number of stations 24 stations and under and over 24 stations A CAUTION To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU Note
197. ay Operator Operator F3 Positions screen and ae Positions F1 select Queued Call Queued Call F2 2 Assign or delete QCC operator positions using system programming console with a DSS attached If system programming console does not have a DSS attached or if programming with SPM go to step 3 Continued 4 22 System Operator Positions Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Continued m To assign QCC Press each operator position position s DSS button to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To delete QCC Press each operator positions position s DSS button to make red LED flash Go to step 6 3 Using system programming console that does not have a DSS attached or when programming with SPM m To identify QCC Dial extension Type extension operator position to slot and slot and assign or delete port or port or logical ID logical ID m To view currently Inspct PgDn assigned operator then then positions Exit FS Positions F1 Queued Call F2 Return to step 2 Return to step 2 System Operator positions 4 23 Programming Procedures Dn s Step Console PC 4 Assignor delete QCC operator position m To assign displayed Enter F10 extension number as QCC operator position m To delete displayed Delete F8 extension number as QCC operator position 5 Assign or delete more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 operator positions and 4 and 4 6 When all entries are StoreAll F3 complete Th
198. busses are described below m Input Output Bus The I O bus contains a 16 bit address bus and an 8 bit data bus The address bus selects the module that receives instructions from the 68000 microprocessor in the processor module The microprocessor provides instructions to the port processors and DSEs through the 8 bit data bus Time Division Multiplex Bus The TDM bus connects the DSEs to allow voice or data to flow in and out of the system The TDM bus is parallel 8 bits wide and runs at 2 048 MHz 256 time slots x 8 kHz 2 048 MHz Each TDM cycle has 256 time slots for voice data tones and clocks The frame repetition rate is 8 kHz providing a 64 kbps channel on each time slot 8 bit bus x 8 kHz 64 kbps Functional Units 1 45 Seten Description The built in data modem connects to the TDM bus this permits access from a local or remote PC or workstation equipped with a 1200 bps modem The TDM bus connects with the built in diagnostics that enable the processor to read and write to dedicated TDM test slots Voice signals on the TDM bus are encoded in Mu Law 255 pulse code modulation PCM format for domestic use The system provides a circuit switched connection for transmission of digital data signals up to 64 kbps See Signal on the next page 1 46 Functional Units system Descri ption Signal Processing Because the system is internally a digital system that must interact with both analog and digital devices
199. calls are not Dial 0 Type 0 reprioritized m To specify length of Dial number of Type number of time 5 30 seconds seconds nn seconds nn before calls are reprioritized 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 136 Optional Operator Features Programming Procedures Calls In Queue Alert Step 1 Display Queued Call screen and select In Queue Alert 2 Identify operator position to receive In Queue Alert and save entry 3 Specify In Queue Alert for operator m lo specify that operator receives in queue alert m To specify that operator does not receive in queue alert Console Operator Queued Call InQue Alert Dial extension x slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for Enter InQue Alert Enable InQue Alert Disable PC F3 F2 F6 Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 F1 F2 Optional Operator Features 4 137 Programming Procedures Step Console 4 Save entry and either program another operator position or exit m To save entry and assign In Queue Alert to another operator position a lf next extension number is sequential alf next extension number is not sequential To save entry and exit Next Repeat step 3 Enter InQue Alert Repeat steps 2 4 Enter when all entries are i complete Baone Exit w To view operator Inspet positions receiving In then Queue alert and exit Exit Exit 4 138 Optiona
200. ce Maintenance and Troubleshooting Line Trunk xxxx Make a selection Status Busy Out Restore Exit Line Trunk XxXxX Busy Out in Progress Busy Out Line Trunk XXXX Busy Out Successfully Completed Exit Busy Out Line Trunk XXXX Busy Out FAILED Select Busy Out This screen appears indicating that the busy out is in progress If the busy out has finished successfully this screen appears If the busy out fails this screen appears Line Trunk or Station Restore You must restore a line trunk or station after you have used busy out Maintenance 5 25 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Line Trunk xxxx Select Restore Make a selection Status Busy Out Restore Exit Restore Line Trunk xxxx This screen appeals indicating that the restorers Restore in Progress in progress Exit Restore Line Mrunk ace If the restore is completed successfully this screen Restore Successfully appears Completed Exit Restore Tane trunk sae If the restore fails this screen appears Restore FAILED RS 232 or Modem Port Reset Select the desired RS 232 port or the modem from the Port menu Note Port 1 is the system programming maintenance port and Port 2 is the SMDR port 5 26 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting If you want to reset the RS232 Portl RS232 Port2 oe RS 232 ports or the Modem Port modem select Reset Make a sele
201. ce and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution LOOP No loop current Test the line trunk with a CONTROL single line telephone If BIT NOT the problem is not in the SET line trunk swap the positions of similar line trunk and station modules If the problem follows the module replace the line tnmk and station module NO LOOP No loop current Test the line trunk with a single line telephone If the problem is not in the line trunk swap the positions of similar line trunk and station modules If the problem follows the module replace the line trunk and station module 7404 STUCK Continuous ringing Test the line trunk with a RINGING from CO single line telephone If m AC power cross the problem is not in the line trunk swap the positions of similar line trunk and station modules If the problem follows the module replace the line trunk and station module m During background If problem persists port board check check or replace system detected module port board that was not in normal operation mode 5 52 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 7806 7807 7808 7809 780A SANITY INT NOT GENERATED NO PORT BOARDS AVAILABLE INVALID SANITY RESPONSE INVALID SLOT ID FROM TA NOT IN STANDBY MODE SELF TEST NOT COMPLETED TEST RESULT RE
202. cessive interrupts generated by slot Check module and replace if necessay or check or replace processor module Check power supply voltages and replace power supply module if necessary otherwise no action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Restore translations if backup disk is available If no backup is available reprogram system by using instructions in Chapter 4 Programming Procedures Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary otherwise no action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Usually no action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Troubleshooting 5 47 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 000D FMWR NOT Module firmware is If problem persists IN STANDBY not in standby mode check or replace MODE at cold start module 000E COMMAND m Module failure No action is needed If BUFFER m Faulty processor problem persists check FULL module or replace module 000F TASK m Faulty processor No action is needed If RUNNING module problem persists check TOO LONG or replace processor module 0010 INVALID m System cannot Check modules and SLOT determine module replace if necessary If INTERRUPT responsible for problem persists check generating interrupt or replace processor module 0011 STACK m Faulty pr
203. change N200 counter setting display N200 Counter screen 10 Erase current setting and enter new setting 1 5 Console Next Repeat step 7 Enter Exit Repeat steps 6 8 Enter Go to step 12 N200Counter Drop Dial number of transmissions n PRI Facilities PC F9 Repeat step 7 F10 F5 Repeat steps 6 8 F10 Go to step 12 F3 Alt P Type number of transmissions n 4 85 Programming Procedures Step 11 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change N200 Counter for another 100D module If next slot number is Console PC Next sequential Repeat step 10 Repeat step 10 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential mee F5 Repeat steps Repeat steps 9 11 9 11 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 12 If no change to setting for Go to step 15 Go to step 15 N201 Counter To change N201 counter setting display N201 Counter screen N201Counter F4 13 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting Dial number of Type number of 16 260 octets nnn octets nnn 4 86 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures Step Console PC 14 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change N201 Counter for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat st
204. channel is limited to voice and analog voice band data applications 1 60 DS1 Capabilities JELU Petition Common Channel Signaling CCS is an out of band signaling format that places the signaling bits for channels 1 through 23 into the 8 bit word of the 24th channel This restricts DS1from using the 24th channel for voice or data transmissions D4 framing does not preclude the use of CCS but CCS is not compatible with D4 channel banks because the D4 channel banks recognize only RBS Coupled with B8ZS coding CCS can support digital data up to 64 kbps per channel Recommended Framing and Signaling Formats ESF framing should be used to take advantage of its improved maintenance diagnostic and testing capabilities the ESF T1 CSU is required to interface with the network If the transmission between two systems is voice only RBS should be used for all 24 communication paths For voice transmission both ZCS and B8ZS line coding can be used to satisfy the ones density requirement the preferred line coding format is B8ZS which is needed for 64 kbps digital data The framing and signaling formats depend on the network and interconnection devices CSUs used For example many CSUs support only ZCS line coding Notes m Digital data up to 64 kbps is possible only in ISDN PRI mode Also ESF framing mode CCS signaling and B8ZS line coding are required m An ESF T1 CSU must be used for interbuilding DS1 connections DS1 Cap
205. channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels prime line An individual extension number assigned to a telephone in a Behind Switch system Each telephone user has his or her own prime line and is automatically connected to that line when he or she lifts the handset Glossary 7 B wttOO COCOC processor module pulse code modulation PCM The module in the second An extension of pulse slot of the basic carrier that amplitude modulation PAM contains the software that in which each PAM pulse is runs the communications quantized and encoded into system a 8 bit code to represent the amplitude of each PAM pulse See also pulse amplitude modulation protocol A set of conventions governing the format and timing of message exchanges between devices such as a multiline analog telephone and the communications system Q control unit i quantizing public network The process of converting a A network that is commonly pulse amplitude modulation accessible for local or long PAM sample into a discrete distance calling Also called PE D a public switched telephone i plitude values network PSTN pulse amplitude modulation PAM A modulation technique in R which an analog signal such as speech modulates a RAM random access memory carrier signal consisting of a Computer memory in which series of precisely timed an individual byte or range of pulse
206. cial Renumbers Form 3b Outside Trunks Pools PBX only Form 4a Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4b Digital ISDN MLX Telephone Form 4c Tip Ring Equipment Form 5a Direct Line Console DLC Analog Form 5b Direct Line Console DLC Digital ISDN Form 5c Queued Call Console QCC PBX only 2 2 Planning Forms Preparation O Table 2 2 Required Planning Forms for 100D 400E M or 800 DID Modules Form No Description Form 3a Outside Trunks Remote Access Form 3c Outside Trunks DS1 Facility 100D Module Form 3d Outside Trunks Tie Form 3e Outside Trunks DID PBX only Table 2 3 Optional Planning Forms Form No Description Form 6a Optional Operator Features Form 6b Call Pickup Groups Form 6c Group Paging Form 6d Group Coverage Form 6e Group Calling Form 6f System Features Form 6g Allowed Lists Form 6h Disallowed Lists Form 7a Night Service Group Assignment Form 7b Night Service Outward Restriction Planning Forms 2 3 Preparation TT EE Table 2 3 Continued Form No Description Form 7c Night Service Time Set Form 8a Label Form Lines Trunks Form 8b Label Form Stations and Calling Groups Form 8c Label Form Posted Message Form 8d System Speed Dial and System Directory Form 9a Automatic Route Selection Worksheet PBX only Form 9b Automatic Route Selection Tables PBX only Form 9c Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Number
207. ciated telephone Calls are dialed with the fax machine s dialpad or from an associated single line telephone Headset Connected to a telephone for answering calls automatically without lifting the handset When a SPIRIT StarMate E Headset is used with a MLX telephone the headset connects to the same jack as the telephone handset Analog telephones operate with a 502C adapter connected to the OTHER jack on the telephone or without an adapter by plugging the headset into the handset jack Adjuncts B 15 Adjuncts Loudspeaker Paging Systems Connected to a programmable LS or GS line trunk port for single zone or multizone paging Used to page co workers and make announcements through loudspeakers Wiring diagrams for different configurations are included in Appendix A Note Since most paging equipment works with an LS port programming the port for LS is recommended External paging systems such as PagePac 20 with ZoneMate 9 or ZoneMate 39 paging systems that use DTMF signaling can be connected to a line jack programmed for paging operation including hi directional paging Zone paging systems such as the PagePac series require one LS jack Any zone can be used once the paging port is activated A UPAM is used to connect the system to paging equipment that is not PagePac or is PagePac without ZoneMate It can be used on any LS port that is programmed for paging Modem Connected to the system through a single line teleph
208. cks The D2R cords are only 6 wire cords but they will plug into the 8 wire jacks 3 82 System Wiring Installation A CAUTION Do not plug an analog multiline telephone an MLX telephone or anything else from the station side of the CU into this wiring field on the CO side Doing so will busy out the line trunk RJ 11 and RJ 14 Interfaces The RJ11 and RJ14 interfaces are connected in nearly identical ways but the RJ11 interface connects one CO line per jack while the RJ14 interface connects two lines per jack Plug a 267C type adapter into each RJ14 jack see Figure 38 Hardware m D2R cords Procedure Follow these steps to connect the RJ11 and RJ14 network interfaces to the CU 1 Test the CO lines for proper connection see Testing CO Lines Trunks in this chapter 2 Label the network interface jacks the CU module jacks and the D2R cords properly see Labeling CO Lines Trunks in this chapter 3 Plug one end of a D2R cord into the jack at the network interface and the other end into the appropriate line trunk jack on the CU 4 Dress the wires properly System Wiring 3 83 Installation RJ 2GX Interface The RJ2GX interface is a 25 pair amphenol connector that interfaces up to eight tie trunks You construct the cross connect field in the same way as for the RJ21X interface see earlier in this chapter Note RJ21X and RJ2GxX interfaces do not require separate termination blocks If
209. components when handling the circuit board Use a properly grounded wrist strap Modify Processor Module for Key Only Operation The system can be configured to operate in Key Hybrid PBX or Behind Switch mode The mode of operation is chosen and registered with the FCC before the system is installed The processor module is configured for the multifunction MF option when shipped The MF option allows the system to operate in any of the three modes Hybrid PBX Key and Behind Switch according to how the software is administered The Key function KF option restricts system operation to Key only mode Software programming of PBX features and pooled trunks is not possible in this mode Follow these steps to modify the processor module for Key operation see 1 Remove the processor module from its package Do not open the module case A CAUTION Do not touch the HDR3 header If the HDR3 header is disturbed the system default memory can be lost 2 Locate the header marked HDR4 on the module s circuit board 3 Locate the shunt attached to one of the pins of the HDR4 header 4 Remove the shunt from the single header pin then reinsert it so that it covers both pins on the header The Control Unit 3 9 Installation u 5 Locate the KF label that is on the jack numbering labels sheet packed with the feature module stick it on the wire manager at the base of the module Install the Feature Module in th
210. connected to a 012 or 008 OPT module pick up the handset Dial 04 and the 2 digit number starting with 01 of the TTR to be tested You should hear a busy tone if the receiver is in use or a reorder tone if you misdialed or addressed a receiver not in your system for example you dialed 07 and your system has only a 012 module and one 400 module for a total of six TTRs Try again if you hear a dial tone after one to three seconds of silence proceed with this test 2 Dial the digits 123456789 0 You should hear a dual tone multifrequency DTMF signal as each button is pressed After all the digits are dialed you should hear a dial tone 3 Repeat the test for each TTR 3 134 System Acceptance Test Programming Procedures System Programming Two types of equipment are used to program and maintain the system m System Programming Console an MLX 20L telephone connected to the station jack assigned for system programming The factory setting is the first jack on the first 008 MLX module in the control unit The jack is also factory set as the operator position If system programming or maintenance activities interfere with call handling the system programming assignment can be changed to any of the first five jacks on the first 008 MLX module m Personal Computer PC with System Programming and Maintenance SPM a PC connected to the system programming and maintenance port the lower RS 232 jack on the pr
211. cost of calls can be calculated accurately Telephone rate information is stored in a CAT component called an EPROM erasable and programmable read only memory When telephone rates change or a new area code or exchange is added the customer simply removes the EPROM and installs a new one The CAT provides a variety of reports that can be printed on a regular schedule or automatically when 90 percent of the terminal s memory contains call information CAT reports include m detailed and summary call information for all the extensions in the system or the same information for a single extension If account codes are used to track outside calls similar reports can be printed for the account codes m management analyses that organize call information by time of day cost and duration of calls area codes and exchanges called and facilities used to make calls These reports provide the information a business needs to make informed decisions and manage telephone costs 6 14 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications Other features of the CAT are m flexible pricing CAT can be setup to calculate the cost of calls by using toll rates or to charge by the minute Service charges and discounts can be applied to calls made to local and long distance numbers and to directory assistance Calls to certain area codes such as 900 can also receive special treatment m automatic updates When new telephone lines or account codes are
212. ction Reset RS232 Porti Reset or Select Yes to start the RS232 Port2 Resets or reset Modem Port Reset Do you want to continue Yes Cancel RS232 Portl Reset This screen appears ae RS232 Port2 Reset indicating that the reset is in Modem Port Reset progress Reset in Progress RS232 Portl Reset If the reset is completed RS232 Port2 Reset successfully this screen Modem Port Reset appears Reset Successfully Completed Exit Maintenance 5 27 Maintenance and Troubleshooting rr RS232 Portl Reset or If the reset fails this screen RS232 Port2 Reset or appears Modem Port Reset Reset FAILED Replacing Equipment When an error has been isolated to one of the following pieces of equipment you can replace the equipment m carrier m power supply module m processor module m line trunk and station modules m telephones and adjuncts Notes You must record any station jack change on the System Technician s Run Sheet see a The ring generator and auxiliary power units can also be faulty and must be replaced See Chapter 3 Installation lfor information on replacing this equipment Replacing the Carrier Typical carrier problems include power supply failure sudden failure of one or more line trunk and station modules or system problems that cannot be isolated to a specific module 5 28 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting Follow these steps to check carrie
213. ctioning line service for outgoing calls m To automatically take Enable malfunctioning lines or trunks out of service for outgoing calls m To leave Disable malfunctioning lines or trunks available for outgoing calls 3 Save choice then Enter m f Disable was selected Exit m lf Enable was selected and m No tie lines trunks Exit Exit Continued 4 14 Set the Operating Conditions PC F1 F6 F1 F2 F10 F5 F5 F5 Programming Procedures TT S Step 3 Continued m Automatic Maintenance Busy is wanted for tie trunks m Automatic Maintenance Busy is not wanted for tie trunks System Date Step 1 Display Date screen 2 Erase assigned date and set current date 3 Save entry and exit Set the Operating Conditions 4 15 Console Enable Enter Exit Disable Enter xit Console System Date Drop Dial date mmddyy Enter Exit PC F1 F10 F5 F2 F10 F5 PC F1 F7 Alt P Type date mmddyy F10 F5 Programming Procedures System Time Step Console PC 1 Display Time screen System F1 Time F8 2 Erase assigned time and Drop Alt P set current time Dial current Type current time hhmm time hhmm 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Board Renumbering Cold Start After Adding or Changing Modules Step Console PC 1 Display Board Renumber System F1 screen Board Renum F9 2 Advise the system whether to continue board renumber process m T
214. ctions areas follows 1 Before attaching the product to the CU and the printer set the 10 CAT switches to establish the speed or baud rate for the CAT and its associated printer 2 Connect the CAT the printer and the power supply The CAT must be placed within the distance noted below control unit 14 feet direct connection 1000 feet using building wiring a serial printer 50 feet m power supply grounded wall outlet 4 feet Note Do not use an outlet that is controlled by a wall switch 3 Test the CAT following the instructions provided in the customer information booklet CIB 6 16 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications eee __________ amp 1 i 0 i 09 Product References Customer information booklets m Call Accounting Terminal Business CIB 3122 m Call Accounting Terminal Hospitality CIB 3123 Call Management System The Call Management System CMS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an MS DOS based software application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering calls and distributing them to individual agent telephones If no agents are available CMS places calls on hold and if programmed plays a recorded announcement to the callers such as Thank you for calling the ABC Company Please hold for the next available agent CMS then searches its network for the appropriate agent usually the one who s been idle the longest and tr
215. cuit number 3 98 System Wiring Installation 6 After you pull the wire into the office or work area and fish it through the wall opening for the wall jack transfer the information to the faceplate of the jack itself If you ve done the job correctly you should now have the correct closet letter and circuit number of the wire on the jack 7 When the 4 pair wire reaches the CU cross connect field punch down the pairs in the sequence they are labeled on the sheath 8 On the blue labels designed for the 110 type field terminated block add any necessary information With preprinted labels you add only the floor number With blank labels you also have to write in the closet letter and the number from the wire sheath If no labeling exists simply assign a different number to each 4 pair wire and write that number on both the box and the wire end Anyone who comes after you will find both ends of the wire labeled with the same unique number and should be able to proceed accordingly Checking Poorly Labeled Wiring If you don t understand the labeling system used or a label is missing or damaged use a tone device and a telephone handset to match like wires Hardware m tone device m telephone handset m telephone cord with an 8 pin modular plug m 4 pair patch cord Tools m diagonal pliers or wire strippers System Wiring 3 99 Installation Procedure 1 10 11 12 Insert the 8 pin plug of the telephone co
216. d Table 3 20 shows the switch settings for the different options Table 3 20 SMU Switch Setti a a E u 2 open 1 open 2 closed ZEROES 3 closed for 16 zero limit ACTIVE FAULT LOCATE 4 closed Channel Service Unit 3 39 Installation Office Repeater Switch Settings Tables 3 21 and 3 22 show the power mode and artificial line option settings for the OR see Table 3 21 OR Power Mode Option Settings G J OUT aa B Letters indicate those screws that are closed Table 3 22 OR Artificial Line Options Mount the CSU Chassis After the options have been set on the SMU and the OR mount the CSU shelf assembly into a rack or other enclosure 3 40 Channel Service Unit Installation Connect Lines to the Terminal Block TB1 The terminal block TB1 on the back of the chassis is the connecting point for T1 service lines and for fault and loopback wires Also if a local power supply is used the TB1 is the termination spot for the power supply wires A WARNING Voltages as high as 260 V can occur between the transmit and receive pairs of the T1 line Follow these steps to connect the lines to TB1 on the back of the CSU chassis see Figure 27 1 Connect the T1 service lines to terminals 1 through 5 2 Connect the fault pair if provided by the local telephone company to terminals 8 and 9 3 Connect the DC loopback pair if provided by the local telephone company to terminals 11
217. d R2 upgrade from two to four MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and Maintenance SPM DOS Adjuncts Adapters System Adjuncts Adapters Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 Channel service units CSUs ESF TI Cable 8 mod wire wrp Cable 8 mod 15 pin sub Stand alone wall mount 551 T1 L1 Power unit Unit Cord Stand alone wall mount Cordless telephones Model 5320 DA 5 Digital Voice Announcer PEC 6107 005 6107 006 6107 007 61495 61416 2152 ESF 21555 1554 1545 1 1 52 151 530 2 2 2 2 21545 3103 CLS 62523 Comcode 406467910 406466193 406467902 406466193 406464750 106492655 406467142 405616293 406012609 406012591 405970104 403768179 404242639 103985660 405970104 105543516 405745811 AppCode 9024 305010171 001 513861312 505 513823015 50 FT 380 100213 001 305 10097 001 KS22911LlI DW4A SE 10FT IP 380 100213 001 CS6300U11A 229 ANNCR DA 5SL DI Product Ordering Information C 7 Product Ordering Information E amp Component PEC Comcode App Code System Adjuncts Adapters continued Electrostatic discharge ESD suppression kits D181574 n a 105179329 D181574 D181589 n a 105201891 D181589 D181590 n a 105201909 D181590 D181591 n a 105201917 D181591 D181593 n a 105201933 D181593 EMI filter Z200A IROB unit analog multiline 32918 406106583 343 CA 0A 6XIN IROB unit MLX 32919 106417447 505A ASSY 0A WD ISDN 750
218. d drain of a module telephone time slot interchanger An element of a time division switching network that separates and switches time division multiplexed TDM signals tip ring T R The contacts and associated conductors of a single line telephone plug or jack or adjunct GL 22 Glossary Glossary I E y voice band channel A transmission channel generally the 300 3400 Hz frequency band voice only A station that is set up for making and receiving voice calls but not data calls voice signal pair A pair of leads on an analog multiline telephone station used for the Voice Announce to Busy feature W WATS wide area telecommunications service A service that allows calls to certain areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage wink start tie trunk A tie trunk on which the originating end transmits an off hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal a wink that it is ready for transmission Z zero code suppression ZCS A binary coding scheme that ensures a data stream contains at least a minimum number of information bits ones for receiver synchronization Glossary GL 23 Index 008 MLX module 008 module 008 OPT module 1 22 3 14 012 module 1 6 1 11 1 20 1 22 H 14J1 19 1 22 400 rnodule 1 12 1 20 1 23 400EM module 1 12 1 15 1 16 408 GS LS module 408 module 475 476 Printer c
219. d port or logical ID F8 Repeat step 4 F5 F9 Repeat steps 2 5 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 155 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 Continued To assign telephone to Enter F10 calling group and assign Repeatstep4 Repeat step 4 more telephones to calling group shown on line 1 To assign telephone to calling group and assign telephones to another calling group m lf next group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 m f next group extension Enter F10 number is not sequential Exit FS Members F9 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 When all entries are Inspct PgDn complete to view telephones assigned to calling group 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 156 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures rk rrr Group Calling Line Trunk or Pool Assignment Step 1 Display Group Calling menu and select Line Pool assignment 2 Identify calling group to program and save entry 3 Identify line trunk or pool to assign to calling group 4 To remove line trunk or pool from calling group m To remove more lines trunks or pools from calling group on line 1 m To remove lines trunks or pools from another calling group Continued Console Extensions More Grp Calling Line Pool Dial calling group exten sion no nnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter Dial line trunk no 801 880 slot and port l
220. d with the printer for further information a For the AT amp T 475 476 printer set the DIP switches on the printer according to Table 3 27 See the users guide supplied with the printer for further information Connect a PC to the Control Unit A PC with MS DOS 3 3 or higher can be used for programming and maintenance of the system The connection of the PC to the CU depends upon whether or not the distance between the two is less than 50 feet A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Use a properly grounded wrist strap Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 3 52 The Printer and the PC Installation BE lOO Connect a PC Within 50 Feet of the CU Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a PC to the CU when the distance from the PC to the CU is less than 50 feet Hardware m 355AF adapter m D8W cord m RS 232 cable Procedure see F igure 31 1 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the system programming maintenance port the lower one on the processor module Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter 2 Connect one end of an RS 232 cable to the 355AF adapter and the other end to the COM1 port on the PC Connect a PC 50 or More Feet from the CU Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a PC to the CU when the distance from the PC to the CU is 50 or more feet Hardware m 355A
221. d Repair Information i m Warranty and Liability xxii E liii About The Book XXV m Related Documentation XXV m How to Order Books xxvi m Additional Ordering Information XXVIII m Product Safety Labels xxviii m Howto Comment on This Book xxviii Contents EES S m Adapters 1 34 m System Capacities 1 35 m Data Capabilities 1 41 m Planning Forms 2 2 Contents 3 Installation 3 1 m The Control Unit 3 2 m Channel Service Unit 3 19 m The SMDR Printer and the System Programming PC 3 45 m Data Adapters 3 56 m System Wiring 3 77 m IROB Protection 3 102 m Telephones and Consoles 3 103 m System Acceptance Test 3 116 a 4 Programming Procedures 4 1 m System Programming 4 1 m Optional Operator Features 4 132 me Eee Contents Programming Procedures Continued m Labeling 4 222 m Backup Restore and Print System Programming Reports 4 228 e 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 1 i 5 1 m Troubleshooting 5 46 SS ooaooa a 6 Adapters Accessories and Applications 6 1 6 1 m Applications 6 8 Co A Wiring A 1 m Wiring Tables A 2 m Wiring Diagrams A 6 Contents B Adjuncts B 1 C Product Ordering Information C 1 D Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 1 E General Telephone Programming E 1 Programming Methods E 2 Pe F General Feature Use F 1 G Programming Special Characters G 1 H System Programming Console Overla H 1
222. d a certain cost m adding a service charge to calls before billing them to clients departments or projects m displays with pull down menus and on line help Considerations m Only one CAS can be connected to the system m CAS operates on an approved AT amp T PC operating with MS DOS version 3 3 or later The PC must be dedicated to CAS m CAS collects detailed information on incoming and outgoing calls to outside numbers only It does not collect information on calls between extensions m CAS does not provide for the processing of automatic number identification AN lI information However the CAS IS Il does See Integrated Solution Il in this chapter mu CAS handles call records up to 64 bytes the number of calls depends on the amount of available disk space In its largest version CAS records data for up to 5 000 extensions and 15 000 account codes 6 12 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications Hardware Requirements A typical CAS system consists of the following equipment m An approved AT amp T MS DOS based PC with the following configuration a 640K RAM a Hard disk drive with at least 3 Mbytes of available space for the application software a parallel printer output m serial SMDR input m 132 or 80 column parallel printer m D8W modular cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the COM1 serial port on the PC m MS DOS system disk version 3 3 or later
223. de Assistance Center suppression OPT off premises telephone OPX off premises extension PBX private branch exchange PC personal computer PEC price element code PFT power failure transfer PRI primary rate interface QCC queued call console RAM random access memory RBS robbed bit signaling ABB 2 Abbreviations Glossary A access line A connection from the customer to the local telephone company that provides access to the public network Also called local loop account code A code used to associate incoming and outgoing calls with corresponding accounts employees projects and clients Accunet AT amp T s switched digital service for 56 kops 64 kops restricted and 64 kbps clear circuit switched data calls address A coded representation of the destination of data or of the data s originating terminal such as the dialed extension number assigned to the data terminal Multiple terminals on one communications line for example must each have a unique address E LULULUlUls i OOCWS adjunct Optional equipment used with the communications system such as an alerting device that connects to a multiline telephone or to a station jack administration port reassignment Reassignment of the system programming position to any of the first five station jacks on the first 006 MLX module in the communications system control unit alternate mark inversion AMI A line coding format in
224. de used to represent Enter F10 service save entry and Exit F5 exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Copy Telephone Number to Number to Send Note You can use this procedure instead of the Telephone Number to Send procedure to specify that the Telephone Number to Send should be copied from the Telephone Number assigned to each channel in the B Channel group Step Console PC 1 Display B Channel ee F4 Groups screen and select F6 Com Number PRI B ChannlGrp F2 Copy Number F4 2 Identify B Channel group Dial Group Type group 1 69 and save entry number nn number nn Enter F10 PRI Facilities 4 77 Programming Procedures mm Step Console PC 3 Specify whether telephone number should be copied to number to send m To specify that Copy PhnNum F1 telephone number is to copied as the tele NumToSend phone number to send when an outgoing call is made on each channel m To specify that tele Do not Copy F2 phone number is not Phone copied as the tele Number phone number to send and or no number to send is sent when outside calls are made on each channel 4 78 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures T Step Console PC 4 Save choice and either program more B Channel groups or exit To save choice and specify copy telephone number to telephone number to send for another B Channel group mif next group number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 m f next group number Enter F10 is not sequent
225. dependently of associated telephone when used with an MFM Cannot be connected to a QCC 1 Device originates and receives calls independently of associated telephone Adjuncts B 7 Adjuncts Table B 1 Continued Equipment Type Headset for analog multiline telephone Headset for MLX telephone Headset adapter Loudspeaker paging Specifications m Need to program Auto Answer All button for use with 502B 502C m Connects directly to telephone OTHER jack m External paging system using DTMF signaling is con nected to LS or GS line jack m CPE paging systems require an interface unit if CPE has 2 wire input the BOGEN UPAM K 58500 can be use Trademark of Plantronics Corporation t Registered trademark of Plantronics Corporation B 8 Adjuncts AT amp T Products Supra 1 Starset f Il 1 StarMate E 2 Starset II StarMate E Supra StarMate E PagePac 20 PagePac 20 with ZoneMata 9 1 PagePac 20 with ZoneMate 39 1 PagePac 6 2 PagePac 6 Plus 3122 011 3122 012 3122 013 3122 014 3122 001 3122 002 3122 003 3122 004 3122 204 3122 214 3122 304 3164 HFA 62524 5323 005 53505 53506 5323 006 5323 006 Adjuncts Interface 008 OPT Station Station Station 1 Requires HFAI adapter 2 No headset adapter required 1 Bi directional paging is supported only one line jack is needed for multizone paging 2 LS adapter 53518 is requi
226. digit extension numbers Trunk block 1 contains the options needed to reach the 3 digit numbers and trunk block 2 contains the options needed to reach the 4 digit numbers see 1 18 Control Unit System Description The options for each DID trunk group are as follows m Type a wink start factory setting a immediate start m Expected Digits m 3 factory setting m 1 4 m Delete Digits m 0 factory setting m 0 4 m Add Digits m O factory setting m 1 to 4 digit number 1 to 9999 Signaling m rotary factory setting a touch tone m Invalid Destination m backup position factory setting m return to fast busy 100D Module The 100D module is the interface that connects a DS1 facility to the system It can be configured for T1 or Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI service see DS1 Capabilities later in this chapter Control Unit 1 19 System Description Touch Tone Receivers The 800 DID 008 OPT and 012 modules each provide two TTRs Normally these TTRs are sufficient to handle calls originated on the 012 or 008 OPT module or received on the 800 DID module However additional TTRs maybe needed to support the following services m tie trunks and DS1 emulated tie trunks set for Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signaling m Remote Access m Account Code Entry m AUDIX Voice Power AVP IS II or Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IVP AA IS II applications lf
227. ding the following station types a digital voice only m digital voice with Voice Announce to Busy feature m digital voice and digital data via the ISDN 7500B Data Module m digital voice and MFM m digital data only ISDN 7500B Data Module Signaling ISDN BRI S T protocol two 64 kops B channels one 16 kbps D channel on a passive bus Power 4 VDC phantom power to telephone 48 VDC over a separate Pal 7 8 to an operator DSS console Loop range 1000 feet in building and in range out of building with MLX ROB protectors service only Control Unit 1 9 System Description Table 1 1 Continued Line 008 OPT On vous Capacity 8 T R stations on or off 2 way voice transmission path premises with support for telephones with single line message waiting LEDs 2 TTRs telephone Notice to telephone company meets FCC Class C Ringing current 105 Vrms 30 Hz sinusoidal ringing super imposed on 48 VDC a ring generator must be installed in the power supply module of each carrier that has a 008 OPT module REN gt 1 0 per port Disconnect signal 900 ms T R short for answering machines G3 fax etc Switchhook flash detection 300 1200 ms Loop resistance serves 2 wire loops to 1300 ohms including stations The system software recognizes the OPT module as a 012 module thus the overall station capacity is reduced by four stations for every OPT module 1 10 Control Unit System De
228. dule replace line trunk and station module If problem stays at that position test line trunk Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 840C STUCK Continuous ringing Swap positions of RINGING from CO similar line trunk and AC power cross station modules If problem follows module replace line trunk and station module If problem stays at that position test line trunk 840D INCORRECT Incorrect system Turn power off for at FIRMWARE module firmware least 1 second and then STATE state back on Repeat system programming procedure If problem persists replace line trunk and station module 840E TRK UPLINK Unrecognized Turn power off for at MESSAGE message from the least 1 second and then ERROR processor module to back on Repeat the line trunk and system programming station module procedure If problem persists replace line trunk and station module Troubleshooting 5 57 Adapters Acessories and Applicaitons This chapter provides descriptions and installation instructions for the adapters that connect adjuncts and accessories to the control unit and the telephones It also describes accessories and applications that add features to the system Adapters A variety of adjuncts see can be connected to analog and digital telephones and to the system by using one of the following adapters General Purpose Adapter GPA ISDN 7500B
229. dures Step Console PC 6 When all entries are Exit F5 complete exit Exit F5 QCC Operator to Receive Calls Step Console PC 1 Display QCC Operator LinesTrunks F4 screen More PgUp QCC Opper F4 2 Identify individual QCC Dial extension Dial extension operators to receive calls slot and slot and on trunks identified in port or port or step 4 logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no 3 Save entry Enter F10 4 Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 tines 21 40 F2 mFor logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Tines 61 80 F4 Lines and Trunks 4 37 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 Assign or remove calls on trunk to QCC operator shown on line 1 to trunk m To assign calls to QCC Press line Press function operator shown on button foreach key for each line 1 of screen trunk to turn trunk to make green LED on letter Q appear on screen To remove calls to Press line Press function QCC operator shown button foreach key for each on line 1 of screen trunk to turn trunk to erase green LED off letter Q Note An alternate method for steps 4 and 5 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 or Next F9 to assign calls to QCC shown on line 1
230. e The Control Unit 3 5 Installation Note Each carrier that has 012 basic telephone or 008 OPT modules must have a ring generator installed in the carrier s power supply module before the power supply module is installed in the carrier Place all 012 and 008 OPT modules in one carrier whenever possible A WARNING Hazardous electrical voltages may be present if the following steps are not performed correctly Follow these steps to install a ring generator 1 2 Turn off the power switch at the power supply module If there is an auxiliary power unit unplug it from the AC outlet and then unplug it from the front of the power supply module Unplug the power supply module s power cord first from the AC outlet or from the auxiliary power unit and then from the front of the power supply module itself Remove the power supply module from the carrier Note At this point there should be no cords connected to the front of the power supply module Place the power supply module on its left side and remove the five screws Carefully turn the module over on its right side and remove the left half of the power supply module Position a 129B Frequency Generator ring generator so that its screw holes are aligned with the screw posts on the power supply module and the transformer is next to the main board Attach the ring generator to the power supply module with four screws 3 6 The Control Unit I
231. e m yes factory setting a dial tone is sent to the remote end no a dial tone is not sent to the remote end Answer Supervision Time sets a time limit in milliseconds ms for the remote station to signal the calling station m 300 ms factory setting m 20 4800 ms increments of 20 ms Disconnect Time sets a time limit in milliseconds for the release of the E or M lead m 300 ms factory setting m 140 2400 ms increments of 10 ms Direct Inward Dialing Trunks Direct inward dialing DID trunks allow incoming calls to reach specific individuals or facilities in the system without the assistance of a system operator DID trunks are available only in the Hybrid PBX mode They are connected to the system on an 800 DID module With DID service the customer reserves blocks of DID numbers from the local telephone company The DID number should correspond to the extension number for an individual or a calling group or to the code for Remote Access or pool dial out A CAUTION DID numbers that correspond to pool dial out codes or facility access codes can be used to avoid toll restriction leading to toll abuse and or fraud see Security of You tem under Customer Support Information in the front of this book Control Unit 1 17 JEC Description Because DID trunks allow calls to come directly to a telephone extension they cannot be pooled The CO passes the necessary digits to the system which delive
232. e Interface LLLLELLELLI B 110A1 WIRE TROUGH er 410 AB1 100FT FIELD TERMINAL BLOCK 110AB1 100JP12 TERMINAL BLOCK AT 8762 D impact Tool 788 K1 Retainer Tool Modular Plug Presser 41 4 Pair Patch Cord i ep algin TA K dj 4 MA Us rab oS Aig DAP f ig PAEA Cae re i RIEG Aeae hoe anadooect i wat hos 1 2 Pink Grey White ps P a PRY P a y z a a lt ae A A N N sA C yS NWA lt a A 5 i ys oy Q Le l Res PTT LLLLLL LELI eel OFF PREMISES ON PREMISES inter Control Uni Building Unit BIS 10 Telephone 10 AWG Approved Ground IROB Protector 55 OFF PREMISES Inter ON PREMISES Building 505A Wiring IROB Control Unit Primary Primary Protector Protector Fuse Holder 505A IROB PROTECTOR 7 Foot 8 Replaceable rand 5 Attached instrument Protected Side i m2 a faa nn SS Connector Pins Multi Function Module T R Operation Setting SAA Setting 2 OOOO DADAN oh Outlet tt 1 Wall Jack Gl MLX 10 Wall Mounted Telephone 2 punan manan aa D8AC DSS 2 DSS 1 MLX Telephone 63 D8W Removing the Extension Label i Removing Labon the Extension Hand
233. e Processor Module Before you install the processor module in the carrier you must install the feature module in the processor module The feature module comes in two models a model for the small processor module and a model for the large processor module Follow these steps to install the feature module see Figure 19 1 Unpack the feature module 2 Stick the round feature module label to the front of the processor module housing 3 Lay the processor module on its left side 4 Align the connectors on the feature module with the connectors in the processor module 5 Firmly press the feature module into the processor module Insert the Processor Module A CAUTION Remove the protective cover from the processor module s gold finger connector before installing the module into the carrier Follow these steps to insert the processor module see 1 Lower the processor module onto the rod on the carrier in slot 00 2 Be sure that the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier 3 Swing the processor module into the slot 3 10 The Control Unit Installation 4 Push firmly until the processor module snaps into place The processor module should be securely attached to the rear of the carrier and held in place by the tab on the bottom toward the back of the processor module A CAUTION To avoid damage do not force the module If the module does not insert easily push in on the rear
234. e dialing 800 LS or GS PFT Capacity 8 lines trunks 2 PFT GS LS telephone telephones button Signaling LS or GS needed for GS PFT telephone Although this MERLIN II module is supported in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System the 800 GS LS is the recommended module Loop Start Lines Trunks LS lines trunks are the standard for home and small business Key systems They are less expensive in some areas but have certain limitations m They do not protect against glare Glare occurs when a person tries to make an outside call on a line trunk at the Control Unit 1 13 System Description Loop Start Lines Trunks LS lines trunks are the standard for home and small business Key systems They are less expensive in some areas but have certain limitations m They do not protect against glare Glare occurs when a person tries to make an outside call on a line trunk at the same time an incoming call is being received on that line trunk m They have higher cable losses than GS lines trunks m They cannot assure secure toll restriction Ground Start Lines Trunks GS lines trunks are outside lines trunks used by some businesses such as hotels or motels because the improved signaling of GS allows more secure toll restriction In addition GS lines trunks prevent glare and provide cable losses less than or equal to 4 5 dB The following types of outside lines trunks come in either GS or LS form m basic lines a WAT
235. e lower left button on the console The letters R and G simulate the red H 2 System Programming Console Overlay System Programming Console Overlay mmm and green lights beside these buttons For example to simulate that a red LED is on the letter R appears on the screen next to the line button The labels on the top right side of the SPM screen Drop Transfer Hold correspond to the buttons on the lower left side of the telephone See Chapter 4 Programming Procedures for instructions on programming from a system programming console or from a PC with SPM 3 TF Home AAMEN MERL End Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 4M Fs si F9 05 25 1030 f 15352040 45 65150 70 55 7516080 04 24 09 29 1434 19 39 44 64149 69 5474159 79 03 23 08 28 Shift 13 33 18 38 43 63148 68 F8 53 73158 78 zzz Ak 12 32 17 37 42 62147 67 F2 52 72157 77 01 21 06 26 11 31 16 36 41 61 46 66 51 71156 76 Figure H 2 SPM Screen System Programming Console Overlay H 3 System Programming Console Overlay EEE Figure H 3 System Programming Console Display H 4 System Programming Console Overlay System Programming Reports This appendix describes the contents and shows examples of system programming reports You can generate these reports by selecting the Print option from the System Programming Menu If you are using a PC with SPM you must direct the reports to the PC port by selecting Print Opts from the SPM Main Menu and then se
236. e n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t lecommunication Le mat riel doit galement etre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es pas un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise a la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniq
237. e numbers are automatically assigned by the system to ISDN 7500B Data Modules or to adjuncts such as a data terminal answering machine or fax connected to an MLX telephone using a Multi Function Module MFM K 2 Two Digit Numbering Plan Two Digit Numbering Plan For the first 58 digital station jacks the actual extension number assigned to the adjunct is the extension number assigned to the MLX telephone preceded by a 7 For example if the extension number assigned for an MLX telephone is 25 the extension number assigned for the adjunct on that telephone is 725 In this example a call can be placed to the telephone by dialing extension 25 or to the adjunct by dialing extension 725 Note The extension numbers are reserved whether or not an adjunct is connected to an MLX telephone If you reassign the extension number of the telephone the system does not automatically change the extension of the MFM or data module If the system has fewer than 50 stations and you want to keep the two digit numbering plan determine whether you want to reassign any of the numbers that are automatically assigned by the system The unshaded areas of the two digit numbering plan in Figure K 1 show the extension numbers you can reassign 6800 6885 This means that you can change selected extension numbers to one of the available numbers in the range 6800 6885 If the available numbers do not meet your needs you should consider the three digit
238. e screw in the lower right hand corner of the module cover Press the center of the right side of the module cover with one hand and lift the cover to remove it 3 Remove an existing MFM see Figure 58 Note If the telephone does not have an existing MFM go to step 4 To reset the jumpers on an existing MFM go to step 5 a Locate the MFM locking tabs on the top and bottom of the telephone Spread these tabs apart to release the MFM Grasp the MFM by the edges and pull it toward you to free the connector pins Do not touch the connector pins Set the MFM aside on a clean surface 4 Install a new MFM see a Hold the MFM circuit board by the edges with the long connector pins facing the underside of the telephone Taking care not to touch the connector pins push down on the MFM board so that the connector pins are inserted into the socket in the telephone Press firmly to lock the tabs in place The connector pins and tabs must be secure Telephones and Consoles 3 105 Installation 5 As needed adjust the jumper settings for T R operation or for a supplemental alert device see a Pull the connectors off b Push the connectors down over the appropriate pins 6 Replace the module cover a lf the module cover has a square jack guard that protects the TEL OTHER jack area grasp and twist the guard to remove it see Note Save the jack guard if you are wall mounting an MLX 10 or MLX 10D telephone
239. e system resets and automatically assigns factory settings for operator positions DLC Operator Positions Including Those Used for Call Management System Step Console PC 1 Display Operator Operator F3 Positions screen and oen F1 select Direct Line Direct Line F1 4 24 System Operator Positions Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Assignor delete DLC operator positions using system programming console with a DSS attached If system programming console does not have a DSS attached or if programming with SPM go to step 3 m To assign DLC Press each operator position position s DSS button to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To delete DLC Press DSS operator positions button to make red LED flash Go to step 6 3 Using system program ming console that does not have a DSS attached or when programming with SPM m To identify DLC Dial extension Type extension operator position to Slot and x Slot and assign or delete port or port or logical ID logical ID Continued System Operator Positions 4 25 Programming Procedures ES i Step Console PC 3 Continued m To view currently Inspct PgDn assigned operator then then positions Exit FS Positions F1 Direct Line F1 Return to step 2 Return to step 2 4 Assignor delete DLC operator position To assign displayed Enter F10 extension number as DLC operator position m To delete displayed Delete F8 extension number as DLC operat
240. e telephone or the craft set into each CO line jack either at the network interface or at the cross connect field and listen for a dial tone 2 If you find a CO line that does not have a dial tone check for a bad adapter or loose connections 3 If adapters and wiring are in working order but you still don t hear a dial tone notify the customer 4 If you hear a dial tone dial a known telephone number to verify dialing Also check that you have good two way transmission after the CO completes the connection 5 If outward dialing is not possible on any of the lines notify the customer Note It is the customer s responsibility to report service outages to the local telephone company Test Ground Start Lines Trunks To perform this test you need a single line telephone with a ground key Note If a single line telephone with a ground key is not available ground one side of a line trunk 1 Plug the single line telephone into each CO line jack either at the network interface or at the cross connect field System Wiring 3 85 Installation oOo 2 Ground the ring lead by pushing the ground key or by grounding one side of the line trunk 3 Pick up the handset You should hear a dial tone 4 Remove the ground from the ring lead 5 Dial a known telephone number to verify dialing Also check that you have good two way transmission after the CO completes the connection 6 If you find a CO line that does not h
241. e this space blank 4 In the New Ext No column enter the extension number of the station This includes new installations 5 Inthe Miscellaneous column enter any information particular to that station 6 In the Person Location or Function column enter the name of the person at the location of or the function of such as fax machine the station System Technician s Run Sheet L 3 n itN Abbreviations ACW After Call Work CMS Amps amperes ANI automatic number identification ARS Automatic Route Selection ASCAP American Society of Composers Artists and Producers AUDIX Audio Information Exchange AVP AUDIX Voice Power B8ZS bipolar 8 zero substitution BIS built in speakerphone BMI Broadcast Music Incorporated BTMI _ basic telephone modem interface CAS Call Accounting System CAT Call Accounting Terminal CCITT Comitee Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique CCS common channel signaling CIB customer information bulletin CMS Call Management System CO central office comcode component code CSC Customer Service Center CU control unit dB decibel DCE data communications equipment DCP Digital Communications Protocol DFT direct facility termination DID direct inward dialing DIP dual in line package DLC direct line console DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service DOS disk operating system DSO Digital Signal 0 DS1 Digital Signal 1 D
242. e trunk access code and the system s listed directory number or if you are using the DID trunk dial any station 2 Atthe called station answer the incoming call 3 At the called station press Hold The line button s green LED should flash 4 Verify that music is heard at the calling telephone 5 Hang up Note If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license and pay license fees from a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require you to obtain such a license from AT amp T or your authorized representative Test the PFT J acks To test a power failure transfer PFT jack for proper operation the outside line numbers to the module s line trunk jacks must be assigned and the lines trunks must be operational Also a PFT telephone on a GS line must have a GS button see attached to the telephone Follow these steps to test the PFT jacks 1 Plug a touch tone or rotary dial telephone into a PFT jack 3 132 System Acceptance Test Installation _ _ _ __ i 2 Note the outside line number assigned to the lowest position line trunk jack on the module and be sure that the outside line trunk is connected to the system 3 Turn off power to the CU first at the power supply m
243. e used on the ISDN 7500B Data Module Depending on the configuration some equipment is required and some is optional Required Equipment m ISDN 7500B Data Module m WP90110 L1 power supply for stand alone m D8W cord mw EIA 232D cable s or V 35 cable 3 60 Data Adapters Installation F Optional Equipment m multipurpose enhancement board m high speed synchronous enhancement board with V 35 adapter cable m 440A4 terminating resistor adapter needed when the 7500B is installed without an MLX telephone Installation Procedures Follow the steps for the proper configuration to install the ISDN 7500B Data Module Stand Alone Single Port Asynchronous DCE Configuration This configuration uses the basic ISDN 7500B Data Module see 1 Remove the 7500B from the box 2 Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE on the back of the 7500B 3 Plug the WP90110 L1 power supply cord into the connector labeled POWER on the 7500B 4 Plug the male end of the EIA 232D cable into the connector labeled PORT 1 5 Connect the other end of the EIA 232D cable to the data terminal 6 Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a telephone wall jack or into a 440A4 terminating resistor adapter when the 7500B is installed without an MLX telephone 7 As necessary plug the terminating resistor adapter into the wall jack 8 Plug the power cords of the WP90110 L1 power supply and the data terminal into an AC power outlet that is not c
244. ear a dial tone If you are using an System Access button dial the dial out code Dial one of the numbers assigned to the telephone you want to answer the call You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and ringing at the answering telephone Have someone pick up the handset at the answering telephone verify that you have good two way communication At both telephones hang up If the station is toll restricted place a toll call You should hear a reorder tone Test the Ground Start and Loop Start Lines Trunks Follow these steps to test the GS and LS outgoing and incoming lines trunks at a telephone 1 Dial 03 followed by the line trunk ID number 01 80 3 120 System Acceptance Test Installation gt A N D You should hear a dial tone for a working line trunk a reorder tone for a DID trunk or an invalid line trunk number or a busy tone if the line trunk is in use Note Dialing 03 on a single line telephone works only if the line trunk accepts touch tone dialing After you dial 03 on a single line telephone you may have to wait for a click before dialing the line trunk number Repeat for all outgoing lines trunks Dial an incoming line trunk on the system Have someone answer the call at another telephone verify that you have good two way communication Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all incoming lines trunks Hang up to exit the test mode Test the DID Trunks Follow these steps
245. ecify toll prefix is Press line Press function required button for each key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED on make letter G appear on screen m To specify toll prefix is Press line Press function not required button for each key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED off erase letter G Note An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to specify a toll prefix is required or select Delete F8 to specify a toll prefix is not required 4 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 4 32 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures TEE Hold Disconnect Interval Step Console PC 1 Display Hold Disconnect LinesTrunks F4 screen More PgUp Hold Dscnct F1 2 Select specific lines trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 mFor logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Lines 61 80 F4 3 Assign Hold Disconnect Interval m For long Hold Press line Press function Disconnect interval button for each key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED on make letter G appear on screen m For short Hold Press line Press function Disconnect interval button foreach key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED off erase letter
246. ed selected in step 4 6 Identify channel 1 24 to Dial channel Type channel program number nn number nn 4 44 DS1 Facilities Programming Procedures lt oO Step Console PC 7 To remove channel type Delete F8 m To remove more Repeat steps 6 Repeat steps 6 channel types from slot and 7 and 7 number on line 1 m To remove channel Exit F5 types from another Repeat Repeat DS1 module steps 3 7 steps 3 7 To assign channel type Enter F10 and assign more channel Repeat steps 6 Repeat steps 6 types to slot number and 7 and 7 shown on line 1 To assign channel type and assign channel types to another DS1 module m f next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat steps 6 Repeat steps 6 and 7 and 7 m f next slot numberis Enter F10 not sequential Exit F5 Repeat Repeat steps 3 7 steps 3 7 To assign channel type Enter F10 and return to DS1 Slot mat F5 menu when all entries are complete DS1 Facilities 4 45 Programming Procedures Step 8 Exit Framing Mode Step 1 Display Loop Start Ground Start DS1 Screen 2 Identify slot number 1 17 in control unit that contains 100D save entry and display format selection screen 3 Specify frame format m For D4 compatible framing format For Extended Super Frame format Console Exit Exit Console LinesTrunks LS GS DS1 Dial slot number nn Enter FrameFormat D4 Compatible Extended Super Frame PC F5 F5 PC F4 F 1 Type
247. ed approved MERLIN LEGEND Communications System accessories If equipment connected to the analog station modules 008 408 408 GS LS or to the MLX telephone module 008 MLX is to be used for in range out of building IROB applications IROB protectors are required Do not install this product near water for example in a wet basement location Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will fit only into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature if you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation To protect this equipment from overheating do not block these openings m Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings or expansion slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of
248. ed from either an MLX 20L telephone used as a system programming console or from a PC with System Programming amp Maintenance SPM software Using a system programming console may involve the dialpad some of the labeled function buttons on the lower part of the console and the 20 line and feature buttons in the center of the console The programming functions of the line and feature buttons are on the overlay for the console as shown in Figure H 1 System Programming Console Overlay H 1 System Programming Console Overlay 33 8 8 a 88 2 8 Jz 8e 8 8 uo ax ag Bo Ra Ba BIRN aS BN 2X AX On Cy B g r amp v 2r y R gs 8 ax s 2 RR Nw amp Bas R 8 g 83 gx Figure H 1 Console Overlay On aPC with SPM the screen is arranged to represent the console as a comparison of Figures H2jand Ewe The window at the top of the SPM screen matches the console s display The columns to the left and right of the window show keys that work in the same way as the buttons on either side of the console s display The bottom of the SPM screen simulates the 20 buttons in the center of the console and are identified on the screen as LINE 01 LINE 02 and so forth The outside columns to the left and right of the line buttons show the keys that work in the same way as the line buttons For example pressing the Shift and F1 keys simultaneously is the same as pressing th
249. ee O with Time Set 4 219 Index O Off premises telephone OPT Office Repeater insertion into the CSU chassis 42 switch options One Touch Transfer 4 173 Operating conditions setting system automatic maintenance bus board renumbering mode restarting the system cold start system date system programming position assignment system time 4 16 Operator console Optional group assigned features call Pickup groups Coverage Delay interval Delayed Ring interval 4 153 Group Calling Calls In Queue Alarm threshold 4 168 Delay Announcement 4 161 external alert for Calls In Queue Alarm 4 169 line trunk or pool assignment 4 157 Optional group assigned features Group Calling cont d member assignments 154 message waiting receiver overflow and threshold group type hunt type Optional operator features Automatic Hold or Release Automatic or manual call completion call type priority level Calls In Queue Alert 4 137 sd DLC Automatic Hold option Hold return Hold timer 4 132 0 Message center operation Position Busy backup 4 144 QCC operator to receive call types 4 140 queue over threshold return ring Optional planning forms Optional telephone features Call Restrictions 4 121 copy Call Restrictions 4 122 Forced Account Code Entr microphone operation 4 126 pool dial out code 4 119 I
250. eek number week number n n Day of week number 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 9 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Notes Changing the System Time while in Night Service mode will deactivate the Night Service You must manually reactivate the Night Service After you restore you must manually update the Current Day of the Week field in the Night Service menu Night Service 4 221 Programming Procedures E Labeling Extension Directory Step Console PC 1 Display Labeling screen More Pgup and select Directory and F1 Extension Labeling Directory F1 Extension F2 2 Identify extension to label Dial extension Type extension and save entry slot and slot and port logical port or ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Erase current label Drop Alt P 4 Enter label for extension Enter label Type label identified in step 2 and save Enter F6 Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display Use template provided with the System Programming Guide or PC keyboard 4 222 Labeling Programming Procedures T i Step 5 To label another extension When all entries are complete Lines or Trunks Step 1 Display Labeling screen and select Lines or Trunks 2 Identify line or trunk to label and save entry 3 Erase current label Con
251. egration with SDN Also ISDN PRI service does not support international dialing for SDN m MultiQuest service for domestic toll incoming voice calls 900 number T1 supports MultiQuest service with or without DNIS while ISDN PRI supports it only without DNIS 1 54 DS1 Capabilities System Description Any combination of these ASN services can be used in T1 or ISDN PRI In addition to these ASN services T1 also supports Shared Access for Switched Services SASS SASS allows both Megacom WATS and Megacom 800 services to be offered over the same line trunk facilities eliminating the need to have separate incoming and outgoing line trunk groups Like T1 ISDN PRI also supports Megacom WATS and Megacom 800 services on a shared line trunk but only on a call by call basis Besides this ISDN PRI provides Accunet Switched Digital Service for 56 kbps 64 kbps restricted and 64 kbps clear circuit switched data calls However Accunet Switched Digital Service is not supported for international dialing T1 T1 is the factory setting and is selected for the DS1 facility to allow each of the 24 channels to be programmed to emulate tie LS or GS lines trunks in any combination This means that a single 100D module can take the place of 24 regular outside lines If common channel signaling is selected 23 channels are available for emulation and the 24th channel carries formatting signals ISDN PRI ISDN PRI is a standard format f
252. elephones User s Guide 555 610 121 Operator Guides Analog Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 610 131 Digita ISDN Direct Line Consoles Operator s Guide 555 610 132 Digital ISDN Queued Call Console Operator s Guide 555 610 133 Miscellaneous Calling Group Supervisor s Guide 555 610 130 About This Book xxvii About This Book Additional Ordering Information For information on ordering replacement parts accessories and other equipment that is compatible with the system see Appendix A in System Reference Product Safety Labels Throughout this book hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle along with the word caution or warning A WARNING Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided A CAUTION Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Book We welcome your feedback on this book Please use the feedback form that follows If the form is missing send your comments to A Sherwood AT amp T 99 Jefferson Road Rm 2A25 Parsippany NJ 07054 xxviii About This Book System Description The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features Voice features combine traditional te
253. elp you set up use and maintain the communications system m reference m setup and modification m telephone user support m operator guides m miscellaneous About This Book xxv About This Book How to Order Books The books needed for operating the communications system were supplied with the system You can order additional copies of these and other books listed below from the AT amp T Customer Information Center m Within the continental United States call 1 800 432 6600 m In Canada call 1 800 255 1242 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Book Title Order Number System Reference System Reference 555 610 110 System Setup and Modification Key System Planning Forms only 999 610 116 Key System Planning and Key System Planning Forms 555 610 112 PBX System Planning Forms only 999 610 117 PBX System Planning and PBX System Planning Forms 555 610 113 Data Planning Forms only 555 610 118 Data Guide and Data Planning Forms 555 610 114 System Programming 555 610 111 xxvi About This Book About This Book MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Book Title Order Number Telephone User Support Analog Multiline Telephones User s Guide 555 610 120 MLX 10D MLX 28D and MLX 20L Digital Display Telephones User s Guide 555 610 122 MLX 10 Digital Non Display Telephone User s Guide 555 610 123 MLX 10 and MLX 10D User Cards 555 610 124 MLX 28D and MLX 20L User Cards 555 610 125 Single Line T
254. els Exit F5 from another group B Channels FfF Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 To assign B Channel to Enter F10 group and assign more Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 B Channels to group shown on line 1 To assign B Channel to group and assign B Channels to another group m f next group number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 m f next group number Enter FIO is not sequential ee F5 B Channels F1 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 PRI Facilities 4 73 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 When all entries are complete m TO ee B Channels Inspct PgDn assigned to a grou i and exit SSN Exit F5 m To exit without viewing Exit F5 all B Channels assigned to a group 6 Select lines then identify Lines F2 B Channel group 1 69 Dial group Type group to program and save entry number nn number nn Enter F If programming more than one group enter lowest group number 7 Select specific lines trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Lines 61 80 F4 4 74 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures Step Console PC 8 Assign or remove line trunk from group m To assign line trunk to Press line Press function group button for each key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LEDon make letter G appe
255. en LED next to the tie trunk button should flash Note To test a dial repeating tie trunk have the person at the far end tie trunk site dial a system extension number No dialing is required to test an automatic incoming tie trunk 2 Pick up your handset and verify that you have good two way communication 3 At your telephone and the distant telephone hang up 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all incoming tie trunks 3 122 System Acceptance Test Installation Test Outgoing and Two Way Automatic Start Tie Trunks Before testing outgoing or two way automatic start tie trunks have someone ready to receive your call at the receiving telephone Follow these steps 1 At any telephone that has access to an automatic start tie trunk press the first tie trunk button The red LED next to the tie trunk button just pressed goes on Note In Hybrid PBX systems with Pooled tie trunks Press the System Access button and dial the pool dial out code Pick up the handset The green LED goes on next to the red LED at the tie trunk button and you hear ringing When the person answers verify that you have good two way communication and hang up Repeat this procedure for each automatic start tie trunk administered Test the Outgoing and Two Way Dial Repeating Tie Trunks Test dial repeating tie trunks wink start immediate start and delay start when you are sure that someone can receive your call at the far end Follow
256. en dial the code the feature is activated Note Some features such as Personal Speed Dial can be used only by dialing feature codes The Display For MLX telephones with displays select features from the Feature screen and the Menu screen See Display in Chapter 2 of the System Reference for more information on using features with the display F 2 General Feature Use Programming Special Characters When users program a Personal Directory listing Auto Dial number or Personal Speed Dial code they are storing a sequence of numbers to be dialed automatically Some sequences require special characters to separate the digits and start a function For example certain characters can signal the system to pause and wait for a response to the dialed digits or to stop so the user can enter a credit card number or password Special characters count toward the maximum number of digits allowed in a stored dialing sequence Programming Special Characters G 1 Programming Special Characters A Display It Press Shows Means Description Hold p Pause When a pause is needed to allow the system to respond after an initial set of numbers have been dialed press Hold to insert a 1 5 second delay before the remaining digits in the sequence are dialed For example press Hold between programming a long distance telephone number and a calling card number You can insert as many pauses as needed in the sequence G 2 Programmin
257. ep 13 Repeat step 13 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential Exit F5 Repeat Repeat steps 12 14 steps 12 14 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 15 If no change to setting for Go to step 18 Go to step 18 K Counter To change K Counter K Counter F6 setting display K Counter screen 16 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting 1 15 Dial number of Type number of frames nn frames nn PRI Facilities 4 87 Programming Procedures M i Step Console PC 17 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change K Counter for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 16 Repeat step 16 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential Exit F5 Repeat Repeat steps 15 17 steps 1 5 17 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 18 If no change to setting for Go to step 21 Go to step 21 T303 Timer m To change 1303 Timer T303 Timer F7 setting display T303 Timer screen 19 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting Dial number of Type number of 4 12 see seconds nn seconds nn 4 88 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures Step Console PC 20 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change T303 Timer for anothe
258. epeated ring burst to the telephone All the LEDs turn on Follow these steps to test an MLX telephone 1 Press a line feature button with two LEDs to toggle these LEDs red and green Maintenance 5 33 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 2 Press a fixed feature button with one LED to toggle the LED on and off Note Mute and Speaker LEDs may not toggle consistently since they are managed by both the CU and the telephone 3 Press a fixed feature button without an LED or press a dialpad button to toggle the Message LED on and off 4 Press the fixed feature buttons and the dialpad in the following sequence to turn on all the LEDs a Volume down b Volume up c Transfer d Conf e Drop f Hold g 123456789 0 MLX Telephones with Displays Test Activating the test blacks out the display Follow these steps to test an MLX telephone with a display 1 Press any display button A unique character string should appear 2 Press each display button in turn to cause a unique character string to appear MLX Telephones with a DSS Test Activating the test turns on all the LEDs Follow the steps in Basic MLX Telephone Test above to get the LED response 5 34 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting MLX Telephones with Multi Function Modules MF Ms in the T R Mode Test To run this test you must connect a single line telephone to the MFM Follow these steps to test a telephone with an MFM 1 At the
259. ephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 console or if programming with SPM m Identify telephone to program Dial extension Slot and port or logical ID button for each PC F6 F7 Go to step 3 Type extension slot and port or logical ID Optional Telephone Features 4 125 Programming Procedures hr Step Console Pc 4 To assign Forced Account Enter F10 Code Entry to telephone To remove Forced Delete F8 Account Code Entry from telephone 5 TO program more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 telephones and 4 and 4 To view telephones with Inspct PgDn Forced Account Code Entry 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Microphone Operation Step Console PC 1 Display Extensions screen Extensions F6 and select Microphone Disable More PgUp Mic Disable F7 4 126 Optional Telephone Features Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 3 Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To disable telephone Press DSS microphone button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To enable telephone Press DSS microphone button to turn red LED off Go to step 6 3 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify telephone to Dial extension Type Extension program slot and slot and port or port or logical ID logical ID 4 To disable telepho
260. ephone with 20 programmable line or feature buttons and a 7 line by 24 character menu driven display MLX 28D telephone A telephone with 28 programmable line or feature buttons and a 2 line by 24 character menu driven display modem A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone lines The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the line modem pool A pair or group of pairs of modems and data modules with interconnected RS 232 interfaces that converts digital signals to analog or analog signals to digital thereby allowing users with Integrated Digital Services Network ISDN digital data stations to communicate with users who have analog stations GL 16 Glossary An adapter that provides a tip ring interface for the connection of optional equipment such as answering machines external alerts and fax machines to an MLX telephone The optional equipment and the MLX telephone operate simultaneously and independently The MFM is installed inside the MLX telephone multiplexing A process in which a transmission channel is divided into two or more channels either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the channel into successive time slots Glossary E C lt C lt 2C SCt i i i R R SSSSSC Music on Hold MOH network
261. er 1 6 to program and followed by followed by save entry pool route pool route number ttr number ttr If programming more that Enter F10 one pool route enter lowest pool route number 4 Specify number of digits Dial number of Type number of to absorb 0 11 digits nn digits nn m To save entry and enter number of digits to absorb for another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1 f next pool route Next F9 number is Repeat this Repeat this sequential step step a f next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 m To save your entry Enter F10 when all entries are complete Automatic Route Selection 4 209 Programming Procedures eT ____ lt a Step Console PC 5 Exit Exit FS Exit F5 Other Digits Step Console PC 1 Display Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu ARS F6 2 Select Subpattern to program other digits for m To program other Sub A Digit F7 digits for Subpattern A m To program other More PgUp digits for Subpattern B gub B DigiE F3 3 Identify the table number Dial table Type table 1 18 and route number number number 1 6 to program and followed by followed by save entry pool route pool route number ttr number ttr If programming more than Enter F10 one pool route enter lowest pool route number 4 210 Automatic Route Selection Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 Specify number of other Drop Alt P digits up to 20 and save Dia
262. er paging group m f next group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 m f next group extension phear F10 number is not Exit F5 sequential Group Page F2 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 When all entries are Inspct PgDn complete to view telephones assigned to paging group 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 4 150 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Group Call Coverage Step Console 1 Display Group Coverage Extensions screen More Group Cover 2 Identify call coverage Dial group group to program 1 30 number nn and save entry Enter 3 Ifa DSS is not attached Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM Ifa DSS is attached m To assign telephones Press DSS as sender in call button for each coverage group telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove telephone Press DSS from call coverage button for each group telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 4 If a DSS is not attached Dial extension to system programming x slot and console or if programming port or with SPM identify logical ID telephone to program PC F6 PgUp F3 Type group number nn F10 Go to step 4 Type extension slot and port or logical ID Optional Group Assigned Features 4 151 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 To remove telephone from Delete F8 call coverage group m To remove more telephones fr
263. ervice T1 or ISDN PRI m framing format m line coding m line compensation DS1 Capabilities 1 53 System Description m clock synchronization m signaling mode for T1 service only The appropriate setting for each option is determined by the transmission facility to which the module is connected Each option is discussed below Type of Service The system supports two types of service for DS1 facilities T1 and ISDN PRI The 100D module can be programmed to operate in either type of service T1 service transmits and receives voice and analog data ISDN PRI transmits and receives voice and analog and digital data The following AT amp T Switched Network ASN services are provided through a T1 or ISDN PRI line trunk m Megacom WATS service for domestic long distance outward voice calls ISDN PRI does not support international dialing for Megacom WATS service m Megacom 800 service for domestic toll free incoming voice calls T1 service supports Megacom 800 with or without Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS while ISDN PRI supports it only without DNIS Also ISDN PRI does not support international dialing for Megacom 800 service m Software Defined Network SDN for voice and circuit switched data calls up to 56 kbps SDN lets businesses use portions of the ASN in concert with their dedicated private line networks However the system does not support uniform dialing plan which is necessary for complete int
264. es line trunk assignment rotary operation telephone testing Transfer Index G General Purpose Adapter GPA Glare Ground start GS button Ground start GS lines trunks labeling line trunk or pool assignment member assignments overflow and threshold test 3 127 Group coverage Group paging 4 148 Group type H Hands Free Unit HFU B 6 s_ Headset Headset adapter HighSpeed Synchronous Interface Enhancement Board Hold Disconnect interval 4 33 Hold return ee Hold timer 4 132 Host system dial codes for Behind Switch mode 4 184 4 159 o Hybrid PBX mode 2 416 S O Hunt type 4 159 Immediate start INFO 2 Informational screens Input output bus Insert labels Inside dial tone 4 181 __ sd Integrated Solution II IS II Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IVP AA IS Il 6 21 Intercom button assignment 4 101 Intercom dial tone test 3 118 3 119 Interconnect wiring Invalid destination 4 70 IROB protection 41 9 sd ISDN 7500B Data Module 1 9 back panel 3 57 features asynchronous features synchronous features with high speed synchronous enhancement board Index IN 7 Index y y y y O ISDN 7500B Data Module cont d synchronous features with multipurpose enhancement board front panel installation stand alone asynchronous DCE configuration stand alone high speed s
265. ess likely to be easily broken m Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly m Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any authorization codes secure m When possible restrict the off network capability of off opremises callers via use of Call Restrictions and Disallowed List capabilities m When possible block out of hours calling m Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns m Limit Remote Call Forward to persons on a need to have basis Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Limited Warranty AT amp T warrants to you the customer that your MERLIN LEGEND Communications System will be in good working order on the date AT amp T or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Hee If you notify AT amp T or its authorized reseller within one qe of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order AT amp will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good wor ng order Repair or replacement pee may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange asis If AT amp T determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced AT amp T will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another
266. essed 1 4 System Acceptance Test 3 117 Installation Test the MLX Telephones with an MFM Test a MLX telephone with an MFM installed and configured for a T R adapter Follow these steps to check the proper channel operation and the MFM circuitry for the TTR the ring generator and the message LED 1 Connect a known working 2500 type single line telephone with a message light to the MFM adapter The 2500 telephone must also have a mechanical ringer Pick up the handset on the 2500 telephone and dial 09 after receiving the dial tone You should receive another dial tone 3 Press any button to deactivate the test tone Dial the following sequence of numbers 123456789 0 and press the switchhook quickly You should receive a confirmation tone Hang up The CU should send a ring burst and the message LED on the 2500 telephone should go on Turn off the message LED by dialing the appropriate code number Test the Telephones for Intercom Dial Tone Follow these steps to test for intercom dial tone 1 Press the Intercom or System Access button depending on the mode of operation The red LED next to this button should go on 2 Press the Speaker button 3 118 System Acceptance Test Installation Er The green LED next to the red LED on the intercom or System Access button should go on you should hear an intercom dial tone and the green LED next to the Speaker button should go on 3 Press the
267. et a system dial tone 3 For a Hybrid PBX system dial 03 Note Dialing 03 on a single line telephone works only if the line trunk accepts touch tone dialing After you dial 03 ona single line telephone you may have to wait for a click before dialing the line trunk number 5 42 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting 4 Dial the 2 digit line trunk number of the line trunk to be tested 01 80 5 Listen for a dial tone if a dial tone is not present use a test set to isolate the fault to the line trunk and station module where the line trunk terminates or to the location in the line trunk access equipment 6 Ifa dialtone is present dial a working outside number Verify that the call is complete If the line trunk is busy you hear a busy tone You hear a reorder tone if a wrong line trunk type such as DID or an invalid line trunk number was dialed 7 If the module continues to malfunction replace it Incoming Line Trunk Problems Symptom Incoming lines trunks do not work properly Procedure 1 Place an incoming call through the troubled line trunk 2 For an LS or GS line trunk connect a single line telephone to the line trunk at the network interface If the line trunk is a GS line trunk you need to have a GS button attached to the telephone Press the GS button for a GS line trunk Listen for ringing Pick up the handset and check line seizure Dial an outside number and verify that you have good
268. etting Dial number of Type number of 30 120 sec seconds nnn seconds nnn 4 94 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures Step Console 38 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change T316 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is Next sequential Repeat step 37 If next slot number is Enter not sequential Exit Repeat steps 36 38 m To save entry and Enter return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 39 Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit PC F9 Repeat step 37 F10 F5 Repeat Ha 36 38 F1 F5 F5 F5 F5 PRI Facilities 4 95 Programming Procedures Terminal Equipment Identifier Step Console PC 1 Display PRI screen Protocol screen and LinesTrunks F4 select Terminal Equip ERA F6 ment Identifier TEI Protocol F6 TEI F2 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 that contains 100D number nn number nn module and save entry Enter F10 3 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting 0 63 Dial ID number Type ID nn number nn 4 Save entry and either program another 100D module or exit m To save entry and change terminal equipment identifier for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 If next slot number iS Enter F10 not sequential TEI F2 m To save entry and exit Repeat steps 2 4 Repeat steps 2 4 Enter F10 when all en
269. ext to the button to be programmed c Replace the cover 2 Begin programming a Press Menu b Select Ext Program Prog from the display c Select Start from the display The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in program mode 3 Program the button a Press the button you labeled Note If the feature does not get programmed onto a button press any line button This does not affect the button in anyway The display identifies the feature currently programmed on the button If no feature is programmed the display shows that the button is blank b Delete the feature currently programmed on the button by selecting Delete Dlete from the display The display shows that the button is now blank General Telephone Programming E 5 General Telephone Programming e c Press the button you labeled again to continue programming Note If the currently programmed feature was not deleted from the button the new feature programmed onto it will replace it d Select List Feature List from the display The screen lists feature names 4 Find the feature you want by doing one of the following a f the feature name is on the display press the button next to or below the name of the feature to be programmed a f the feature name is not on the display do one of the following To move through the list of features page by page press More To jump to the screen that displays the
270. f UNIX System Laboratories Inc ZoneMate is a trademark of DRACON a Division of Harris Corporation Support Telephone Number AT amp T provides a toll free customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 24 hours a day U S A only Call the Helpline or your authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system ERRATA MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation Programming and Maintenance 555 610 140 Ignore all references to the small processor module The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System offers only one processor module This processor module is referred to as a large processor module in this document Ignore references to the small processor module on the following pages Page 1 6 Processor Module Page 1 35 System Capacities first fourth and sixth Pages 1 36 Pages 1 38 Ordering Codes Table The following Price Element Codes PECs am not valid Small Analog 6141 CUA Small Digital 6141 CUD Appendix C Page C 2 Ordering Codes Table The following Price Element Codes PECs are not valid Small Analog 6141 24D Upgrade from Small to Large 6140 USLA October 1 1991 Contents Support Telephone Number XV m FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information XV DOC Interference Information XV XV X m Installation and Operational Procedures xvii m DOC Notification and Repair Information xviii Customer Support Information XV FCC Notification an
271. f hardware Keep a 1 16 inch space between each piece of hardware System Wiring 3 81 Installation 2 Mount the wire troughs and the termination blocks There is a wire trough above and below each termination block 3 If necessary repeat steps 1 and 2 for a second column 4 Run the 25 pair amphenol cable on the RJ21X interface to the termination blocks If more length is needed an A25D male connector single ended 25 pair non plenum cable can be used 5 As needed mount D rings to properly dress the wires 6 Cut off the amphenol connector on the cross connect field side and strip the wires for each of the 25 pairs 7 Punch down the 25 pair wires to the termination block a Route the wires through the fanning slots on the termination block b Insert the conductors into the designated 110 connecting blocks already on the termination block c Use the D impact tool to seat the conductors see d Remove any insulation fragments with a spudger 8 Test the CO lines for proper connection see Testing CO Lines Trunks in this chapter 9 Label the network interface jacks CU module jacks termination blocks and D2R cords properly see CO Lines Trunks in this chapter 10 For each line trunk plug one end of a D2R cord into the designated jack on the termination block and the other end into the line trunk jack on the proper CU module Note The modular jacks on the termination block are 8 wire ja
272. f telephone Note Features can also be programmed onto individual telephones through centralized telephone programming See System Programming for more information Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single line telephone users can program Therefore general programming instructions for single line telephones are not provided When a telephone is in program mode the system considers it busy No incoming calls will ring at the telephone until it is back in normal call handling mode E 2 General Telephone Programming General Telephone Programming To Program Analog Multiline Telephones 1 Label the button Note Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button a Remove the clear label covers from the telephone by inserting the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the cover b Write the feature name in the space next to the button to be programmed c Replace the cover 2 Begin programming by sliding the T P switch on the side of the telephone to P The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in programming mode 3 Select the feature a Press the button you labeled If you have a display it shows the name of the feature currently programmed on the button If no feature is programmed the display indicates the button is blank Note If the feature does not get programmed onto a button press any line button This does not affect the button in
273. f the exchange does not reduce the unit load to 54 auxiliary power is required Continue to step 8 D 6 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 8 Calculate the unit load for slots 5 and 6 of the carrier Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX Equipment or Modified Network Access Lines DS1 0 0 0 0 GS LS 0 0 0 0 Tie 1 4 1 4 Telephones MLX 10 1 2 MLX 10D 1 2 MLX 28D 1 7 MLX 20L 1 6 BIS 10 1 1 BIS 22 1 3 BIS 22D 1 3 BIS 34 1 3 BIS 34D 1 5 MLC 5 1 5 10 Button Basic 0 0 10 Button HFAI 1 2 34 Button Basic 1 1 34 Button DLX 1 7 34 Button BIS 1 4 34 Button BIS DIS 1 4 Single Line Telephone 0 7 Continued Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access lines Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 7 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 8 Continued Qty x Unit Load Hybrid PBX or Modified Optional Equipmentt Direct Station Selectort General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter Total Unit Load for Slots 5 and 6 t The MFM has its own individual wall power unit located at the station and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Up to two DSSs one DSS per MLX 28D or MLX 20L canbe powered from each control unit carrier For example a three carrier system can have six system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit a f the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is less than or equal to 27 auxiliary power i
274. facility ARS Restrct restriction level FRL m To assign Allowed Allow List Lists m To assign Disallowed DisallowLst Lists 3 Identify barrier code to Dial barrier program and save entry code number nn Enter PC F4 F8 F4 F3 F4 F6 F7 Type barrier code number F10 System Features 4 199 Programming Procedures aa Step 4 If you selected Restriction in step 2 m To remove restrictions m To restrict from making outside calls local and toll m To restrict from making toll calls If you selected ARS Restrict in step 2 m Erase current level and assign new ARS FRL If you selected Allowed List in step 2 m Identify Allowed List 0 7 to assign If you selected Disallowed List in step 2 m Identify Disallowed List 0 7 to assign 4 200 System Features Console Unrestrcted Outward Restrict Toll Restrict Drop Dial FRL value n Dial list number n Dial list number n PC F2 F3 Alt P Type FRL value n Type list number n Type list number n Programming Procedures e OOOO Step Console PC 5 To save entry and assign class of restrictions to another barrier code m f barrier code number Next F9 is sequential Repeat steps 4 Repeat steps 4 and 5 and 5 m f barrier code number Enter F10 is not sequential Select option Select option from remote from remote access Barrier access Barrier Code menu Code menu Repeat steps Repeat
275. feature name select Find Feature Find from the display Select the range of letters from the display that corresponds to the first letter of the feature name for example if the feature begins with A select ABC If the feature is not displayed on the page that you jumped to press More 5 When you find the feature you want press the button next to or below it 6 Respond to any additional prompts on the display a Select the appropriate choice for example select On or Off to turn Inside Coverage on or off a Enter required information for example dial a phone number for Auto Dial E 6 General Telephone Programming General Telephone Programming 7 End programming by doing one of the following m To return to the Home screen press Home The telephone stops ringing To return to the Menu screen press Menu The telephone stops ringing To return to normal call handling lift and replace the handset The telephone stops ringing A Note About Programming MLX Display Telephones The two methods for programming MLX display telephones are interchangeable For example you can enter the programming mode by pressing Feature and dialing 00 and then can refer to the display to continue the programming process Or you can enter programming via the display and then can dial a programming code to select the feature rather than selecting it from the display General Telephone Programming E 7 General Feature Use
276. following limitations Since these sets are equipped with rotary dials no system features requiring and can be used Telephones equipped with neon message waiting lights are not supported Vintage telephone no longer available for sale or lease Telephones and Consoles 1 31 System Description Telephones and Adjuncts Not Supported A CAUTION The following telephones and adjuncts cannot be used with the system Connecting them can damage the telephones adjuncts and system Table 1 7 Telephones and Adjuncts Not Supported 510D Personal Terminals DCP telephones MET telephones Single line telephones Analog telephone adjuncts Digital Communications Protocol DCP 7400 telephones and adjuncts asynchronous data units and multiple asynchronous data units that use DCP and that are supported on the MERLIN II communications system Multibutton electronic telephones MET and adjuncts that are used with the Dimension PBX and Horizon systems with neon message waiting light Basic telephone modem interface BTMI BIMI 2 off premises extension OPX unit System 25 Direct Extension Selector DXS DSS attached to a 34 button Deluxe membrane 1 32 Telephones and Consoles Seii Destiption System Operator Consoles System operator consoles are telephones that are programmed for call handling and other operator duties Two configurations of operator consoles can be used direct line
277. for a power failure alarm Power Failure DID Busy Out The PFT port on a GS or LS module can be programmed to automatically short the busy out wire pair associated with a group of DID trunks Usually an LS line trunk is used as the busy out pair When a power failure occurs shorting this busy out pair signals the CO that the DID trunks are out of service see Note To remove the GS or LS module containing the PFT port for the DID busy out you must first short the busy out pair and then disconnect the modular cord from the PFT jack Otherwise a false busy out will occur Remove the short after the system is powered up Accessories 6 7 Adapters Accessories and Applications E Applications The following software and hardware applications can be installed on the system See the customer information booklet CIB or installation manual for UNIX based applications that comes with each application for detailed installation instructions m Stand alone products a Call Accounting Terminal CAT CAT Business CAT B CAT Hospitality CAT H s MERLIN Attendant for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System s MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System m MS DOS based products s Call Accounting System CAS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System CAS Plus Business CAS Hospitality Call Management System CMS for the MERLIN LEGEND
278. g reports are printed via the SMDR port a A UNIX based version of System Programming and Maintenance is available as part of Integrated Solution Il discussed earlier in this chapter Hardware Requirements man approved AT amp T PC or other MS DOS compatible PC with the following a at least 128K of RAM m a double sided floppy diskette drive either 5 1 4 or 3 1 2 a serial port assigned to COM1 or COM2 The serial port can use either a DB 9 or DB 25 connector If a DB 9 connector is used a 9 pin to 25 pin adapter is also required The 9 pin side must be female m video monitor monochrome or color m D8W modular cord and 355AF modular adapter if PC is within 50 feet of the control unit Distances of greater than 50 feet require back to back ADUs 6 36 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications eee Installation See PC with MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and Maintenance in MERLIN LEGEND System Programming for installation instructions Applications 6 37 Wiring The following tables summarize the basic conductor wire connections in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System The diagrams that follow the tables show the main wiring schemes Wiring A 1 Wiring Wiring Tables Table A 1 LS GS LS DID and OPT 6 Position J acks D2R Cord RJ11 Network Interface Plug Plug Desig Pin Color D8W 103A DIW E amp M DS1 Jack aa Cord Term Cable Desig Desig
279. g Multiline Telephones Requiring Voice Announce to Busy Feature Step Console PC 1 Display Voice Signal Pair Extensions F6 POIGEN VoiceSignl F10 2 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 3 Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign voice voice Press DSS pairing for Voice button for either Announce to Busy extension to feature turn red LED on red LED for other extension automatically goes on Go to step 6 Continued Telephones 4 105 Programming Procedures A Step Console PC 2 Continued m To remove voice voice Press DSS pairing for Voice button for either Announce to Busy extension to feature turn red LED off red LED for other extension automatically goes off Go to step 6 3 If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify extension Dial extension Type extension number for either pair slot and slot and member port or port or logical ID logical ID 4 To assign voice voice Enter F10 pairing for Voice Announce to Busy feature To remove voice voice Delete F8 pairing for Voice Announce to Busy feature 5 To program more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 telephones and 4 and 4 To view extensions with Inspect PgDn voice Voice pairing for Voice Announce to Busy feature 4 106 Telephones Programming Procedures Step Console PC 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Analog Multiline Telephones
280. g Special Characters Programming Special Characters Display It Press Shows Means Description Drop s Stop Drop inserts a stop within the dialing sequence so the user can enter specific digits such as a credit card number an authorization code or a password For example when you are programming the sequence of numbers onto an Auto Dial button or into the Personal Directory press Drop where numbers need to be manually dialed These numbers can be a credit card number or password that changes often To use press the Auto Dial button or choose the Directory listing The system will process the programmed numbers and then wait at the Drop signal for you to manually dial Press the Auto Dial button or select the Directory listing again to continue automatic dialing Programming Special Characters G 3 Programming Special Characters A Display It Press Shows Means Description Conf f Recall Conf sends a brief disconnect signal interpreted as a switch hook flash Recall must be the first entry in the sequence of programmed numbers to signal a special command or direction Some local facility providers use Recall for custom features End of speeds call processing by Dialing the system Use it at the end of a programmed sequence of numbers to signal that no more numbers follow G 4 Programming Special Characters System Programming Console Overlay The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System can be programm
281. g a Station jack to an on site computer for data only calls through a modem or data module logical ID A numbering sequence used to identify station and line trunk locations on the communications system control unit loop start LS line trunk A line trunk on which a closure between the tip and ring leads is used to originate or answer a call High voltage 20 Hz AC ringing from the central office CO signals an incoming call M Magic on Hold A customized Music on Hold MOH system that promotes the customer s products and Services Megacom AT amp T s tariffed digital WATS wide area telecommunic ations service offering for outward calling Megacom 800 AT amp 1 s tariffed digital 800 service for inward calling MERLIN Attendant An application with equipment that connects to one or more tip ring station ports and automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement In response to touch tone digits dialed by the caller MERLIN Attendant directs the caller to a department an extension or the system operator MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System An application that provides automated attendant call answering and voice mail services on the communications system MLX 10 MLX 10D telephone A 10 button telephone offered with or without a 2 line by 24 character menu driven display Glossary GL 15 Glossary MLX 20L telephone Multi Function Module MFM A tel
282. g on whether the printer is within 50 feet of the CU or not A CAUTION To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD avoid touching leads connectors pins and other components Use a properly grounded wrist strap Notes m The AT amp T 570 printer is not compatible with the system because it is not a serial printer m Before connecting a printer make sure that all modules have been installed on the CU m The printer must be plugged into the same AC outlet as the CU Connect a Printer Within 50 Feet of the CU Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a printer to the CU when the printer is within 50 feet of the CU and is powered from the same 117 VAC branch as the CU The Printer and the PC 3 45 Installation Hardware m Z200A EMI filter m adapter for the connector on the interface cable a 355A for a male connector a 355AF for a female connector Procedure see F igure 28 1 Take the Z200A EMI filter and cord and plug the end of the cord closest to the filter into the SMDR port the top one on the processor module 2 Plug the other end of the EMI filter cord into the adapter 855AF or 355A 3 Connect the female connector on the adapter to the 25 pin male connector on the printer s interface cable 4 Set the printer options for use with the SMDR feature m For the AT amp T 572 printer set the options on the printer according to Table 3 26 See the users guide supplied with the printe
283. ge Pool ARS Pool F1 Routing erase current py op Alt P pool routing assign new pool route and Dial pool dial Type pool dial out code nnn out code nnn save entry Enter F10 m To change current ARS FRL F2 Facility Restriction level Drop Alt P FRL erase current Dial pool dial Type FRL FRL value enter new value 0 6 and save Dee valle In entry m To specify other digits ARS Digit F3 to add erase currently PPA Alt P ie Melle other Dial Other Type Other a A digits to add Digits to add BEA i nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnn added and save entry Annnnnnni nnnnnnnn Enter F10 Automatic Route Selection 4 213 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 3 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 214 Automatic Route Selection Programming Procedures Night Service Night Service with Group Assignment Step Console PC 1 Display Night Service NightSrvce F10 Group Assignment screen En FI 2 Identify operator position Dial extension Type extension to program and save entry slot and slot and port logical port or ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension assign to group slot and slot and port logical port or ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no 4 To remove telephone from Delete F8 Night Service Group m o remove more Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 telephones from Ni
284. ght Service group on line 1 m To remove telephones Exit F5 from another Night GroupAssi F1 Service group B ae Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 Continued Night Service 4 215 Programming Procedures ee Step Console PC 4 Continued To assign telephone to Enter F10 Night Service group and Repeatstep3 Repeat step 3 assign more telephones to Night Service group shown on line 1 To assign telephone to Night Service group and assign telephones to another Night Service group m lf next extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 m f next extension Enter F10 number is not Exit F5 sequential GroupAssign F1 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 5 When all entries are Exit F5 complete exit mE F5 Night Service with Outward Restriction Console PC NightSrvce F10 Step 1 Display Night Service OutRestrict screen OutRestrict F2 4 216 Night Service Programming Procedures eee L_ Step Console PC 2 Check for password ma lf no password is Go to step 3 Go to step 3 displayed m f password is Drop Alt P displayed to erase currently assigned password 3 Remove or assign Password requirement m o remove password Enter F10 requirement Go to step 9 Go to step 9 m To assign required Dial password Type password 4 digit password any nnnn nnnn combination of digits Enter F10 0 9 and save entry 4 Add or change Emergency F3 Emergency Allowed lis
285. gnals to analog signals and vice versa which allows transmission between digital and analog data stations J jack A device accessed by inserting a plug that is used to terminate the permanent wiring of a circuit Key A mode of operation in which the communications system uses direct facility terminations DFTs on line buttons with a separate path for internal calling GL 14 Glossary ee L LED light emitting diode A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied LEDs show the operational status of hardware components the results of maintenance tests the alarm status of circuit packs and the activation of telephone features line coding The pattern data assumes as it is transmitted over a communications channel line compensation An adjustment for the amount of cable loss in decibels dBs based on the length of cable between a DS1 module and a channel service unit CSU or other far end connection point line trunk and station module A module on which the jacks for connecting central office CO lines trunks and or the jacks for connecting the Stations are located line and trunk assignment The assignment of lines and trunks connected to the communications system control unit to specific buttons on each telephone Glossary local area network LAN A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area local host computer access A method for connectin
286. h F2 2 Select feature to program mFor Transfer Transfer F1 m For Conference Conference F2 m For Drop Drop F3 3 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed host system Dial host Type host dial code enter new dial system dial system dial code and save entry code nnnnnn code nnnnnn Enter F10 4 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Recall Timer Step Console PC 1 Display Recall Timer Options F7 screen More PgUp RecallTimer F3 4 184 System Features Programming Procedures E Step Console PC 2 Select length of recall timer m For 350 ms m For 450 ms m For 650 ms m For 1 sec 3 8 ave entry and exit Rotary Operation Step 1 Display Rotary Operation screen 2 Select rotary operation m For delay m For no delay 3 Save entry and exit 350 ms 450 ms 650 ms 1 sec Enter Exit Console Options More Rotary Delay No Delay Enter Exit F1 F2 F3 F4 F10 F5 PC F7 PgUp F4 F1 F2 F10 F5 System Features 4 185 Programming Procedures yy Allowed Lists Step Console PC 1 Display Allowed List Tables F8 screen AllowList F1 2 Identify specific list 0 7 Dial list number Type list and entry number 0 9 followed by number and save entry number followed by le entry number If programming more than le one entry enter lowest Enter F10 entry number 3 Erase current entry and Drop Alt P identify allowed area code Dial number Type number and or exchange included
287. h SYSTIMAX wiring small system 5 W x 4H x 3 4 D large system 7 W x 4H x 3 4 D m Material a 3 4 plywood m Check with local building code enforcement agency to see if fire retardant material must be used 2 6 Space and Location ie paraon m Mounting Hardware For a wood mounting surface use woodscrews m For a brick cinder block or concrete mounting surface use masonry anchors For a plaster or plasterboard mounting surface use toggle bolts For a sheet metal mounting surface use sheet metal screws and attach them to structural members Note The combined pullout force of the backboard should beat least 650 Ibs Control Unit Requirements m Dimensions Basic carrier 14 W x 23 H x 12 D a Basic carrier and one expansion carrier 25 W x 23 H x 12 D a Basic carrier and two expansion carriers 37 W x 23 H x 12 D m Location a Within 5 feet of AC power outlet that is not switch controlled a Within 25 feet of the network interface a Within 1000 cable feet of telephones Space and Location 2 7 ales welielifed Power and Grounding Proper power and grounding are essential for correct and safe functioning of the system Power Requirements The customer should provide a load center of appropriate current rating equipped with 120 VAC 15 amp circuit breaker s Each breaker must protect one dedicated quad AC outlet or two dedicated duplex AC outlets
288. hange or remove individual barrier codes display Remote Access Barrier code screen 4 Identify barrier code to program and save entry Console BarrierCode Barrier Code Required Enter Exit Barrier Code Not Required Enter Exit BarrierCode Codes Dial barrier code number nn Enter PC F1 F1 F10 F5 F2 F10 F5 F4 F3 Type barrier code number nn F10 System Features 4 197 Programming Procedures Oi Step Console PC 5 To remove previously Drop Alt P established barrier code To change previously Drop Alt P established barrier code pial four digit Type four digit code nnnn code nnnn To add new barrier code Dial four digit Type four digit code nnnn code nnnn m To save entry and add change or remove another barrier code m f next barrier code Next F9 number is sequential Dial four digit Dial four digit code nnnn code nnnn Repeat this Repeat this step step m If next namer gode IS ppeer F10 not sequential EEE F2 Repeat steps 4 Repeat steps 4 and 5 and 5 m To save entry when all Enter F10 entries are complete 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 198 System Features Programming Procedures SESE Remote Access with Barrier Codes Class of Restriction Step Console 1 Display Remote Access LinesTrunks Barrier Code menu RemoteAccss BarrierCode 2 Select option m To change current call Restriction restrictions m To change ARS
289. he system has more than 24 stations and SYSTIMAX has not been ordered The Interconnect Wiring module provides the hardware to interconnect up to 12 stations with 110 type wiring For Interconnect Wiring you must build a jack field between the CU and the stations by using 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks and 110A1 wire troughs 3 88 System Wiring Installation Hardware Each kit includes instructions and parts sheet 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks 110A1 wire troughs D rings D8W cords Tools see F igure 40 D impact tool spudger m hand tools Procedure 1 Drill two diagonally opposite holes in a suitable backboard plywood is recommended for each piece of hardware Keep a 1 16 inch space between each piece of hardware Mount the wire troughs and the termination blocks There is a wire trough above each termination block If necessary repeat steps 1 and 2 for a second column Mount the termination blocks and terminate the station cable If the station cable is bottom feed start at the top and work down If the station cable is top feed start at the bottom and work up a Mount a termination block to the wall with appropriate fasteners b Strip the jacket off the 4 pair DIW station wires exposing the conductors c Punch down the station wires to the termination block System Wiring 3 89 Installation SS 1 Route the station wires
290. he telephone Plug the power supply into a 117 VAC outlet not controlled by a wall switch Insert the plug end of the 400B or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack 9 Test the MFM for T R operation by using the directions in Test the MLX Telephones with an MFM in this chapter 10 Attach the adjunct see Figure 62 a Insert one end of the cord supplied with the adjunct into the jack labeled TEL OTHER on the back of the telephone Route the adjunct and D8W telephone cords through the cord channel Test the adjunct by dialing its extension Note See Appendix Bifor a list of approved adjuncts Telephones and Consoles 3 107 Installation Attach the Direct Station Selector The Direct Station Selector DSS is an optional piece of telephone equipment One or two DSSs can be connected to an MLX 28D or MLX 20L telephone Note Connect the DSS s before you install the MLX telephones Before installing the DSS consider the following am Auxiliary power is required when a an MLX telephone with or without an MFM has two DSSs attached Use a 329A power unit must be ordered separately a an MLX telephone has one DSS and one MFM attached Use the KS22911 L2 power unit 400B adapter and D6AP cord provided with the MFM a two MLX telephones are on the same carrier each with one DSS attached Use a KS22911 L2 power unit 400B adapter and D6AP cord for any additional stations with DSSs these can be ordered separatel
291. her Digits FRL Stat Pattern 1 895 12345 3 17 00 B 2 70 3 17 00 Default tables 17 and 18 are also printed when ARS is not active TABLE 19 Dial 0 Output Table Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Start Pattern 1 70 2 12345 3 2 894 3 Default Table 19 is also printed when ARS is not active The Start column is not used in this table TABLE 20 N11 Output Table 01 411 02 611 03 811 04 911 Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL Stat Pattern 1 70 12345 3 Default Table 20 is also printed when ARS is not active The Start column is not used in this table The entry in the Pool column is always the dial out code of the main pool System Programming Reports I 17 System Programming Reports E ll Table l 14 Extension Directory Report Name Extension Directory Print Menu Choice Ext Info Description Slot port extensions telephone type button contents features assigned labels and restrictions etc included in Extension Directory Sample Report EXTENSION DIRECTORY LISTING Port Ext Label FHRMVRA PortExt Label FHRMV RA Addr ABCISSR Addr ABCISSR CIFCITS GEC TS ESWDGRR ESWDGRR 3 515 WAYNE NYYN1U3 3 616 ANN NYYN1U8 The column headings for these columns are read from top to bottom Information is included for all available station jacks in the control unit I 18 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports Un eE all MO Table l 15 System Directory Report Name Syste
292. ial Copy Number F4 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 To save choice and exit Enter F10 when all entries are F5 complete Erei Exit F5 Exit F5 PRI Facilities 4 79 Programming Procedures ee TJ _____ Telephone Number to Send Note You can use the Copy Telephone Number to Telephone Number to Send procedure instead of this procedure to specify that the Telephone Number to Send should be copied from the Telephone Number assigned to each channel in the B Channel group Step Console PC 1 Display PRI screen and e Number to LinesTunnkS F4 Send PRI F6 NumbrToSend F3 2 Identify line trunk and Dial line trunk Type line trunk save entry If you are programming more than one line trunk enter lowest number 3 Assign telephone number to line up to 12 digits any combination of 0 and 9 4 Save entry and either program another PRI line trunk or exit m To save entry and assign telephone number to send to another PRI line trunk If next line trunk number is sequential Continued 4 80 PRI Facilities no 801 880 or logical ID Enter Dial telephone number nnn nnnnnnnnn Next Repeat step 3 no 801 880 or logical ID F10 Type telephone number nnn nnnnnnnnn F9 Repeat step 3 Programming Procedures Step 4 Continued If next line trunk number is not sequential mw To save entry and exit when all entries are complete Test Telephone Number
293. ibution Type CIRCUIAR Delay Announcement Ext 35 Message Waiting Station 26 Calls_in_queue Threshold 5 External Alert ext Overflow Threshold 20 Overflow to DGC group LDN Group Coverage 1 2 3 No EXT LABEL 23 WAYNE 2 27 CAROL 20 LINES 807 808 809 810 Calling groups without members are not printed I 24 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports EEE uull Table 1 20 Night Service Report Name Night Service Print Menu Choice Nightservce Description The password required time of day and Emergency Allowed List extension numbers Sample Report NIGHT SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATOR 10 STNS 10 15 16 27 33 34 35 37 OPERATOR 14 STNS 14 42 43 45 Night Service groups without extensions assigned are not printed Password 3456 Current Day Monday Turn off at Turn on at Sunday Monday 08 00 17 00 Tuesday 08 00 17 00 Wednesday 08 00 17 00 Thursday 08 00 17 00 Friday 08 00 17 00 Saturday Time does not print if Night Service with time set is not programmed Emergency Allowed List 0 911 1 5551611 2 0 9 NS Excluded STNS 12 13 14 15 16 17 22 23 25 System Programming Reports I 25 System Programming Reports _ I Table I 21 Call Pickup Report Name Call Pickup Print Menu Choice Call Pickup Description Extension numbers for telephones assigned to each group Pickup groups are numbered 1 30 Sample Report GROUP CALL
294. in progress Power supply failure m Faulty processor module 5 46 Troubleshooting No action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Check for erratic AC power Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary otherwise no action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module No action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module No action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary otherwise no action is needed If problem persists check or replace processor module Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen l Code Description Possible Cause Solution 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C SANITY TIMEOUT RESET MAX RESET COUNT EXCEEDED FRIGID START POWER UP COLD START CARD INSERTED REMOVED SLOT STREAM CNT EXCEEDED m Processor module sanity timer failure Software failure Module failure m Backplane failure m System initiated cold start because of too many warm starts m Power supply module failure m Faulty processor module m Processor module was removed while in use and system initiated frigid start because of translation loss a User initiated frigid start m Power supply module failure m Faulty processor module Power failure a Module was installed or removed m Ex
295. ine as determined by the total REN s contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area Installation and Operational Procedures The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures m Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can be made only by the manufacturers their authorized agents or by others who maybe authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this ne ment please contact the National Service Assistance Center NSAC at 1 800 628 2888 or your authorized AT amp T dealer m Rights of the Local Telephone pombany If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service m Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom tele
296. ing central office CO systems developed by AT amp T in which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program endpoint The final destination in the path of an electrical or telecommunications signal expansion carrier A carrier added to the control unit when the basic carrier cannot house all the modules needed An expansion carrier houses a power supply module and up to six additional line trunk and station modules extended superframe format ESF A framing format consisting of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and 1 signal bit 193 bits in a 24 frame extended superframe See also Glossary F facility The equipment constituting a telecommunications path between the communications system and the central office CO factory setting The default state of a device or feature if the user does not choose an optional setting fax facsimile A processor the result of a process in which graphic material is scanned and the information converted into electrical signal waves to produce an exact likeness feature A function or service provided by a hardware or software product feature code A code entered on a dialpad to activate a feature For example a user might press the feature button or might dial 33 Feature screen A display screen on digital ISDN display telephones that provides quick access to commonly
297. interface Magic on Hold or a customer provided music source connected to the communications system via a loop start LS jack Most MOH equipment is designed for LS operation Note If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require such a license from AT amp T or your authorized AT amp T dealer network A configuration of communications devices and software connected for information interchange Hardware software or both that links two systems in an interconnected group of systems for example between the local telephone company and a PBX O off premises telephone A telephone located in a building other than where the control unit is located ones density The requirement for channelized DSI service to the public network that eight consecutive zeros cannot be in a digital data stream outcalling A feature of the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System application When outcalling is activated the user is automatically called by the system at a programmed number when a new message is received in his or her mailbox out of band signaling Signaling that uses the same path as voice frequency transmission and in
298. ion Busy Backup Console Operator Queued Call Return Ring Drop Dial number of rings nn Enter Exit Exit Console Operator Queued Call More QCC Backup 4 144 Optional Operator Features PC F3 F2 F10 Alt P Type number of rings nn F10 F5 F5 Position Busy Backup PC F3 F2 PgUp F1 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling provide QCC queue group exten group exten backup sion no nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no 3 To assign calling group as Enter F10 Position Busy Backup To remove calling group Delete F8 Position Busy Backup 4 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Operator Features 4 145 Programming Procedures Optional Group Assigned Features Call Pickup Groups Step Console PC 1 Display Call Pickup Extensions F6 Groups screen Call Pickup F9 2 Identify group to program Dial call pickup Type call 1 30 and save entry group number pickup group nn numer nn If programming more than Enter one group enter lowest group number 3 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 4 Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign telephones Press DSS to call pickup group button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove telephone Press DSS from call pickup group button for each telephone to turn red LED off Go
299. ion devices that can operate simultaneously and independently For example an MLX telephone with a Multi Function Module MFM plugs into only one station jack but the jack supports the telephone and the equipment connected to the MFM such as a fax machine or an answering machine In a similar way although the 100D module has only one Jack it can serve up to 24 endpoints emulated lines trunks or ISDN PRI lines trunks Thus the large system can be configured to connect up to 80 lines trunks and 255 station endpoints a total of 335 endpoints Note The system has a time slot capacity of 216 If more than 216 endpoints are in use at the same time blocking can occur Table 1 8 lists the capacities of the system s hardware and software components for both small and large systems System Capacities 1 35 SeSi Heseiledies Table 1 8 System Capacities Components Small Large Carriers a Total 3 a Line trunk and station module slots basic carrier 5 a Line trunk and station module slots expansion carrier 6 a Maximum slots available for modules 17 DS1 Modules Endpoints devices Lines Trunks Operator Consoles a DLCs Analog multilinet QCCs a DSSs a Combination of DLCs and QCCs a Number of consoles per module The basic carrier contains a power supply module processor module and five slots for line trunk and station modules Each expansion carrier contains a power pay module and six slots fo
300. it must accurately translate analog signals Doing this involves signal conversion quantizing commanding and switching Signal Conversion The first step in analog to digital A D conversion is to sample the analog signal and convert the signal into a series of amplitude steps This is called pulse amplitude modulation PAM PAM samples the height of the analog waveform 8000 times per second or more than twice the frequency of the input signal bandwidth for analog voice the bandwidth is 3300 Hz Because the analog signal is sampled at more than twice its bandwidth both the amplitude and frequency content of the original analog signal are preserved The amplitude of each PAM sample is then digitally encoded and transmitted by using a process called pulse code modulation PCM PCM uses PAM as its starting point but goes further by digitizing the PAM signal for transmission via the digital switch PCM converts the height of each PAM pulse to an 8 bit digital signal for transmission PCM digitizes the PAM information by comparing each PAM sample to a point on a chart Each point has a distinct 8 digit binary code Therefore it is the binary code digital not the amplitude pulse analog that is transmitted in PCM At the destination the PAM signal is reconstructed from the PCM signal via a digital to analog D A converter The D A converter also completes the reconstruction of the analog signal from the stream of PAM signals
301. ither T1 or Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Operation a ground start GS line only when registered under the MF FCC classification A Hybrid PBX system can use m loop start trunks m ground start trunks m tie trunks m direct inward dialing DID trunks m a DSi facility programmed for either T1 or ISDN PRI Operation The names of modules consist of a number identifying the number of lines trunks and or stations that can be connected to the module followed by the types of lines and or telephones it supports For example the 408 GS LS module provides four line jacks and eight station jacks and supports ground start or loop start lines The system supports 13 types of line trunk and station modules see Figure 4 Table 1 1 lists the specifications for each type of module See for wiring diagrams 1 8 Control Unit System Description Table 1 1 Line Trunk and Station Modules Line Trunk Type Station Type Specifications Analog multiline telephone CMS analog data via a modem MLX telephone digital data device such as ISDN 7500B Data Module Capacity 8 analog stations Signaling analog multiline telephone protocol 40 kbps Loop range 1000 feet in building or in range out of building with analog IROB protectors service only Capacity 8 digital stations each with one or two endpoints each endpoint is assigned an individual extension number inclu
302. ition interrupting an in progress restore procedure causes corruption in system programming information which results in system malfunction In either case you must reconnect to the switch and do another restore immediately 5 Return to SPM Main Menu Enter Note After you restore you must manually update the Current Day of the Week field in the Night Service menu Backup Restore and Print 4 231 Programming Procedures Print See for a list and a sample of all system programming reports Step 1 If using a PC with SPM direct system program ming reports to PC or SMDR printer by selecting Print Options from SPM Main Menu m To direct reports to SMDR printer m To direct reports to PC m To return to SPM Main Menu 2 Display Print screen 3 Select Print Reports m f report you want to print is not displayed m When report you want to print is displayed Console More Print More Press the button next to report name 4 232 Backup Restore and Print PC F4 F1 F2 F5 PgUp F3 PgUp Press function key for report name Programming Procedures Step Console 4 If you did not select Go to step 5 Allowed or Disallowed List in step 3 If vou selected Allowed or Dial list Disallowed List in step 3 number n identify the list you want to Enter print lf reports are being sent to Go to step 6 SMDR printer or you are programming with a system programming c
303. k special character A pause stop or end of dialing signal in a programmed dialing sequence such as an Auto Dial or Personal Speed Dial number Square Key A way of configuring the communication system in Key mode so that all lines appear on all telephones Glossary station The endpoint on the internal side of the communications system A station can be a telephone with or without an adjunct or can be a data terminal with a modem analog or an ISDN 7500B Data Module digital attached station jack An analog digital or tip ring T R interface on the control unit module for connecting telephones and other equipment Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA A device that permits alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls switched service network SSN A network consisting of terminals transmission lines and at least one exchange on which a user can communicate with any other user at any time switchhook flash Operation of the telephone switchhook in which the on hook period is in the range of 250 500 ms T S synchronous data transmission A method for continuous digital data stream in which the transmission of each binary bit is synchronized with a master clock system acceptance test A test of all trunks telephones data terminals and features after installatio
304. k interface 3 84 Robbed bit signaling RBS 4 185 Rotary operation RS 232 reset 5 26 wiring connections S Security Shared Access for Switched Services SASS Shared System Access buttons Signal conversion Signal Monitor Unit SMU insertion 3 41 switch options switch settings IN 14 Index Signal processing Single line telephones Software Defined Network SDN ee Station Message Detail Recording call report format 4 179 calls recorded on call report printer 345 connection to control unit 3 45 50 or more feet from the CU 3 50 within 50 feet of the CU Speakerphone Start and stop times for subpatterns 4 204 Station cord labels 3 96 Station outlet cable termination Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA Index T System capacities System date System features Allowed Lists assignment to telephones 4 187 Automatic Callback interval call length SMDR 4 180 call Park return time 4 177 call report_on the SMDR format 4 179 calls recorded 4 180 4 176 Camp on return time Disallowed Lists assignment to telephones Extension Status host system dial codes for Behind Switch mode inside dial tone 4 181 sd One Touch Transfer 4 173 si Recall timer 4 184 redirect outside calls to unassigned extension numbers Reminder Service Cancel Remote Access Automatic capes barrier codes class of restriction with barrier codes 4 199
305. key F1 F5 Programming menu Exiting System Programming PC Step Console m To return to the main Menu menu from any screen m To return to the main Exit menu from the System Programming menu m To exit system Home programming completely and return to normal activities F5 Home System Programming 4 3 Programming Procedures SS O SPM Main Menu Options Table 4 1 SPM Main Menu Options Sys Program Enter system programming and configure the system as shown on the planning forms for the system Backup Save a backup copy of the system s programming either on a floppy diskette or on the hard disk Boards Determine which modules port boards are in each slot of the CU Print Opts Set up the options for the printer used for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and connected to the SMDR port See Installation chapter for details Maint Mode The AT amp T systems technician or authorized dealer uses this function for maintenance tests that ensure the hardware and software of the system are operating correctly Restore Restore the system s programming from a floppy diskette or from a file stored on the hard disk 4 4 System Programming Programming Procedures ee Table 4 1 Continued Pass Thru This option is used when the system configuration includes the Integrated Solution II IS Il application It is used by AT amp I s NSAC or an AT amp T authorized dealer to establish a re
306. l underground water pipe at least 1 2 inch in diameter in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet It must be electrically continuous or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints plastic pipe or plastic water meters to the point where the protector ground is connected A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building a concrete encased ground or a ground ring If these grounds are not available the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds metal underground gas piping system an electrically continuous metal underground gas piping system that is uninterrupted with insulating sections or joints and without an outer nonconductive coating a other local metal underground systems or structures local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems 2 12 Power and Grounding Preparation rod and pipe electrodes a 5 8 inch solid rod or 3 4 inch conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet a plate electrode a minimum of 2 square feet of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil m concrete encased ground must be an electrode consisting of at least 20 feet of one or more steel reinforcing rods at least 1 2 inch in diameter or 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG encased in 2 inches of concrete This electrode must be located within and near the bottom of a
307. l Operator Features PC F9 Repeat step 3 F10 F6 Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 F5 PgDn then F5 F5 Programming Procedures Call Type Queue Priority Level Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call Operator F3 screen and select Call Types Queued Call F2 Call Types F7 2 Select type of call to program and display queue priority assignment screen for call type selected m lf Group Coverage is Press button Press function not selected next to choice key next to choice Priority F1 m If Group Coverage is GrpCoverage F8 selected Priority F1 Dial coverage Type coverage group number group number 1 30 nn 1 30 nn Enter F10 3 Erase current priority level Drop Alt P and assign new priority Dial queue Type queue level 1 7 priority level n priority level n 4 Save and exit EALEF F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Operator Features 4 139 Programming Procedures ___________ amp i i 79 i QCC Operator to Receive Call Types Step Console PC 1 Display Queued Call screen and select Call Types Operator F3 Queued Call F2 Call Types F7 2 Select type of call to program and display QCC operator assignment screen for call type selected m If Group Coverage is not selected m lf Group Coverage is selected 3 If a DSS is not attached Press button next to choice Operator GrpCoverage Operator Dial coverage group number 1 30 nn Enter
308. l digits Type digits entry nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn nnnnannrm m lo save entry and enter other digits for another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1 alf next pool route Next F9 number is Repeat this Repeat this sequential step step alf next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 m To save your entry Enter F10 when all entries are complete 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 N11 Special Number Table Step Console PC 1 Display Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu and select N11 Special Numbers F6 Table More PgUp SpeclNumber F4 Automatic Route Selection 4 211 Programming Procedures EEE Step Console PC 2 To change current Facility ARS FRL F1 Restriction Level FRL m Erase current FRL Drop Alt P value enter new value Dial FRL value Type FRL 0 6 and save entry n value n Enter F10 To specify other digits to ARS Digit F2 add m Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed other Dial Other Type Other digits specify new Digits to add Digits to add other digits to be Nnnannnnnnnnn nannnnnnnnnnn added to called nnnnnnnnl nnnnnnnnj number and save entry Enter F10 3 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Dial O Tables Step Console PC 1 Display Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu and select Dial 0 Special Numbers BRS F6 Table More PgUp Dial 0 F6 4 212 Automatic Route Selection Programming Procedures Tr Step Console PC 2 Select option m To chan
309. l signals This allows analog data station users to communicate with inside digital station users or to place data calls using an outside digital ISDN PRI facility The modern is connected to the control unit by a basic station jack on a 012 module and the ISDN 7500B Data Module is connected to the control unit by a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module Data calls are placed to outside data stations through the control unit using system lines outside ISDN PRI facilities connected to the DS1 line trunk jack on a 100D module in the control unit a Digital to Analog converts digital signals to analog signals This allows digital data station users to communicate with inside analog data stations or to place data calls using the regular telephone network The modem is connected to the CU by a tip ring jack on a 012 or 008 OPT module and the ISDN 7500B Data Module is connected to the CU by a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module Data calls are placed to outside data stations through the CU using system lines outside tines trunks connected to a line trunk jack on a 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 800 GS LS 408 408 GS LS 800 DID or 400EM module in the CU Analog to digital and digital to analog pools can also connect dedicated outside analog data lines to digital ports 008 MLX module on the system Because of interfacing problems between the RS 232 on the modem with the RS 232 on the 7500B modem pools can operate in one direction only
310. lassified in the error log as transient or permanent Basically transient errors are intermittent and permanent errors are steady Each error has a threshold count that when exceeded escalates an error from transient to permanent To be automatically cleared each type of error must be trouble free for a set time period The error logs are m permanent system errors m transient system errors m last 10 system errors Error logs are stored in battery backed up RAM Alarms A permanent error causes an alarm This alarm lights a red LED next to a line or feature button on a system operator console or other designated telephone programmed for alarm notification The LED stays on until the error is cleared Maintenance 5 3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Alarms can be cleared m automatically by the system when the error condition no longer exists m manually by the user m by replacing a module m by clearing an error log entry via the Drop button on an MLX 20L telephone or via ALT P onaPC Restarts Depending on the severity and duration of a problem it maybe necessary to restart the system either by a warm start cold start or frigid start Certain errors can cause the system to automatically restart cold starts and frigid starts can be initiated by the maintenance technician m Frigid start All calls are dropped and the system configuration information is erased All system memory must be reinitialized including
311. lecting PC port from the Printer Options screen When reports are directed to the PC port you can print them on a printer connected to your PC hard copy or as a print file on either a hard disk or floppy disk To view a print file you must exit SPM and use DOS commands If you are programming from a remote location exiting SPM also disconnects you from the control unit modem Note The System Programming amp Maintenance report should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour System Programming Reports I 1 System Programming Reports Table I 1 System Information Report Name System Information Print Menu Choice SysSet up Description System wide information such as return intervals system mode system programming port slot assignments and Remote Access barrier codes and restrictions Sample Report SYSTEM INFORMATION Current Date 11 26 90 Current Time 09 45 10 System Mode AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie Hybrid PBX Enable Enable Direct Line Operators 20 24 Queued Call Operators 10 14 SysProg Port e 13 Password COLT Transfer Type Audible OneTouch Compl ReturnTimer Ring MusicOnHold Transfer Auto 4 rings Paging System Lines 809 Music on Hold Line 810 Camp On Time 10 sec Call Park Return Time 10 sec Delay Rings 2 Auto Callback Rings 3 Extension Status ESS Group Call CMS ESS Operators 20 24 Continued I 2 System Programming Reports
312. lephone features such as Transfer and Hold with advanced features such as Group Coverage and Park Data features provide switched data connections that enable the transmission of voice and data over the same system wiring System Description 1 1 System Description A Modes of Operation The system is designed for customers in the 10 to 100 station range It can be configured to operate in one of three modes m Hybrid PBX m Key m Behind Switch Hybrid PBX Mode The Hybrid PBX mode handles a large volume of calls and users and provides the most flexibility of the three modes Outside facilities consist of loop start trunks ground start trunks direct inward dialing DID trunks tie trunks and Digital Signal 1 DS1 facilities The trunks can be grouped in pools for shared use In addition trunks can be assigned to line buttons on multiline telephones for users who need a personal line Users access inside lines and outside trunks via system access buttons To make an outside call the user enters a dial out code usually a 9 and the system automatically selects an available trunk The Automatic Route Selection feature determines which trunk should be used for each type of outgoing call Incoming calls can be handled by a direct line console DLC or a queued call console QCC or by a combination of both console types 1 2 Modes of Operation System Description Key Mode In the Key mode each outside line appears
313. ls can be transferred in one of two ways either blind or supervised A blind transfer means the Attendant dials the extension or department requested by the caller and disconnects If the call is not answered or the phone is busy the caller is routed to the system operator With a supervised transfer the Attendant transfers the call and can retrieve it if the transfer is unsuccessful The Attendant then directs the call to another telephone allows the caller a second route choice or provides a failed transfer announcement depending on how the application has been programmed Calls can be answered immediately Primary Call Handling or after a delay Secondary Call Handling for example if the call goes unanswered by the system operator after a certain number of rings Table 6 3 shows the number of Attendants required based on a Primary Call Handling situation Applications 6 27 Adapters Accessories and Applications LLL Table 6 3 Number of Attendants No of Attendants Required Incoming Lines Trunks 1 to 6 7to9 10 to 12 Busy Hour Calls 1to25 25to50 50 to 100 Considerations m The MERLIN Attendant cannot be connected to a system that operates in the Behind Switch mode m The MERLIN Attendant cannot be connected to a system that has an AUDIX Voice Power application or a MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System installed A maximum of four Attendants can be connected to the system see Table 6 3 m All VM
314. lt n S Contents System Programming Reports 1 J System Programming Menu Hierarchy J 1 K Two Digit Numbering Plan 1 L System Technician s Run Sheet L 1 E T TT aaa AB Abbreviations ABB 1 OOOO GL Glossary GL 1 an IN Index IN 1 Illustrations inside back cover vi Tables 1 System Description 1 1 Line Trunk and Station Modules 1 9 1 3 Reusable MERLIN II Line Trunk and Station Modules 1 22 1 4 Reusable MERLIN II Hardware 1 24 1 5 Analog Multiline Telephones 1 28 1 6 Single Line Teleohones 1 30 1 7 Telephones and Adjuncts Not Supported 1 32 1 8 System Capacities 1 36 1 9 Feature Capacities 1 38 1 10 Tie Trunk Compatibilit 1 52 1 11 Line Compensation Settings 1 59 2 1 Required Planning Forms 2 2 2 2 Required Planning Forms for 100D 400EM or 800 DID Modules 2 3 2 3 Optional Planning Forms 2 3 2 4 Environmental Requirements 2 5 2 5 AC Power Requirements 2 8 vii Tables E 3 Installation 3 1 SW1 Default Settings 3 21 3 3 SW4 Default Settings 3 23 3 8 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network and Equipment are ESF Framed 3 28 Network and Equipment are D4 Framed 3 28 3 10 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network is ESF Framed and Equipment is D4 Framed 3 29 3 11 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network is D4 Framed and Equipment is ESF Framed 3 14 Wire Wrap Connector Pin Assignments 3 32 3 21 OR Power Mode Option Settings 3
315. lume of calls increases Glare occurs when a user tries to make an outside call on a line trunk at the same time an incoming call is being received on that line trunk In addition if system B the LS interface does not have Remote Access only the station s assigned to the LS facility on system B can be accessed by system A Analog Tie Trunk Connection In an analog tie trunk connection the system A s 400EM module is connected to system B s CU On premises this module can be connected directly to system B if system B has similar tie trunk facilities For off premises connection the 400EM module can be connected via the telephone company s facilities to system B The analog tie trunk connection can be programmed for two way traffic or for one way traffic incoming or outgoing The one way mode prevents blocked calls caused by glare Digital Tie Trunk Connection The digital tie trunk connection joins the DS1 facility the 100D module on system A to system B s DS1 facility If system B is on premises the connection is back to back To reach a remote system the DS1 facility connects via a channel service unit CSU to the telephone company s facilities Networking Capabilities 1 43 System Description Tie Trunk Networks The following tie trunk networks can be used with the system Nontandem The nontandem network is used primarily to connect station lines at both ends it does not connect to another tie trunk
316. m Directory Print Menu Choice PblicDirect Description System Speed Dial number telephone number and label included in System Directory Sample Report SYSTEM DIRECTORY Code Name Number Display 600 Western Sup 15055551611 YES 601 Xanadu Inc 15055552299 NO Speed Dial codes without names and teleohone numbers are not printed System Programming Reports I 19 System Programming Reports a Table 1 16 Group Paging Report Name Group Paging Print Menu Choice Group Page Description Extension number for each group and the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group Sample Report GROUP PAGING Group 793 STNS 10 15 18 19 22 Paging groups without members are not printed I 20 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports Se A Table l 17 Extension Information Report Name Extension Information Print Menu Choice Ext Info Description Type of equipment connected features assigned to station and features assigned to each button on the station Sample Report EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS PP Type 3 1 NT2 Executive Pool Access 70 890 891 Auto Callback ON Call Waiting OFF Coverage Inside ON Abbreviated Ring ON Line Preference ON Shared SA Ring OFF Receive Voice Calls ON Button 34 21 Blank Button 33 21 Blank Button 32 21 Blank Button 30 21 Blank Button 29 21 Blank Button 28 21 Blank Button 27 21 Blank Button 26 21 Blank Button 25 21 Blank
317. m To specify that Dial 0 Type 0 transferred calls are not returned to originator 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 One Touch Transfer Step Console PC 1 Display Transfer screen Options F7 and select One Touch Transfer F1 Transfer One Touch F2 System Features 4 173 Programming Procedures SES rrr Step 2 Enable or disable One Touch Transfer To specify One Touch Transfer with manual completion transfer is automatically initiated when Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed and user must press another button to complete transfer To specify One Touch Transfer with automatic completion transfer is automatically initiated and completed when Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed To specify One Touch Hold call is put on hold when Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed 3 Save entries and exit 4 174 System Features Console Transfer Enter Manual Transfer Enter Automatic Hold Enter Exit Exit PC F1 F10 F1 F1 F10 F2 F2 F10 F5 F5 Programming Procedures wy 0a Transfer Audible Step Console PC 1 Display Transfer screen Options F7 and select Transfer Audible Transfer F1 Audible F3 2 Specify type of Transfer Audible m To specify that caller Music 0n F1 being transferred Hold hears Music on Hold m To specify that caller Ringback F2 being transferred hears ringing 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Note If y
318. merous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it Some individuals use electronic devices to prevent or falsify records of these calls Others charge calls to someone else s number by illegally using lost or stolen calling cards billing innocent parties op Ing on to someone else s line and breaking into someone else s telephone equipment physically or electronically In certain instances unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone network through the use of remote access features The Remote Access feature of your system if you choose to utilize it pene off premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone y using an 800 number or a 7 or 10 digit telephone number The system returns an acknowledgement signaling the user to key in his or her authorization code which is selected and administered by the system manager After the authorization code is accepted the system returns dial tone to the user If you do not program specific egress restrictions the user will be able to place any call normally dialed from a telephone associated with the system Such an off premises network call is originated at and will be billed from the system location The Remote Access feature as designed helps the customer through proper administration to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network Most commonly phone numbers and codes are compromised when
319. modular jacks m one 110AB1 100FT field terminated block m 110A1 wire troughs m D rings m 110P8A5B patch cords m D8W cords Tools See F igure 40 D impact tool 788J1 impact tool spudger m hand tools System Wiring 3 91 Installation B Procedure 1 Locate the proper wall space The cross connect field will usually be to the right of the CU Leave enough space between the CU and the cross connect field to allow for system growth 2 Attach the template to the wall or backboard with a staple gun tacks or tape Make sure that the upper edge of the template outline is 70 inches above the floor and that the template is parallel to the floor see Figure 45 3 Find the placement of the hardware on the template see Figure 46 The first and third columns on the template show where the termination blocks go the middle column shows the place for the field terminated blocks Keep the elements of a kit in the same colored blocks For example the termination blocks of kit 1 go in the green section of column 1 the field terminated block of kit 1 goes in the green section of column 2 4 Drill two diagonally opposite holes for each piece of hardware You can drill right through the template see Figure 47 There is a 1 16 inch space between the outline of each piece of hardware keep this space as you mount the hardware 5 Remove the template from the wall Keep it in one piece so you can check it for correct pl
320. module s on the expansion carrier s c the power supply module on the basic carrier The system automatically cold starts Replacing the Processor Module A failed processor module must be repaired immediately Follow these steps to replace a failed processor module 1 et Or OE If possible save all the translations to a floppy disk by using the backup function Note When the processor module fails backup is usually impossible Power down the system by turning off a the power supply module on the basic carrier b the power supply module s on the expansion carrier s c any auxiliary power unit if present Unplug the SMDR printer and or system programming PC cords if present Remove the processor module Inspect the processor module for any visible problems Inspect the carrier backplane Remove the feature module from the processor module and install it in the new processor module Install the new processor module 5 30 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9 Restore power by turning on a any auxiliary unit if present b the power supply module s on the expansion carrier s c the power supply module on the basic carrier The system automatically cold starts 10 Use the maintenance screens to select System Erase frigid start 11 Restore the system translations from the backup floppy disk 12 Plug in the SMDR printer and or administrative PC cords 13 Attach a tag identifying a
321. mote connection from a computer at their location to the IS Il computer connected to the system Password Change the password Each option on the System Programming menu is described below Table 4 2 System Programming Menu Options Set system operating conditions SysRenumber Replace the factory settings for the system numbering scheme with 1 to 4 digit number that are more meaningful for the customer s business or more convenient for telephone users Operator Program features for the operator positions Program line or trunk options Extensions Program features for telephones such as restrictions or line assignments Options Program system wide features such as Transfer Return or Delay Ring System Programming 4 5 Programming Procedures a Table 4 2 Continued Tables Program features that require entering information in a table such as Allowed Lists or Disallowed Lists AuxEquip Program auxiliary equipment connected to the system such as an answering machine or a fax NightSrvce Program Night Service features Labeling Program the labels shown on display telephones such as Public Directoy or Posted Messages Specify telephones that require Simultaneous Voice and Data capability Print system programming reports such as system configuration or extension assignments Cntrl Prog Perform centralized telephone programming assign features to specific buttons on telephones Exit system
322. mputer or modem m PORT 2 When an enhancement board is installed for synchronous operation Port 2 connects a second data terminal an automatic calling device with an RS 366 interface or a data terminal with a V 35 interface Note A modem can provide an analog data interface from an MLX telephone that has an MFM installed When you use the ISDN 7500B Data Module with an MLX telephone plug one end of the D8W cord into the PHONE jack on the 7500B and the other end of the cord into the LINE jack on the MLX telephone The maximum cord length from the 7500B to the telephone cannot exceed 80 feet The MLX telephone cannot be used to dial data calls and the data module cannot be used to dial voice calls Each device Data Adapters 3 57 Installation operates independently and features are assigned to each device independently Note Do not connect two ISDN 7500B Data Modules on one line The data module can be configured as a stand alone by ordering a WP90110 L1 power unit PEC 21625 The 7500B can also be configured in a multiple mount arrangement by ordering a Z77A data mounting PEC 21626 which provides a common power supply for up to eight data modules Both the power unit and the data mounting need a 115 VAC power outlet Neither the power unit nor the data mounting is provided with the data module and both must be ordered separately The 7500B does not have the internal 100 ohm line termination that is provided
323. n AMI The line coding formats guarantee that the ones density requirement is met to achieve clock recovery To meet the ones density requirement either zero code suppression ZCS or bipolar 8 zero substitution B8ZS line coding is used The factory set line coding is ZCS ZCS ZCS line coding monitors each DSO channel and prevents strings of eight or more zeros Upon detecting eight consecutive zeros in a channel octet ZCS line coding forcibly changes the seventh zero second least significant bit to a one With ZCS line coding any bit that is overwritten has no noticeable effect on voice and voice grade data However the ZCS line coding format can cause errors in digital data transmission DS1 Capabilities 1 57 System Description mm B8ZS B8ZS line coding encodes an all zero channel octet into a unique binary sequence with a bipolar violation in bit positions 4 and 7 Normally for bipolar AMI transmission ones are encoded alternately as a positive then negative or negative then positive pulse If two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession a bipolar violation occurs Ordinarily bipolar violations are caused by noise hits on the signal However B8ZS line coding allows the 8 bit strings to be detected at the receiving end and converted back into the original sequence B8ZS line coding is preferred over ZCS because it does not cause errors in data transmission B8ZS violations are p
324. n button button for any key for any trunk in pool to trunk in pool to turn green LED erase letter G off red LED letter R remains on remains on screen Note An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign the line trunk or pool to the telephone or select Delete F8 to remove the line trunk or pool assignment from the telephone 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 4 98 Telephones Programming Procedures Copy Line Trunk Assignments Step Console Extensions PC F6 1 Display Copy Lines screen Line Copy Single F1 2 To copy line assignments to individual telephones To copy line assignments to sequentially numbered block of telephones Block F2 3 Identify telephone to copy line assignments from and save entry If copying from more than one extension enter lowest extension number Dial extension slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 4 If Single was selected identify telephone to copy assignments to or If Block was selected identify the first telephone in block of telephones to Dial extension slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Type extension Slot and port or
325. n to ensure they are working correctly system date The date that appears on display telephones and Station Message Detail Recording SMDR reports System Programming amp Maintenance SPM A DOS or UNIX based application for programming and maintaining the communications system system renumbering A process used to change the extension numbers assigned to stations adjuncts calling groups paging groups Call Park zones and Remote Access system time The time that appears on display telephones and is printed on Station Message Detail Recording SMDR reports Glossary GL 21 Glossary EE touch tone gate An operation used to T determine if a call is from a touch tone or rotary T1 telephone A digital transmission carrier path that in North America transmits at the DS1 rate of touch tone receiver TTR A device used to decode touch tones dialed from 1 544 Mbps single line telephones or telephone power supply unit Remote Access telephones Equipment that provides power to an individual telephone tie trunk U A private line directly connecting two communications systems ape power supply time division multiplexing A device that connects to the TDM communications system to A process where the provide 117 VAC to the transmission channel is equipment when the divided commercial power source fails timer A built in timing device in a unit load display telephone A measure of the power loa
326. n for extension no Next Repeat step 4 Enter Repeat steps 2 5 Enter Exit Exit PC Type extension Slot and port or logical ID F10 Type extension Slot and port or logical ID F9 Repeat step 4 F10 Repeat steps 2 5 F10 F5 F5 Programming Procedures Block Renumbering 5 Assign new extension numbers to the group and exit Dial extension slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter Step Console PC 1 Display Block Renumber SysRenumber F2 screen Block F3 2 Select type of group to Press button Press function renumber next to choice key next to choice 3 Enter first group Dial extension Type extension member s line trunk or Slot and Slot and extension number and port or port or save entry logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 4 Enter last group member s Dial extension Type extension line trunk or extension slot and Slot and number and save entry port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 System Renumbering 4 19 Programming Procedures Step 6 When all entries are complete Console PC Exit F5 Exit F5 Direct Station Selector DSS Page Buttons Step Console PC 1 Display Single screen and gysRenumber F2 select DSS Buttons
327. n option is programmed enter the assigned password after pressing the Night Service button The Night Service LED goes on Note Night Service on a DLC can also be activated by pressing the Feature button and dialing 39 System Acceptance Test 3 129 Installation ee 2 Pick up the handset and press a button for any outside line trunk Dial the CO line trunk access code and the number of a CO line trunk that receives Night Service coverage 3 Verify that the telephones assigned to the Night Service group are ringing 4 Have someone pick up the handset at a telephone in the Night Service group verify that you have good two way communication 5 At both telephones hang up 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each Night Service line trunk 7 Test telephones that have been programmed for Night Service with Outward Restriction a Pick up a handset on a restricted telephone and verify that outside calls are not allowed b Using the password make an outside call 1 Hang up the handset 2 Press the Recall button and dial the password Note On an MLX telephone without a programmed Recall button press the Feature button and dial 775 and the password before picking up the handset 3 Pick up the handset and make an outside call 4 Verify that you have good two way communication and hang up 8 At the operator console press the Night Service button again and verify that the Night Service LED goes off 3 130
328. nd save entry m To save entry and enter another entry in ARS table shown on line 1 m f next entry number is sequential Continued Console 6 Digit AreaCode Exchange doa 7 Enter Dial entry number nnn Enter Dial number nnn Next Repeat this step PC F1 F2 F3 F4 F10 Type entry number nnn F10 Type number nnn F9 Repeat this step Automatic Route Selection 4 203 Programming Procedures mm ee Step Console PC 6 Continued m fnextentry number nter F10 is not sequential aE F6 ARS Input F2 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 6 2 6 m To save your entry Enter F10 when all entries are complete 7 Exit Exit F5 Start and Stop Trees for Subpattems Step Console PC 1 Display Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu and select ARS F6 Sub B Start F8 2 Identify table 1 18 to Dial table Type table program and save entry number nn number nn Enter F10 3 Erase currently assigned Drop Alt P start time and assign new Dial Start time Type start time start time for Subpattern B hhmm eam and save entry Enter 10 4 Select Subpattern B stop Sub B Stop F9 time 4 204 Automatic Route Selection Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 Identify table 1 18 to Dial table Type table program and save entry number nn number nn Enter F10 6 Erase currently assigned Drop Alt P start time and assign stop Dial stop time Type stop time time for Subpattem
329. ndex IN 11 Index E oo Optional telephone features Personal computer PC with cont d System Programming and i Maintenance SPM cont d 50 or more feet 3 53 sd Ordering codes C 1 C 15 within 50 feet Other digits system programming Outside facilities M2 PersonalLines 1 2 1 40 id 1 40 o Outside line dial tone Personal Speed Dial 1 40 test 3 119 PFT see Power failure transfer Overflow coverage 4 165 P Pool buttons 1 40 PagePac 20 Pool routing Paging systems B 8 B 16 Pools wiring Port screens multizone Ports single zone with Position Busy backup 4 background music and Posted Message MOH Power failure alarmj6 6 sd single zone with customer Power failure DID busy out 6 7 sid amplifier Power failure transfer PFT single zone with PFT telephone 1 PagePac 20 A 11_ testing single zone with Power option switch 3 29 lt lt Paging Access Module Power requirements 2 8 Power suppl Paging interface testing foil shield Park 1 40 installation Password validation 5 8 5 8 replacement PBX see Power surge protection Permanent errors 5 3____ Power unit Personal computer PC with 329A System Programming and Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 6 5 sd Maintenance SPM 4 1 _ a KS22911 connection to the control unit IN 12 Index Index A CC Power turning off 3 18 turning on 3 17 Primary Rate Interface PRI
330. ne Comp Pc Type slot number nn F10 F4 F1 F2 F10 F5 F5 PC F4 F1 Type slot number nn F10 F6 Programming Procedures T ii Step Console PC 3 Erase currently assigned Drop Alt P line compensation and Dial line Type line specify amount of decibel compensation compensation loss for line compensation value n value n 1 0 6 dB loss 2 1 2 dB loss 3 1 8 dB loss 4 2 4 dB loss 5 3 0 dB loss 4 Save choice then exit Fnter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Clock Synchronization Step Console PC 1 Display Loop Start LinesTrunks F4 Ground Start DS1 screen LS GS DS1 F1 2 Idendify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 in control unit that number nn number nn contains 100D and save Enter F10 entry 3 Display Priority screen Clock Sync F7 Priority F7 DS1 Facilities 4 49 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 Specify that the module in slot shown on line 1 provides m Primary clock Primary F1 synchronization m Secondary clock Secondary F2 synchronization m Tertiary clock Tertiary F3 synchronization m No clock None F4 synchronization 5 Save choice and display Enter F10 Source of Synchronization TE F2 screen 6 Specify source of clock synchronization a To specify that clock is Loop F1 synchronized to external endpoint m To specify that clock is Local F2 free running 7 Save choice and exit Enter F10 8 Select Clock Activation Activation F3 9 Activate or deactivate
331. ne DSS go to step 4 a If you are installing two DSSs repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DSS then go to step 3 3 Wire the two DSSs see a Place the two DSSs side by side and face down b Route the D8AC cord from the IN jack of the second DSS DSS2 through the cord channel of the first DSS DSS1 c Plug this D8AC cord into the jack labeled OUT on DSS1 4 Wire the telephone to the DSS s see Figure 63 Telephones and Consoles 3 109 Installation a With the handset removed from the telephone place the telephone face down on a flat surface to the right of the upside down DSS s b Plug the D8AC cord from the IN jack of the DSS1 into the jack labeled DSS on the telephone and route the cord through the cord channel c Plug the D8W line cord into the jack labeled LINE of the MLX telephone The D8AC and D8W cords share the cord channel on the telephone 5 Turn the telephone and the DSS s face up with the telephone now to the left of the DSS s 6 Insert one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset and the other end into the jack on the side of the telephone Notes m lf auxiliary power is not required go to step 7 m f auxiliary power is required go to step 8 7 Connect the telephone auxiliary power is not required by plugging the D8W cord into the wall jack Go to step 9 8 Connect the telephone auxiliary power is required see a Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8 c
332. ne Enter F10 microphone To enable telephone Delete F8 microphone 5 To program more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 telephones and 4 and 4 To view telephones Inspct PgDn disabled microphones 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Telephone Features 4 127 Programming Procedures ma ee i Remote Call Forwarding Step Console PC 1 Display Extensions screen Extensions F6 and select Remote Call Forwarding More PgUp Remote Frwd F8 2 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 3 Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To allow telephone to Press DSS forward calls to outside button for each numbers telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To restrict telephone Press DSS from forwarding calls button for each to outside numbers telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 3 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension program slot and slot and port or port or logical ID logical ID 4 128 Optional Telephone Features Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 To allow telephone to Enter F10 forward calls to outside numbers To restrict telephone from Delete F8 forwarding calls to outside numbers 5 To program more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 telephones and 4 and 4 To view telephones with Inspct PgDn Remote Call Forwarding capability 6 Return to Extensi
333. network during loopback Operation DTE B8ZS is not decoded Network B8ZS is not decoded network ESF 5 down default to DIP switch configuration upon power up Ce fe ee E down loop network signal back ESS loopback to network during keep alive Channel Service Unit 3 25 Installation Table 3 6 SW 7 Settings Status Position 3 26 Channel Service Unit Installation Bit Error Rate Threshold Option DIP switch SW2 can be set to alarm at bit error rate BER threshold levels between 10 and 10 or can be disabled Table 3 7 shows the settings for SW2 for the various thresholds Table 3 7 SW2 BER Options Threshold Option Position 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 Disable down down not used up not used up not used up up non latching mode down latching mode Channel Service Unit 3 27 Installation Switch Settings for Framing in Hybrid PBX Mode The framing format for the network and for data terminal equipment can be either D4 or extended superframe ESF DIP switches SW5 and SW6 must be set according to the following tables to match the framing format for the network and the equipment This applies to Hybrid PBX mode only Table 3 8 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network and Equipment are ESF Framed fo fs lo up up up fown fao up up up When this switch position is set to down the near end CSU polls the far end CSU f
334. ng number and transmitting that number from the caller s local central office CO to another point on or off the public network INFO 2 INformation Forwarding 2 is AT amp T s ANI service automatic ringdown tie trunk See automatic start tie trunk automatic start tie trunk AT amp T Switched Network A tie trunk on which incoming ASN calls are routed to an AT amp T telecommunications operator or other designated services provided through an Integrated Digital Services Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI line or trunk Accunet switched digital service Megacom WATS Megacom 800 Software Defined Network SDN MultiQuest and Shared Access for Switch Services SASS GL 2 Glossary destination without a start signal Also called automatic ringdown tie trunk or auto in tie trunk auxiliary power unit A device that provides additional power to the communications system Glossary eee Basic Rate Interface BRI A standard Integrated B channel For an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN a 64 kbps channel that carries a variety of digital information streams such as voice at 64 kbps data at up to 64 kpbs wideband voice encoded at 64 kpbs and voice at less than 64 kbps alone or combined with other digital information streams Also called bearer channel bandwidth The difference expressed in hertz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a range of frequencies that de
335. ng for Go to step 6 Go to step 6 T200 Timer To change T200 Timer T200 Timer F 1 setting display T200 Timer screen 4 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting Dial number of Type number of 1000 3000 ms ms nnnn ms nnnn PRI Facilities 4 83 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m Tosave entry and change T200 Timer for another 100D module If next slot numberis Next F9 sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 If next slot numberis Enter F10 not sequential TER F5 Timers F1 Repeat Repeat steps 2 5 steps 2 5 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 6 If no change to setting for Go to step 9 Go to step 9 T203 Timer To change T203 Timer T203 Timer F2 setting display T203 Timer screen 7 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting 1 60 Dial number of Type number of see seconds nn seconds nn 4 84 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures N tts CsCsOCCiCS Step 8 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m Tosave entry and change T203 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is sequential If next slot number is not sequential m To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 9 If no change to setting for N200 counter To
336. ngs between the columns as needed to dress the patch cords Plug one end of a D8W cord into the proper CU module station jack and the other end into the corresponding jack on the termination block in column 1 or column 3 Repeat for all the D8W cords Dress the D8W cords through the wire trough above the termination block see Note Each kit has extra D rings and wire troughs Use them as needed to dress the cords System Wiring 3 93 Installation 12 Label the termination and field terminated blocks see Label the System Wiring in this chapter Write the appropriate information such as extension numbers and users names on the strip labels provided and snap the designation strips into place 13 Use the 110P8A5B patch cords to connect termination blocks to field terminated blocks see Properly dress the patch cords through the wire troughs and D rings Wire a Telephone for Two Voice Pairs If an analog telephone requires either the Voice Announce to Busy feature or the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature you must assign two adjacent odd even station jacks 01 and 02 13 and 14 etc on an analog station module to that telephone The numbers of these station jacks are boxed on the planning forms Two voice pairs one pair from each jack must be connected from the CU to the telephone see A bridging adapter is used to connect both voice pairs to the telephone Note In Figure 51 the wire from station
337. nn Type number of seconds nn Programming Procedures CC E Step Console PC 32 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m Tosave entry and change T310 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is Next F9 sequential Repeat step 31 Repeat step 31 If next slot number is Enter F10 not sequential EE F5 Repeat Repeat steps 30 32 steps 30 32 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 33 If no change to setting for Go to step 36 Go to step 36 T313 Timer To change T313 timer T313 Timer F2 setting display T313 Timer screen 34 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting Dial number of Type number of 4 12 sec seconds nn seconds nn PRI Facilities 4 93 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 35 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change 1313 Timer for another 100D module If next slot numberis Next F9 sequential Repeat step 34 Repeat step 34 If next slot number is A F10 not sequential Exit F5 Repeat Repeat steps 33 35 steps 33 35 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 36 If no change to setting for Go to step 39 Go to step 39 T316 Timer To change to setting T316 Timer F3 for T316 Timer display T316 Timer screen 37 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new s
338. nnected to the ISDN 7500B Data Module This adapter provides 100 ohms to terminate the line Modems A modem is used at an analog data station to place and or answer data calls It converts the digital signals from the data terminal into analog signals for transmission over standard telephone lines It also converts incoming analog signals to digital signals for acceptance by the data terminal Hardware Requirements Most modems can be connected to the system If a modem is used in a modem pool a 2224G modem or its equivalent must be used see Modem Pool later in this chapter If you use a modem with an MLX telephone install a Multi Function Module MFM in the telephone to provide a tip ring interface for the modem Connect the modem directly to the MFM If the modem is used with an analog multiline telephone a General Purpose Adapter is required to provide a tip ring interface for the modem See Install the Multi Function Module later in this chapter and General Purpose Adapter in Chapter 6 for more detailed information Data Adapters 3 67 Installation When a modem is connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM dial data calls using the data terminal keyboard and dial voice calls using the telephone dialpad The MLX telephone cannot be used to dial data calls and the data module cannot be used to dial voice calls Each device operates independently and features are assigned to each device independently When a m
339. noise onto system wiring allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU Note While there are many ways to connect the network interface to the CU and the CU to the stations the methods shown here are the recommended ones System Wiring 3 77 Installation A WARNING National and local building codes specify the type of cable required for telecommunication wiring For example indoor wiring DIW cable cannot be used inside or on top of air plenums or ducts along hot pipes or across walkways Consult your local ordinances and regulations for proper cable selection If staples are used to attach the cords to walls or baseboards check that the cords have not been pierced Also do not run CO lines from the network interface to the CU if the distance is greater than 25 feet Connect the Network Interface to the CU The local telephone company installs the network interface for the CO lines Before you install the system verify that the network interface is the proper type and that it is located within 25 feet of the CU The adapter needed to connect the CO lines to the CU depends on the type of network interface as shown in Table 3 32 below A CAUTION To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware loca
340. ns j N feature use F 1 F 2 fixing telephone problems 5 general telephone and wiring 5 troubles 5 35 mis Intercom or System Access button assignment 4 101 not supported 1 32 replacement 5 32 single line telephone problems oO o1 ea ee voice transmission troubles z 5 37 poorly labeled wiring Terminal block TB1 3 41 _ ___ _ Terminal equipment identifier 96 erminating resistor adapter 58 3 67 st telephone number 4 81 lt O O P ke o SYSTIMAX IN 16 Index Index Tie trunks answer supervision time direction disconnect time E amp M signal networks options signaling signaling modes signaling types Type 1 compatible 1 51 Type 1 standard 1 51 lt Type 5 simplex 1 51_ _ testing type wiring back to back Tip ring T R port Time division multiplex TDM bus Transfer audible 4 175 One Touch 14 173 type of 4 176 Transient errors Trouble alarms Two party conversations Type 1 compatible 1 51 Type 1standard 1 51 Cd Type Ssimplex 1 51 U Unit loads Behind Switch mode 2 16 si calculation of D 1 D 9 sd Hybrid PBX_ mode Key mode worksheet D 1 Universal Paging Access Module UPAM 1 34 6 6 B 15 B 16 y Voice Announce to Bus Voice mail interface 1 37 sid Voice mail systems 1 37 si Voice messaging interface VM
341. nstallation 9 Connect one end of the cable with the 3 pin connectors to the header labeled P101 on the power supply circuit board Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P1 on the ring generator see 10 Connect one end of the 4 pin cable to the header labeled P202 on the power supply circuit board Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P2 on the ring generator see 11 Use the clips provided with the ring generator to attach the cables to the inside edge of the plastic housing see Make sure the cables do not lie across the circuit boards 12 Replace the left half of the module housing 13 Carefully turn the module over and replace the five screws 14 Stick the modification label Equipped with 129B Freq Gen to the wire manager on the front end of the power supply module 15 Place the power supply module back in the carrier Add a Foil Shield to the Power Supply Module For each expansion carrier you must install another power supply module for the additional line and station modules The added power supply module can cause excessive noise on the module immediately to its right To eliminate the noise apply copper foil shields to the power supply module housing These shields and their labels are packaged in the power unit shielding kit included with the expansion carrier Follow these steps to install a copper foil shield see Figure 17 1 Lay the power supply module on
342. nt physically plugs into only one jack on the 012 basic telephone module it functionally takes up three ports Some AC power strips maybe needed since the Attendant is powered by wall mounted transformers 10 VAC Notes m Only four ports on the same 012 basic telephone module can be used simultaneously with Attendant When four ports are used for Attendant only one other port can be connected to a telephone m Powering and grounding procedures must follow those established for T R telephones that require auxiliary power Product References MERLIN Attendant Installer s Guide Applications 6 29 Adapters Accessories and Applications MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System offers integrated call management services at low cost Automated Attendant This service answers telephones automatically and transfers callers to the appropriate departments or extensions Callers hear a series of recorded prompts that they respond to by dialing numbers on a touch tone telephone If there is no answer or the extension is busy callers can leave a message or try another extension Callers without touch tone telephones can be transferred to the system operator who then handles their calls Separate menus for day and night service as well as multilevel menus and corresponding announcements can be set up to ensure that callers reach the right person or
343. nter Outward Restrict Enter Toll Restrict Enter ARS Restrct Drop Dial FRL Value Ln Enter Allow List Dial list number n Enter Repeat above action Inspect Exit Exit PC F2 F1 F10 F2 F10 F3 F10 F3 Alt P Type FRL value n F10 F4 Type list number n F10 Repeat above action PgDn F5 F5 System Features 4 195 Programming Procedures Le Step 2 Continued To assign Disallowed Lists m Identify Disallowed List 0 7 you want to assign and save your entry To assign another list m lo view all lists assigned and Exit m lo return to Remote Access menu without viewing lists 3 Exit Console Disallow Lst Dial list number n Enter Repeat above action Inspct Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit Remote Access Barrier Codes Step 1 Display Remote Access DISA menu m To program non tie lines m To program tie trunks 4 196 System Features Console LinesTrunks RemoteAccss Non Tie Tie Lines PC F6 Type list number n F10 Repeat above action PgDn F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 PC F4 F8 F3 Programming Procedures Step 2 To establish or remove barrier code requirement w To specify that barrier codes are required for Remote Access save choice and return to Remote Access DISA menu To remove barrier code requirement save entry and return to Remote Access DISA menu 3 To add c
344. nternational Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee Through these internationally accepted standard interfaces ISDN provides digital circuit switched or packet switched connections within the network and to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital connectivity i Integrated Solution II IS ID One or more UNIX based applications for improving voice and data communications and automating office operations Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant An IS Il application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department an extension or the system operator interface Hardware software or both that links systems programs or devices T O input output device Equipment that can be attached to a computer internally or externally for managing a computer system s input and output of information IROB in range out of building protector A surge protection device for off premises telephones at a location within 1000 feet of cable distance from the communications system control unit Glossary GL 13 Glossary ISDN 7500B Data Module A data communications device that allows connection between RS 232 data terminal equipment DTE and the communications system control unit via MLX Station jacks on the 008 MLX module The ISDN 7500B Data Module is used together with a modem in a modem pool to change digital data si
345. ntify the origins of cables Along with the color coding scheme alphanumeric codes on the labels help to identify the specific location of the same pair or series of pairs at the other end of the cable see Table 3 34 m Jack labels Jack labels are small white rectangular shaped stick on tabs that are stuck to the cover plate or housing of station outlets They identify the location of the satellite closet where the cable to that outlet is terminated and the number of the circuit Station cord labels The blue station cord labels are packaged with the CU carriers and wrap around each end of the station cords leaving the CU 3 96 System Wiring Installation rr Table 3 34 Insert Labels What It Identifies Special Features 4 pair cable originating at The fourth pair of the 4 Station outlets in offices pair cable to MLX or other locations Stations is reserved for supplying power to one DSS at an operator console White Various types of riser house or campus cable connections Gray Closet letter and circuit Used with 25 pair tie number cables that link large riser closets and smaller satellite closets or two riser satellite closets Green CO pairs Used only on the line trunk or auxiliary field in the equipment room Purple System common Usually supplied with the equipment such as a system common PBX or a data switch equipment Yellow Auxiliary circuits For auxiliary circuits not arranged in arranged in 3 p
346. ny visible problems and any relevant error reports to the replaced processor module Replacing the Line Trunk and Station Modules Line trunk and station modules can be removed and inserted without affecting normal call processing Leave the system power on All line trunk and station modules can be removed or inserted at the same time Notes m Although the system is designed for line trunk and station modules to be removed and replaced without affecting call processing partially inserting and removing a module can cause a cold start m Adding a 100D module or changing any of its DS1 parameters requires that the system be idle The module removed must be replaced with a module having the same type of circuit board in other words the same signature If a module is replaced with another type of module or if a module is added to the system without the system being powered down a cold start occurs If you move the first 008 MLX module from its Maintenance 5 31 Maintenance and Troubleshooting OO a slot you must renumber the modules by selecting Board Renumber from the System Programming menu Note This procedure is not the procedure for replacing the processor module Follow these steps to replace a line trunk and station module 1 Busy out or reset the module Busy out is recommended The module enters standby mode for a reset 2 Label all line trunk and station cords if they haven t been labeled already and
347. o continue board Yes F1 renumber process System restarts System restarts and sessionis and session is terminated terminated automatically automatically m To cancel renumber No F2 process Exit F5 4 16 Set the Operating Conditions Programming Procedures System Renumbering System Numbering Plan Selection Step 1 Display Default Numbering screen 2 Specify system numbering plan m For 2 Digit m For 3 Digit m For set up Space 3 Exit Single Renumbering Step 1 Display Single System Renumber menu m To see more choices 2 Select item to renumber Console PC SysRenumber F2 Default F1 Numbering 2 Digit F1 3 Digit F2 SetUp Space F3 Exit F5 Exit F5 Console PC SysRenumber F2 Single F2 More PgUp Press button Press function next to choice key next to choice System Renumbering 4 17 Programming Procedures Step 3 Enter current extension and save entry 4 Enter new extension number 5 Save entry and either renumber more items or exit m To save entry and renumber another item of the same type m If next extension m If next extension m To save entry and exit when all entries are number is sequential number is not sequential complete 4 18 System Renumbering Console Dial extension Slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter Dial extension Slot and port or logical ID or press DSS butto
348. ocessing module for on site system programming and maintenance Remote system programming and maintenance uses the built in 1200 bps modem assigned to two fixed time division multiplexed TDM time slots System Programming 4 1 Programming Procedures T i Remote System Programming To program with a PC with SPM from a remote location place a data call using the instructions provided with the modem 1 You can establish the data connection with the built in modem in one of the following ways m Call the system on a Remote Access line enter the barrier code and dial the code for the internal modem 10 m Call the system on a regular line and ask the system operator to transfer you to the internal modem m Call the remote location such as the National Service Assistance Center from the system and then transfer the call to the internal modem 2 When aconnection is made with the system modem use the following instructions to enter and exit system programming 4 2 System Programming Programimi ng Procedures Entering and Exiting System Programming Entering System Programming Once the system programming console or PC is connected directly to the control unit CU or you have established a remote connection using a PC with a modem follow these steps to enter system programming Step Console 1 Display main menu Menu 2 Select System Sys Program Programming 3 Display System Exit PC SPM Press any
349. ocessor Check or replace OVERFLOW module processor module 0012 INVALID m Faulty processor Check or replace RESET FLAG module processor module 0013 DUART m Faulty processor Check or replace STREAMING module processor module INT 0014 PROCESSOR m Faulty processor Check or replace ERR module processor module INTERRUPT 0015 MODULE m Module inserted into Change programming MISMATCH wrong slot and to reflect proper module physical and logical or install proper types do not match module 0C01 NO I VMS s All VMS ports are out No action is needed PORT IN of service SERV 5 48 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 1001 3001 6C01 6C02 6C04 POOL M BUSY EXCEEDS 50 ALARM TABLE FULL DS1 LOSS OF SIGNAL ALARM DS1 BLUE ALARM DS1 YELLOW ALARM 50 or more of lines trunks in the pool indicated by the PORT number are maintenance busy Error logs are full and no more errors can be written to them Service on line is lost T1 facility failure All 1s are being received Service on link is lost Far end is out of service Far end lost frame synchronization Service on line is lost Check line trunk Correct indicated errors then remove entries from transient system error log to create space If problem persists cold start system before continuing with troubleshooting Check T1 facility
350. odem is connected to an analog multiline telephone using a GPA data calls and voice calls are dialed by using the telephone dialpad The modem and telephone do not operate independently features assigned to the telephone also apply to the analog data station modem and associated data terminal Modem Features The modem used in an analog data station and not in a modem pool provides the following features m dialing or ending asynchronous data calls from the keyboard when connected to a tip ring station jack on a 012 or 008 OPT module or when connected to an MLX telephone using an MFM m autobaud also called data metering or speed matching or the ability to adjust the speed of transmission to match the speed of the data terminal being called m automatic or manual answering of incoming data calls m self test and maintenance procedures m ability to set data options for the call an the keyboard and if necessary change the options without dropping the call Modem Pool A modem pool also called a conversion resource is made up of one or more pairings of an ISDN 7500B Data Module and a modem The modem pool is used to convert data signals from digital to analog or to convert data signals from analog to digital 3 68 Data Adapters Installation E This allows data communications between digital data stations and analog data stations There are two types of modem pools a Analog to Digital converts analog signals to digita
351. odule on the basic carrier and then at the power supply module on each expansion carrier 4 If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk push the GS button attached to the telephone 5 Pick up the handset on the touch tone or rotary dial telephone You should hear a dial tone 6 If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk again push the GS button attached to the telephone 7 Dial an outside number where you know someone will answer the call 8 After the call is answered and you have verified that you have good two way communication tell the person the telephone number assigned to the outside line jack bridged by the PFT jack to which you are connected 9 Have that person call the number after you hang up Your phone should ring after the other person completes dialing the number 10 Answer the phone and verify that you have good two way communication before disconnecting Note Test all PFT jacks by repeating steps 1 through 10 for each jack before going to step 11 11 Turn the power back on first at each expansion carrier and then at the basic carrier System Acceptance Test 3 133 Installation eee Test the Touch Tone Receivers Four touch tone receivers TTRs are system resources available on each 400 400 GS LS and 800 DID module The 008 OPT and 012 basic telephone modules also provide two TTRs per module for system use Follow these steps to test the TTRs 1 Ata single line telephone
352. of the four marked mounting hole locations 4 Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard 5 Place the control unit housing wire clips around the molding for the screws on the back of the carrier 3 2 The Control Unit Installation Note Put on all four housing clips if the system has only one carrier Put on the housing clips only on the left side of the basic carrier if an expansion carrier is to be added Position the carrier on the screws and slide the carrier to the left Check to see that the carrier is level and that the housing clips extend as far as possible from the sides of the carrier Tighten the screws Install the Expansion Carrier Follow these steps to mount the expansion carrier to the backboard and connect it to the basic carrier or to an existing expansion carrier see Figure 15 1 Locate the breakaway plastic tab on the right side of the already mounted carrier Using a flat blade screwdriver gently pry the tab open to expose the card extenders and connectors on the carriers Align the connector of the expansion carrier with the card extender on the already mounted carrier and slide the connector onto the extender Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard by using the expansion carrier as a guide Make sure the carrier is level before marking the holes Disconnect the connector on the expansion carrier from the card extender on the already mounted carrier and lay the exp
353. ogical ID or pool dial out code Delete Repeat step 3 Exit Line Pool Repeat steps 2 4 F10 Type calling group exten sion no nnnn F10 Type line trunk no 801 880 x slot and port logical ID or pool dial out code F8 Repeat step 3 F5 F10 Repeat steps 2 4 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 157 Programming Procedures eee Step Console PC 4 Continued To assign line trunk or Enter F10 pool to calling group and Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 assign more lines trunks or pools to calling group shown on line 1 To assign line pool or pool to calling group and assign lines trunks or pods to another calling group m If next group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 m lf next group extension Enter F10 number is not F5 sequential Exit Line Pool F10 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 To assign iine trunk or Enter F10 pool to calling group when all entries are complete To view lines trunks or Inspct PgDn pools assigned to calling group 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 158 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Hunt Type Step 1 Display Group Calling menu and select Hunt Type 2 Identify calling group to program and save entry 3 Specify hunt type m lo specify circular hunt type m To specify linear hunt type Console Extensions More Grp Calling Hunt Type Dial calling group exten si
354. ole 1 33 6 19 6 20 ___ MERLIN Attendant 6 27 0 MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System 6 30 Message center operation Message Waiting Indicator B 10 lt Message waiting receiver Microphone operation MLX telephones B 8 assembly 3 112 MLX telephone tests basic 5 33 with a DSS with displays with Multi Function Modules MFMs in the T R mode 3 118 5 35 _ o O ooo O reusable modules 3 116 5 33 _ _ Index IN 9 Index MLX 10 telephone 3 105 3 113 Modem pool data module settings analog to digital digital to analog hardware requirements modem settings analog to digital digital to analog option settings option settings requirements 3 71 S y O Module demand test 5 16 Mu Law 255 Multi Function Module MFM 1 9 311200 Music coupler Music on Hold MOH 4 109 3 132 00 testing 3 132 IN 10 Index N N11 special number table 4 211 National Service Assistance Center NSAC National Technical Service Center Network interface connection to the control unit RJ11 network interface RJ14 network interface 3 838 RJ21X network interface 3 81 lt 3 82 3 84 RJ2GX network interface RJ48C X network interface Networking capabilities control unit to control unit 42 analog tie trunk connection O Night Service testing with Group Assignment 4 215 with Outward Restriction 4 216 4 216
355. om call coverage group on line 1 Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 To remove telephones Exit F5 from another call coverage group Group Cover Repeat steps 2 5 F3 Repeat steps 2 5 F10 To assign telephone to Enter call coverage group and Repeat step4 Repeat step 4 assign more telephones to call coverage group shown on line 1 To assign telephone to call coverage group and assign telephones from another call coverage group m f next group number is sequential m If next group number is not sequential When all entries are Next Repeat step 4 Enter Exit Group Cover Repeat steps 2 5 Inspct F9 Repeat step 4 F10 F5 F3 Repeat steps 2 5 PgDn complete to view telephones assigned to call coverage group 4 152 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Man ee Step Console PC 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Delayed Ring Interval for Individual or Group Cover Buttons Step Console PC 1 Display Delay Ring screen options F7 Delay Ring F4 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of rings and specify new rings n rings n number of rings 1 6 before delayed ring 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Coverage Delay Interval Step Console PC 1 Display Coverage Delay Options F7 screen More PgUp Cover Delay F6 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 153 Programming Procedures mm ee Step Console PC 2 Erase cur
356. on a button on one or more multiline telephones The line buttons allow users to see activity on other telephones join conversations place calls or receive calls Separate intercom buttons are used to make and receive internal calls A Key system automatically assigns the first eight outside lines to all telephones This arrangement can be customized through system programming by assigning lines to individual telephones or to selected groups of telephones Behind Switch Mode In the Behind Switch mode the system is connected to a Hybrid PBX or Centrex system This other system called the host provides the interface to outside lines and some features A Behind Switch system assigns only one line called a prime line to each telephone Outside lines to telephones or groups of telephones are assigned through system programming In the Behind Switch mode people can use the special features of both the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and the host system Modes of Operation 1 3 System Description I E i i_ _OOON S N System Components The system consists of required and optional components m required components control unit a telephones m optional components m adjuncts adapters m applications These components are described in the following pages 1 4 System Components SACU Besedluiter Control Unit The control unit CU connects central office CO lines with telephones and adjunct
357. on for another tie trunk If next tie trunk number Next F9 is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 If next tie trunk number Enter F10 is not sequential Direction F1 Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m To save choice and EREET F10 exit when all entries Exit F5 are complete Exit F5 Tie Trunk Type Step Console PC 1 Display TIE Lines screen LinesTrunks F4 TIE Lines F2 2 Select trunk type to program m For incoming tie trunk Intype F2 type m For outgoing tie trunk Outtype F3 type Tie Trunks 4 53 Programming Procedures e Step Console PC 3 Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no Type trunk no entry 801 880 801 880 If programming more than slot and port or slot and port or one tie trunk enter lowest logical ID logical ID trunk number Enter F10 4 Specify tie trunk type m For wink type Wink F1 m For delay type Delay F2 For immediate type Immed F3 m For automatic type Auto F4 5 Save choice and either program another tie trunk or exit m To save choice and specify type for another tie trunk If next tie trunk number Next F1 is sequential Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 If next tie trunk number Enter F10 is not sequential Repeat Repeat steps 2 5 steps 2 5 m To save choice and Enter F10 exit when all entries 2 F5 are complete Eart Exit F5 4 54 Tie Trunks Programming Procedures o BA t E amp M Signal Step Console PC 1 Display Tie Lines screen LinesTrunks
358. on no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter Circular Linear PC F6 PgUp F4 F1 Type calling group exten sion no Nnnn F10 F1 F2 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 159 Programming Procedures T Step Console PC 4 Save entry and either program another calling group or exit m To save entry and assign hunt type for another calling group m f next group Next F9 extension number is Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 sequential alf next group Enter F10 extension number is Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 not sequential and 3 and 3 m To save entry and exit neer F10 when all entries are f complete Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 160 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Group Calling Delay Announcement Step 1 Display Group Calling menu and select Delay Announcement 2 Identify calling group to program and save entry 3 Identify announcement device to assign to calling group 4 To remove delay announcement device from calling group m To remove delay announcement from another calling group Continued Console Extensions More Grp Calling DelayAnnce Dial group calling exten sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter Dial extension slot and PC F6 PgUp F4 F2 Type group calling exten sion no Nnnn F10 Type extension x slot and port logical port or ID or press D
359. on the carrier The power supply module converts 117 VAC line voltage to these outputs 5 VDC 5 VDC and 48 VDC All modules use 5 VDC and 5 VDC for logic and analog transmission circuits Most line trunk and station modules use 48 VDC for power to the stations The direct inward dialing DID and off premises telephone OPT line trunk and station modules also provide 48 VDC on the tip ring T R interface to the CO or OPT station The 012 basic telephone module provides 21 VDC to single line telephones and equipment When single line telephones are connected to a 012 800 DID or 008 OPT module a 129B Frequency Generator ring generator must be installed in the power supply module of each carrier that houses one or more of these modules A green light on the power supply module remains on as long as the module is receiving power The power supply module also has an on off switch and a modular telephone jack for connecting an auxiliary power unit as needed see Processor Module Placed in slot 00 of the basic carrier the processor module controls system features and programming via the processor and memory boards and the feature module The processor module comes in small and large versions The small processor module supports up to 24 CO or tie lines trunks and 56 stations The large processor module supports up to 80 CO or tie lines trunks and 144 stations 1 6 Control Unit System Description The main board contains
360. onductor modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter b Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2 conductor small modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter and plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the modular jack of the KS22911 L2 or 329A power supply A CAUTION Plugging the D6AP cord into the 8 conductor large modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter can cause electrical damage to the control unit and the telephone 3 110 Telephones and Consoles Installation C d Insert the plug end of the 400B or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack Plug the power supply into a 117 VAC outlet Note The combined total length of the D6AP and D8W cords can be no more than 50 feet 9 Label the DSS designation cards a Note Pull the tab at the top of the large plastic cover and rotate the cover toward you Remove the cover and the large designation card Write or type the button assignments on the card For the DSS1 use the side of the large card that is labeled 00 through 49 For the DSS2 use the side labeled 50 through 99 Note The button assignments on the designation card should be by extension number not by logical ID port number Replace the card and the plastic cover Be sure the coated side of the cover is facing up Repeat these steps to remove the small plastic cover and to label the small designation card If the MLX telephone to which the DSS is attached is unplugged from the CU and then ag
361. one jack an MFM port on an MLX telephone or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone Modems are used for converting digital signals to analog or analog signals to digital so that digital equipment can transmit data over telephone lines When connected through an MFM data calls made from the modem are independent of the associated MLX telephone Data calls can be dialed from either the data terminal keyboard or an associated single line telephone B 16 Adjuncts Adjuncts H lt lt Music on Hold Magic on Hold Connected to an LS CO line trunk port programmed for Music on Hold MOH see Appendix A The system supports one MOH connection either Magic on Hold or a customer owned music source The external music coupler PEC 61398 uses an 8 ohm music source and two attenuation controls for setting the MOH music level Notes m Since most equipment works with an LS port programming the port for LS is recommended m PagePac 20 equipment can be used with a loudspeaker system to provide music MOH and paging without a music coupler m f you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require that you obtain such a license from AT amp
362. ones should be used for PFT telephones If the telephones are to be connected to GS lines trunks a GS button KS 23566L1 PEC 31021 must be added to each PFT station If rotary lines trunks are used PFT telephones must be rotary telephones Table 1 6 Single Line Telephones Modal Description 2500MMGB Basic desk telephone 2554MMGJ Basic wall telephone 2500YMGK Basic desk telephone with message waiting light and Recall button Recall button is used instead of the switchhook for features that require a switchhook flash such as Transfer and Hold 2500SM Basic desk telephone used with 4A speakerphone 2514BMW Basic desk telephone with built in headset jack 2526BMG Outdoor telephone used with weatherproof enclosure 7101A Basic desk telephone with message waiting light and Recall and Disconnect buttons No adjuncts are supported Vintage telephone no longer available for sale or lease 1 30 Telephones and Consoles System Description Table 1 6 Continued 7102A Basic desk telephone with message waiting light and Recall button No adjuncts are supported Can be used for PFT stations CS6402U01 A Basic desk telephone Feature Phone Model 420 Has built in speakerphone memory and redial 2500MMGJ Basic desk telephone 2500 MMGK Basic desk telephone with the following limitation Timed Recall button action similar to a switchhook flash will invoke the Hold and Transfer feature Basic telephones with the
363. oning The line trunk is periodically tested to put it back in service Maintenance Busy When a line trunk cannot be seized for an incoming or outgoing call the line trunk is automatically put into a maintenance busy state When a line trunk is in a maintenance busy state no outgoing calls can be placed on it However the line trunk still receives incoming calls Note Maintenance busy does not apply to DID trunks because DID trunks cannot be used to make outgoing calls Maintenance 5 39 Maintenance and Troubleshooting lt i While the line trunk is in a maintenance busy state the software periodically runs tests to try to seize the line trunk If the seizure is unsuccessful the line trunk stays in a maintenance busy state If the seizure is successful the line trunk is placed back in service lf a test is running when an incoming call is received on the line trunk the test is dropped and the call is processed Note No more than 50 percent of tines trunks in a pool can be maintenance busy at one time The only exceptions are m USer imposed maintenance busy for example module replacement m module maintenance busy for example a loss of service alarm in the 100D module m no external release at the far end of the line A permanent error is entered when more than 50 percent of the lines trunks in a pool are maintenance busy When the maintenance busy level falls below 50 percent the permanent error is automa
364. only 517B15 Supports only tie trunk emulation 1 22 Control Unit System Description Table 1 3 Continued Apparatus Type Code Comments 400 517A12 No lightning protection 146A surge protector required 517B12 Fully compatible 400EM 517A14 Fully compatible No lightning protection 146A surge protector required Fully compatible Fully compatible No lightning protection 146A surge protector required Fully compatible Reusable MERLIN II Hardware Table 1 4 shows the MERLIN II hardware components that can be used in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Limitations are noted in the Comments column Control Unit 1 23 System Description Table 1 4 Reusable MERLIN II Hardware Apparatus Type Code or PEC Comments Power supply module Basic carrier 1 24 Control Unit No surge protection 147A protector recommended For Canadian use no auxiliary power jack Fully compatible Compatible but must order system cover separately part 16A required spring clips for the system cover are provided with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System upgrade package For Canadian use system cover and spring clips needed the clips are provided with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System upgrade package Fully compatible System Description Table 1 4 Continued Apparatus Type Code or PEC Comments Expansion carrier 403B Compatible but must order system cover separately par
365. onnection to the 100D module DC power options 572 Printer options 630B Phonemount 3 112 7500B Data Module see 7500B Data Module 800 DID module 1 13 1 16 1 20 800 GS LS module 1 13 si 800 module 800 service In WATS A AC outlet tests Accessories Account Code entry Accunet switched digital service 11 55 14 76 Adapters unusable Add digits Adjuncts replacement not supported Allowed Lists 4 186 Assignment to telephones 4 187 Index IN 1 Index Alternate mark inversion AMI multiline telephones requiring simultaneous voice and data feature 4 107 requiring Voice Announce to Busy feature 4 105 with BIS and or HFAI capability Answer supervision time 4 59 Answering machine Applications 6 8 6 37 Approved grounds Artificial transmit line option AT amp T Master Controller 6 25 6 25 AT amp T Switched Network ASN AUDIX Voice Power IS II AVP 1 20 6 22 Automated Attendant AA 4 116 Automatic Callback Interval 4 178 Automatic extended call completion 4 143 Automatic Hold 4 134 Automatic Line Build Out ALBO 30 Automatic Maintenance Bus 14 Automatic number identification ANI 1 56 Automatic release 4 134 Automatic ringdown 1 16 Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 202 1 7 digit dialing requirements 4 202 ARS tables 4 202 Dial 0 tables 4 212 Digit absorption 4 208 Facility restriction level 4
366. ons C O A VMS requires a certain number of touch tone receivers TTRs depending on the number of VMS ports see Table 6 1 TTRs are supplied by the following modules 008 OPT 012 400 and 400 GS LS TTR However the VMS applications are not supported on the 008 OPT module Table 6 1 TTRs Required by VMS No of 400 or No of No of No of 012 400 GS LS TTR VMS Ports TTRs Required Modules Call Accounting System The AT amp T Call Accounting System CAS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is ideal for medium and large sized companies that want to manage telephone usage and control costs by tracking calls placed from and received by the system 6 10 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications E ee Note CAS is also available as part of the UNIX based Integrated Solution II IS Il software application CAS runs on an approved AT amp T MS DOS based PC Two versions of this product are offered CAS Hospitality CAS H for hotels and health care facilities and CAS Plus Business CAS Plus for other types of businesses The CAS Plus and CAS H applications allow companies to calculate the cost of calls by using the rates charged by AT amp T and other carriers in one of 10 major metropolitan areas Careful selection of the area that most closely matches the company s location and needs assures accurate costing Rate information can be customized for a telephone exchange at an additional charge
367. ons Exit FS menu 7 To specify that individual Extensions F6 telephones are allowed to More PgUp forward calls received on personal line buttons to an Remote Frwd F8 outside number display Remote Call Forward screen 8 Identify line trunk on Dial line trunk Type line trunk which to allow telephone no 801 880 no 801 880 to forward calls and save slot and slot and entry port or port or logical ID logical ID Enter F10 Optional Telephone Features 4 129 Programming Procedures a S Step 9 Identify telephone allowed Dial extension Type extension to forward calls to outside numbers on line trunk on line 1 maximum 1 per line trunk To restrict telephone from forwarding calls to outside numbers on line trunk shown on line 1 m To restrict telephones from forwarding calls to outside numbers on another line trunk To allow telephone to forward calls to outside numbers on line trunk and assign telephones to another line trunk m f next line trunk number is sequential E If next line trunk number is not sequential Continued Console PC slot and slot and port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Delete F8 Exit F5 Remote Frwd F8 Repeat steps 8 10 Next Repeat step 9 Enter Exit Remote Frwd Repeat steps 8 10 4 130 Optional Telephone Features Repeat steps 8 10 F9 Repeat step 9 F10 F5 F8
368. ons and posted messages and names and telephone numbers included in MLX 20L user s Personal Directory Sample Report LABEL INFORMATION EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE 10 Personal Directory Name Number Display TRAVEL AGENCY 599 1212 YES HOME 555 1611 NO EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE 15 Personal Directory Not Used shown if all entries in directory are empty Information is included for all MLX 20L telephones connected to the system MSG POSTED MESSAGE DO NOT DISTURB 2 OUT TO LUNCH 3 AT HOME 20 CUSTOM MSG20 System Programming Reports I 5 System Programming Reports E Table l 4 Trunk Information Report Name Trunk Information Print Menu Choice Trunk Info Description Options e g type signal etc assigned to the lines DS1 facilities and other outside lines or trunks Sample Report TIE TRUNK INFORMATION TRUNK 820 Slot Port 3 2 TIE PBX Direction 2 Way E amp M Signal Type 1S Dialtone Local Intype Immed InMode Rotary AnsSuypvr 300 ms OutType Immed Outmode Rotary Disconnect 200 ms DID TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS PP Blik DiscTime Type ExpDig ee AddDig Signal InvDest 805 5 1 1 500ms_ Wink 3 Rotary BkupExt 806 5 2 1 500ms_ Wink 3 D Rotary BkupExt Information is included for all DID trunk jacks in the control unit GS LS TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS PP Type OutMode RelDisc ChannelUnit 814 3 5 Ground TouchTone No _ ForeignExchange Information is included for all LS GS line trunk jacks in the c
369. onsole If reports are being sent to a PC running SPM To print a hard copy of the report To print reports to a hard disk m if print file does not exist O save to default file name a TO save to file name of your choice Continued PC Go to step 5 Type list number n F10 Go to step 6 Highlight LPT1 Enter Highlight MAKE NEW FILE Enter Enter Type file name Enter Backup Restore and Print 4 233 Programming Procedures Step Console 5 Continued m f print file exists To print reports to a floppy disk m lf print file does not exist O save to default file name a To save to file name of your choice m f print file exists 6 When printing is complete Print menu is displayed To Return to System Exit Programming Menu 4 234 Backup Restore and Print PC Highlight file name Enter Highlight GOTO FLOPPY Enter Highlight MAKE NEW FILE Enter Type file name Enter Highlight file name Enter F5 Programming Procedures ee ____________ Step Console PC 4 If you did not select Exit F5 Allowed or Disallowed List instep 3 If you selected Allowed or Dial list Type List Disallowed List in step 3 number n number n identify the list you want to Enter F10 print Exit F5 5 If reports are being sent to Gotostep6 Gotostep6 SMDR printer or you are programming with a system programming console If reports are being sent to
370. onsole FM1 n a 105299754 D 181727 includes one faceplate Display console FM2 amp R3 n a 105486252 D 182041 includes one faceplate Single line Telephones Miscellaneous Add Ons Ground Start Button KS23566L1 31021 405792839 Key KS23566L1 C 14 Product Ordering Information Product Ordering Information Component Miscellaneous Parts Interconnect Wiring Kit 110AB1 100JP 12 110A1 trough D Rings D8W cords Parts list SYSTIMAX MERLIN Wiring Kit 110A1 trough 5 110AB1 100JP12 2 modular block 110AB1 punch down block 1 D Rings 6 110P8A5B patch cords 12 4 pair 5 ft patch cords D8W cords 24 14 ft Template Instruction sheet Parts list EC n a n a n a n a n a n a Product Ordering Information C 15 Comcode 104409396 104407960 842139248 103786802 n a 106393671 104407960 104409960 103823845 842139248 846619989 103786802 846613933 846613941 846623924 M App Code Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet Use the instructions on the following worksheet to calculate unit load totals for each carrier Make a copy of the work sheet for each carrier Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 1 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet UNIT LOAD WORK SHEET 1 Number of modules in carrier excluding power supply module and processor module i m f fewer than 5 auxiliary power is not required m f 5 or 6 continue to step 2 2 Key or
371. ontrol unit GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS PP RemAccess PoolTIPrfx HidDsc Prncipal QCC Prty Ag Oper 801 3 1 No Remote 770 No Long 25 Information is included for all line trunk jacks in the control unit j I 6 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports Table l 5 DS1 Information Report Name DS1 Information Print Menu Choice T1 Info Description Options e g line signal etc assigned to T1 trunks or lines Sample Report DS1 SLOT ATTRIBUTES Slot Type Format Supp Signal LineComp ClksyncSrc Active 3 T1 D4 B8ZS Rob Bit 3 Prim Loop Yes System Programming Reports I 7 System Programming Reports Table l 6 PRI Information Report Name PRI Information Print Menu Choice PRI Info Description PRI trunks lines assigned to B channel groups Note B channel group numbers are from 1 69 and each may have up to 23 channel IDs Empty B channel groups are not printed Sample Report PRI INFORMATION BchniGrp 1 Slot 2 TestTelNum 5055551611 NtwkSvc MegacomWATS Channel ID 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 111213 14151617 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line PhoneNumber NumberToSend 807 5055551122 5055551122 I 8 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports E rt tt Table I 7 Remote Access Report Name Remote Access Print Menu Choice RmoteAccess Description Remote Access dial code class of restriction barrier code information Sample Report REMOTE ACCESS DISA
372. ontrolled by a wall switch Data Adapters 3 61 Installation BE ll Stand Alone Asynchronous DTE Configuration Follow the steps below to configure the ISDN 7500B Data Module to work with a modem in a modem pool 1 Remove the 7500B from the box 2 Open the door panel on the 7500B a Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel b Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull upon that side of the door c Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking your pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label d Lift off the door and set it aside 3 Looking straight down at the inside of the 7500B locate the large silver arrow pointing toward the back This arrow points to the DCE DTE flip board which is perpendicular to the plane of the arrow 4 Look at the DCE DTE flip board from the front of the 7500B see Either DTE or DCE will be in the left hand corner of the board 5 Adjust the flip board as needed a f DTE is in the left hand corner of the board the 7500B is already configured for DTE go to step 6 If DCE is in the left hand corner of the board Grasp the flip board firmly with both hands Pull up gently until the board is completely free Turn the board around 180 degrees DTE is in the left hand corner O Oo w d Replace the board in its slot 3 62 Data Adapters Installation p S 32St i lt i zit l 6 Close the door panel by
373. op and the LEDs for that button should go off 3 Press the same line button repeatedly to toggle the green and red LEDs on and off 4 To test a fixed feature button with one LED press the button The Feature and HFAI LEDs should go off The first press of the Speaker button should turn off the Mute LED The second press of the Speaker button should turn off the Speaker LED 3 128 System Acceptance Test Installation Note If the Mute button has been pressed before the Speaker button the Mute LED cannot be turned off it will wink 5 Press the fixed feature buttons repeatedly to toggle the LEDs on and off 6 To test the red Message light press either a fixed feature button without an LED such as Transfer or Drop or any dialpad button The Message LED should go off 7 Press the fixed feature or dialpad button repeatedly to toggle the Message LED on and off 8 Verify that all features are working properly 9 If any features are not working properly verify the translations through system programming Test the DSS At each Direct Station Selector DSS check that all lights are operational Using the DSS call a telephone in the system Test that the page buttons on the DSS work properly Test the Night Service Follow these steps to test the Night Service feature on the system operator console 1 At the system operator console press the Night Service button If the Night Service with Outward Restrictio
374. op or wall mount Analog Multiline Telephones In addition to the MLX telephones the analog multiline telephones in Table 1 5 can be connected to the system Table 1 5 Analog Multiline Telephones 5 button 5 button telephone with membrane No adjuncts are supported with this telephone 10 button 10 button telephone with membrane 34 button 34 button basic telephone with membrane 34 button Deluxe 34 button telephone with membrane Deluxe Vintage telephone no longer available for sale or lease 1 28 Telephones and Consoles System Description Table 1 5 D nued Description 10 button 10 button hands free answer telephone No HFAI adjuncts are supported 34 button 34 button telephone with built in speakerphone BIS 34 button 34 button telephone with 16 character display BIS DIS and built in speakerphone BIS 10 10 button telephone with built in speakerphone BIS 22 22 button telephone with built in speakerphone BIS 22D 22 button telephone with 16 character display and built in speakerphone BIS 34 34 button telephone with built in speakerphone BIS 34D 34 button telephone with 16 character display and built in speakerphone MLC 5 Cordless 5 button telephone Cordless Vintage telephone no longer available for sale or lease Telephones and Consoles 1 29 System Description Single Line Telephones The system supports the single line analog telephones listed in Table 1 6 Note 2500MM or 500MM teleph
375. or ISDN service Some of the benefits of ISDN PRI service are m Speed Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same B channels used for voice calls if the service allows Modems and dedicated conditioned lines trunks are not needed DS1 Capabilities 1 55 DEN Descri puo m AT amp T s INFO2 automatic number identification ANI service Customers who subscribe to this service can identify an incoming call on an ISDN PRI line trunk by either telephone number or billing number Note The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local serving caller s jurisdiction availability or CO equipment Dynamic B channel assignment An individual B channel can be removed from service without blocking calls to or from any other B channels Improved toll restriction The ways that toll restriction can be bypassed are limited on ISDN PRI lines trunks Reliable indication of far end disconnect Improved SMDR reports Call timing for SMDR reports is improved since lengths of times recorded are closer to the actual billed duration Framing Format To identify the DSO channels the DS1 signal is segmented into blocks of 193 bits called frames A frame consists of 24 eight bit words one for each channel plus a framing bit at the beginning of each frame 24 words x 8 bits 192 bits Thus a framing bit appears in every 193rd bit position of the 1 544 Mbps DS1 signal Frames repeat a
376. or Unit and the Office Repeater Set the switches before placing the Signal Monitor Unit SMU and the Office Repeater OR in the CSU chassis The default settings accommodate most installations However some options depend upon local line conditions for example availability of line power and the type of service requested by the customer Also proper settings for some options must be obtained from AT amp T its authorized representative or the local telephone company The local telephone company representative must be informed of the options selected Signal Monitor Unit Switch Settings There are four option switches in the SMU see Figure 25 These switches govern the operation of the following options mw ONES causes the unit to transmit an ALL ONES keep alive signal to the CO when the customer signal drops below the minimum average ones density 3 38 Channel Service Unit Installation ESS electronic switching system causes the CSU to loop back its receive line to its transmit line instead of generating ALL ONES when the customer signal fails The loopback framing pattern prevents false alarms at an ESS or a data acquisition control system DACS mu ZEROES selects either 16 or 50 consecutive zeroes to be the criteria for lighting the Zeroes LED m ACTIVE FAULT LOCATE causes the remote loopback path to preserve bipolar violations to allow single ended fault locating when active fault filters are use
377. or alarm status If the eine is set to D4 f raming the polling option at this switch position must be off up Table 3 9 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network and Equipment are D4 Framed down up a fall T e ferfe e 3 28 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 10 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network is ESF Framed and Equipment is D4 Framed sun UTEP Te fn fa fom we om Te e e fo Lo fom fe w a fe When this switch position is set to down the near end CSU polls the far end CSU for alarm status If the network is set to D4 framing the polling option at this switch position must be off up Table 3 11 Switch Settings in Hybrid PBX Mode Network is D4 Framed and Equipment is ESF Framed owe TET ee ow fw oe om fer fw Lo Set the Power Option Switch At the power option switch accessed through the top panel of the ESF T1 CSU select the appropriate power source m span power SP m local power dry loop DL m local power wet loop WL Channel Service Unit 3 29 Installation A CAUTION Connecting an ESF T1 CSU provisioned for local power wet loop to digital microwave digits multiplexers or fiber optics can damage the equipment Connecting an ESF T1 CSU provisioned for local power wet loop with span line power present can damage the CSU Therefore the local power wet loop option can be used only in private networks with user owned facilities Local p
378. or position 5 Assign or delete more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 operator positions and 4 and 4 6 When all entries are StoreAll F3 complete The system sets and automatically assigns factory settings for operator positions 4 26 System Operator Positions Programming Procedures m eee Lines and Trunks Type of Trunk on 400 GS LS 408 GWLS or 800 GWLS Module Step Console PC 1 Display Loop Start LinesTrunks F4 Ground Start DS1 screen LS 7GS 7Ds1 F1 2 Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot 1 17 in control unit that number nnnn number nn contains 400 408 or 800 BREESE F10 GS LS module and save entry 3 Specify type of trunks to Select option Press function be connected to module for type of key for type of trunks trunks Note Ground start can be selected only when the shunt is removed the control unit is not modified for key only operation Lines and Trunks 4 27 Programming Procedures ak rrr Step Console PC 4 If All Ground or All Loop Go to step 6 Go to step 6 was selected m If Ground Start or Dial port Dial port Loop Start was number n number n selected identify port number on 400 408 ports 1 4 or 800 ports 1 8 module that has ground start or loop start trunks connected If you are programming more than one sequentially numbered port with the same type enter lowest port number 5 Save entry and either program more ports or return to Lines and Trunks menu
379. ore Group Page Dial paging group exten sion number nnnn Enter 4 148 Optional Group Assigned Features PC F10 F5 F9 Repeat steps 2 5 PgDn F5 F5 PC F6 PgUp F2 Type paging group exten sion number nnnn F10 Programming Procedures Step 3 If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To assign telephones to paging group m To remove telephones from paging group 4 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM identify telephone to program 5 To remove telephone from paging group m To remove more tele phones from paging group on line 1 m To remove telephones from another paging group Continued Console PC Go to step 4 Go to step 4 Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 Press DSS button to turn red LED off Go to step 6 Dial extension Type extension x slot and slot and port or port or logical ID logical ID Delete F8 Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 Exit F5 Group Page F2 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 149 Programming Procedures a Step Console PC 5 Continued To assign telephone to Enter F10 paging group and assign Repeat step4 Repeat step 4 more telephones to paging group shown on line 1 To assign telephone to paging group and assign telephones to anoth
380. otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check T1 facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT PRI SVC STATE INCONSIST PRI D CHNL INOPER ATIVE PRI B CHNL NOT RELEASED PRI B CH GROUP INCONSIST Timeout of B channel service audit Inconsistent B channel service state D channel inoperative Timeout of call release message Inconsistent B channel trunk group Check PRI facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check PRI facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check PRI facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check PRI facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Check PRI facility and report to service provider otherwise no action is needed If problem persists contact the NTSC Troubleshooting 5 51 Maintenan
381. ots on the outlet see 6 Use diagonal pliers to clip off the ends of the conductors 10 11 Press the clips back on over the wires see Figure 52 Strip off the protective paper from the adhesive strips and press them onto the back of the outlet Press the outlet onto the wall As further security also screw the outlet to the wall Screw the parts of the outlet together System Wiring 3 95 Installation Label the System Wiring If done correctly labeling can provide valuable information about the location of wire or cable within the building and save hours of frustrating work There are five types of labels used for identification m Cable labels Cable labels are white adhesive backed tabs that are stuck to the cables to identify the source and the destination of the cables before they are pulled to and terminated in satellite closets and equipment rooms The labels come in a variety of shapes and sizes to accommodate different sizes of cable Use a pen or a felt tip marker to write on the surface m Field labels Field labels are adhesive backed tabs that are applied to smooth surfaces in the equipment room and satellite closets They identify components Use a pen or a felt tip marker to write on them m Insert labels Insert labels are cardboard like strips that slip inside the clear plastic designation strips located between the rows of a termination or field terminated wiring block They are color coded to ide
382. ou use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require you to obtain such a license from AT amp T or your authorized dealer System Features 4 175 Programming Procedures Type of Transfer Step Console PC 1 Display Transfer screen and select Transfer Type CrEons aes Transfer F1 Type F4 2 Specify type of transfer m lo specify that Voice F1 Intercom or System Announce Access Voice button is automatically selected m To specify that Ring F2 Intercom or System Access Ring button is automatically selected 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Camp On Return Time Step Console PC 1 Display Camp On Return Options F7 Time screen CampOn F2 4 176 System Features Programming Procedures eee Step Console PC 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of seconds and specify seconds nnn seconds nnn number of seconds 30 300 in increments of 10 before camped on call returns to operator 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Call Park Return Time Step Console PC 1 Display Call Park Return Options F7 Time screen CallParkRtn F3 2 Erase currently D
383. ove telephones to receive fax message waiting indication display Message Waiting screen and identify fax machine sending message waiting indication If you are programming more than one fax machine enter lowest extension number 4 112 Auxiliary Equipment Console Enter Delete Repeat steps 3 and 4 Inspect Exit Msg Waiting Dial extension Slot and port or logical ID or press DSS button for extension no Enter PC F10 F8 Repeat steps 3 and 4 PgDn F5 F2 Type extension slot and port or logical ID F10 Programming Procedures C lt 737 TSCS Step Console PC 8 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 9 Go to step 9 to system programming console or if programming with SPM Ifa DSS is attached m To specify that Press DSS telephone receives button for each message waiting telephone to indication turn red LED on Go to step 11 m To remove message Press DSS waiting indication from button for each telephone telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 11 9 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension receive message Slot and Slot and waiting indication port or port or logical ID logical ID Auxiliary Equipment 4 113 Programming Procedures i Step Console PC 10 To remove message Delete F8 waiting
384. over 5 Install the high speed synchronous enhancement board see a Holding the enhancement board with the EIA 232D connector pointed toward the back of the 7500B and with the component side down position the board over the open area of the 7500B b Attach the pigtail connector to the pin between the power connector and the screw for the EIA 232D connector c Position the board so that its cutouts correspond to the notches in the plastic housing d Gently push on the board until it is firmly in place and the edges of the board rest on the notches in the housing 6 Close the door panel by hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place 7 Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE 8 Plug the power supply cord for the 7500B into the connector labeled POWER 9 Connect a V 35 adapter cable packaged with the enhancement board to PORT 2 10 Connect a V 35 cable between the adapter and the V 35 data terminal 11 Plug the power cord into the AC outlet 3 66 Data Adapters Installation 12 Plug the D8W cord into the telephone wall jack Note Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter If you need it see Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation below Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation Connect a terminating resistor adapter to the D8W cord going to the wall jack if there is no MLX telephone co
385. ower is required for total unit operation no matter which method of power is selected Note Select local power dry loop in almost all cases If span line power is provided and the telephone company agrees you can option the CSU for SP However most telephone companies do not provide span line power for new installations Set the Artificial Transmit Line Option Depending on the distance from the CSU to the first line repeater set the Line Build Out LBO switch to the proper option see Table 3 12 The LBO switch is accessed through the top panel of the CSU Notes m The required setting for the LBO switch is usually specified by the telephone company m The receive path contains a fixed 7 5 dB artificial line and an automatic line build out ALBO circuit which automatically compensate for signal levels in the range of 0 to 27 7 dB 3 30 Channel Service Unit Installation Table 3 12 Artificial Transmit Line Options Position i Distance O 1000 ft 1000 2000 ft 15 0 dB 2000 3000 ft Connect the CSU to the 100D Module and the DS1 Network Follow these steps to connect the ESF T1 CSU to the 100D module and the DS1 network see Figure 23 1 Connect the D8W cord from the 100D module see Table to the rear panel of the CSU in one of the following ways m directly to the wire wrap connector see Table 3 14 m with a special cable adapter to the 15 pin DTE female connector see Table 3 15 2
386. p coverage Optional Group Assigned Features 4 165 Programming Procedures SS lt oOo Step Console PC 5 To exit without changing Goto step 6 Go to step 6 currently programmed number of calls To change currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of calls before overflow calls nn calls nn erase current number Enter F10 enter new number 1 99 and save entry 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Group Calling Message Waiting Receiver Step Console PC 1 Display Group Calling Extensions F6 menu and select Message More PgUp Waiting Receiver Group Calling F4 Message F4 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling program and save entry group exten group exten sion no nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 4 166 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures A calling group To assign telephone as message waiting receiver and assign telephones as message waiting receiver for another calling group Repeat steps 2 4 Step Console PC 3 Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension assign as a message slot and slot and waiting receiver for calling port logical port or group ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no To remove telephone as Delete F8 message waiting receiver m To remove telephones Exit F5 as message waiting F4 receiver from another Message Repeat steps m f ne
387. particular application and the two systems being connected including whether or not the tie trunk signals pass through CO lines or over customer owned cable Peed ci how to determine tie trunk compatibility between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and other systems Signal Processing 1 51 System Description Table 1 10 Tie Trunk Compatibility Preferred Signaling Format Installation Situation From MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Location MERLIN LEGEND Same site or inter or building MERLIN II System 25 or System 75 System 85 Same site or inter building Sane site or inter building Same site Dimen sion PBX Dimen sion PBX Inter building Same site Inter building Network Interface 1 52 Signal Processing MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Protected or Unpro ect tected Unpro tected Unpro tected Protected Unpro tected Signaling Mode and Type Simplex type 5 Simplex type 5 Simplex type 5 E amp M type 1 com patible E amp M type 1 com patible E amp M type 1 com patible E amp M type 1 com patible E amp M type 1 standard Signaling Mode and Type Simplex type 5 Simplex type 5 Simplex type 5 E amp M type 1 standard Unpro tected E amp M Protected type 1 standard E amp M type 1 standard Unpro tected E amp M type 1 standard
388. phone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC m Automatic Dialers WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS a Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call a Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Customer Support Information xvii Customer Support Information Ts DOC Notification and Repair Information NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications DOC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The DOC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service In some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repair
389. plastic cover by inserting one end into the slot and bending the cover to snap the other end into place Notes m If you are mounting an MLX 10 or MLX 10D wall telephone go to step 7 m f you are assembling a desk telephone go to step 8 7 Mount an MLX 10 or MLX 10D wall telephone a Turn over the telephone and remove the jack guard from the TEL OTHER jack area Set the telephone aside Unpack the 630B Phonemount and remove the modular jack from the backplate Route the cord DIW or D8W through the hole in the backplate and have it exit at the top of the backplate leaving 10 inches of cord to connect the telephone see Attach the backplate to the wall by using the instructions provided with the 630B Phonemount Insert the two short screws provided with the Phonemount into the mounting plate see Be sure to thread the upper screw through the jack guard Plug the free end of the cord into the jack labeled LINE on the back of the telephone Route the cord through the cord channel above the jack see Position the telephone on the mounting plate mounting studs and then slide the telephone down to lock it in place To remove the telephone slide it up and off see 3 114 Telephones and Consoles Installation 8 Label the button assignment card a Pull the tab at the top of the plastic cover toward you b Type or write the button assignments on the card c Replace the card and the plastic cover Be sure
390. play Automatic Route Tables F8 Selection menu ARS F6 Select Subpattern to program Facility Restriction level for m To program Facility Sub A FRL F4 Restriction level for Subpattern A m To program Facility More PgUp level for Subpattern Sub B FRL Fi 3 Identify the table number Dial table Type table 1 18 and route number number number 1 6 to program and followed by followed by route number ttr F10 Automatic Route Selection 4 207 ade lI ng Procedures Step 4 Specify restriction level 0 6 and save entry m To save entry and enter FRL to another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1 alf next entry number is sequential alf next entry number is not sequential m To save entry when all entries are complete 5 Exit Digit Absorption Step 1 Display Automatic Route Selection menu Console Dial restriction level n Enter Next Repeat this step Enter Repeat steps 2 4 Enter Exit Exit Console Tables ARS 4 208 Automatic Route Selection PC Type restriction level n F10 F9 Repeat this step F10 Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 F5 PC F8 F6 Programming Procedures Ce lt lt lt Step Console PC 2 Select Subpattern to program Absorb Digits for m TO program Absorb Sub A F6 Digits for Subpattern Absorb m To program Absorb More Pgup Digits for Subpattern B Sub B F2 Absorb 3 Identify table number Dial table Type table 1 18 and route number number numb
391. play PRI screen and eee F4 select Phone Number PRI F6 PhoneNumber F1 2 Identify line trunk and Dial line trunk Type line trunk save entry no 801 880 no 801 880 or logical ID or logical ID Enter F10 3 Assign telephone number Dial telephone Type telephone to channel up to 12 number nnn number nnn digits any combination of nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn 0 and 9 PRI Facilities 4 71 Programming Procedures EEE Step Console PC 4 Save entry and either program more PRI channels or exit m To save entry and assign telephone number to another PRI channel If next line trunk Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 If next line trunk Enter F10 sar di PhoneNumber F1 seguenta Repeat Repeat steps 2 4 steps 2 4 m To save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are i complete Eue F5 Exit F5 B Channel Groups 1 Display B Channel mneereaned F4 Groups screen F6 B Channels ERI B ChannlGrp F2 B Channels F1 2 Identify B Channel group Dial group Type group 1 69 to program and number nn number nn save entry Enter F10 4 72 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures TE Step Console PC 3 Identify B Channel to Dial B Channel Type B Channel assign to group slot and port slot and port number number sspp sspp 4 To remove B Channel Delete F8 from group m To remove more Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 B Channels from Night Service group on line 1 m To remove B Chann
392. prematurely a CAS IS Il uses the call information provided by the system s built in SMDR feature to process calls a SPM IS Il reports can be printed out or can be written to a disk hard or floppy however if they are written to a disk they cannot be looked at write only file ws SPM IS Il reports should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour mw Only the CAS IS II and the SPM IS II applications can be connected to a system operating in Behind Switch mode Hardware Requirements m IS I uses an AT amp T Master Controller an 6386 SX WGS processor with UNIX System V 386 Release 3 2 2 including a Master Controller Il processor with 40 Mbyte 80 Mbyte or 200 Mbyte hard disk and a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive An 80 Mbyte or 200 Mbyte hard disk drive is required if IS Il includes either IVP AA or AVP video monitor monochrome or color a keyboard optional tape drive required for systems with a 200 Mbyte hard disk for saving UNIX files application program files administrative files and voice system files during backup m A355 AF adapter for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control unit if they are within 50 feet of each other and are on the same AC branch circuit Applications 6 25 Adapters Accessories and Applications lt m ADUs for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control
393. programming 4 6 System Programming Programming Procedures Ee EeE eEeEeEeE ns System Programming Screens The console display area shows three types of system programming screens m menu selection screen allows you to select from several options on the menu m informational screens provide information about what is currently programmed on the system You cannot make changes to these screens data entry screens allow you to enter specific information for programming the features in the system The actual system programming screens are shown in System Programming System Programming 4 7 Programming Procedures Programming Command Table 4 3 Commands Using Fixed Buttons Command Function Console PC To return to normal call handling Home Home mode or to SPM idle state To display the System Programming Menu main menu on the console or SPM main menu on the PC To display more menu items whena More PgUp gt is shown on line 7 To display the Inspect screen that Inspct PgDn lists all telephones or lines with a specific feature assigned To clear all information from a Drop Alt P screen or to enter a stop ina System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial programming sequence To enter a pause ina System Speed Hold Alt H Dial or Personal Speed Dial programming sequence 4 8 System Programming Programming Procedures Table 4 4 Commands Appearing on the Screen
394. protective cover from the PORT 2 slot see a Hold the cover the marked area for the PORT 2 slot in one hand and the rest of the rear panel in the other b Gently move the cover back and forth until the cover separates from the rear panel c Discard the cover 5 Install the multipurpose enhancement board see Figure 37 a Holding the enhancement board with the EIA 232D connector pointed toward the back of the 7500B and with the component side down position the board over the open area of the 7500B b Attach the pigtail connector to the pin between the power connector and the screw for the EIA 232D connector c Position the board so that its cutouts correspond to the notches in the plastic housing d Gently push on the board until it is firmly in place and the edges of the board rest on the notches in the housing 6 Close the door panel by hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place 7 Peel off the label indicating the EIA 232D interface from the enhancement board package and stick it to the rear panel under the PORT 2 connector 8 Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE 9 Plug the power supply cord for the 7500B into the connector labeled POWER 3 64 Data Adapters Installation 11 12 13 14 Plug the male end of the EIA 232D cable into PORT 1 Connect the other end of the EIA 232D cable to the data terminal or computer port If the automatic
395. ps to test the dial repeating tie trunks 1 Ata preset time have a person at the far end place a dial repeating call to your telephone by dialing the proper tie trunk number Your telephone rings and the green LED next to the tie trunk button flashes 2 Pick up the handset The red LED next to the tie trunk button goes on and the green LED becomes steady 3 Verify that you have good two way communication and hang up 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each tie trunk administered Test the Dial Access Codes Follow these steps to test the dial access codes 1 Verify the proper operation of each feature requiring a dial access code m Automatic Route Selection ARS m Group Calling m Group Page m Listed Directory Number the QCC queue m Park m Pools m Remote Access 2 lf any feature is not working properly check the system programming translations System Acceptance Test 3 125 Installation Test the System Features You can test these system features from an MLX telephone or an analog multiline telephone m Automatic Route Selection ARS m Coverage m Group Calling m Station Message Detail Recording SMDR m System Speed Dial Note You can also use a single line telephone to test all of these features except for Coverage ARS and SMDR Tests If ARS patterns have been translated you can test the routing by placing toll calls and checking the line trunk indicated on the SMDR printout Follow these
396. pters Accessories and Applications i i Accessories When adjuncts and adapters are connected to telephones the power requirements of the telephone and the communications system increase Adding a power accessory to an individual telephone or to the system accommodates these additional needs Power accessories can also be used for grounding and protecting special telephone connections To install power units or power protection equipment follow the instructions in the customer information booklet CIB included with the equipment Other accessories provide backup for power failures and alarms for system malfunctions Telephone Power Unit Connected between the telephone and the wall jack the KS22911 and 329A power units provide additional power to individual telephones that have adjuncts adapters and or Direct Station Selectors DSSs attached or to telephones far from the CU Adding local power to a few telephones can reduce the system load A KS22911 kit for MLX telephones comes complete with a D6AP cord the KS22911 L1 power supply unit and a 400B or 400B2 adapter For analog multitine telephones the KS22911 kit includes the KS22911 L1 power supply unit a D6AP cord and a Z400F adapter The 329A power unit PEC 31578 does not come in a kit so the D6AP cord and the 400B or 400B2 adapter must be ordered separately Note Telephone operation without adjuncts is guaranteed for a wiring run up to 1000 cable feet f
397. py F7 2 To copy line trunk options Single F1 to an individual line trunk To copy calling Block F2 restrictions to a sequentially numbered block of line trunks 3 Identify line trunk to copy Dial line trunk Type line trunk calling restrictions from no 801 880 no 801 880 and save entry Slot and Slot and port or port or If copying from more than logical ID logical ID one extension enter Enter F10 lowest extension number 4 40 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 If Single was selected Dial line trunk Type line trunk identify line trunk to copy no 801 880 no 801 880 options to slot and slot and port or port or or logical ID logical ID If Block was selected identify the first line trunk in block of line trunks to copy options to 5 If Single was selected m To save entry and Enter F10 copy options from Repeat steps Repeat steps same line trunk on 2 4 2 4 line 1 of screen to another individual line trunk m Tocopy options from another line trunk to an individual line trunk alf next line trunk Next F9 number is Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4 sequential alf next line trunk Enter F10 number is not Repeat steps Repeat steps sequential 2 4 2 4 If block was selected Enter F10 save entry and identify Dial line trunk Type line trunk last line trunk number in no 801 880 no 801 880 block of lines trunks and slot and
398. r 100D module If next slot number is sequential If next slot number is not sequential Next Repeat step 19 Enter Exit Repeat steps 18 20 F9 Repeat step 19 F10 F5 Repeat steps 18 20 m To save entry and Enter F10 return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 21 If no change to setting for Go to step 24 T305 Timer m To change T305 Timer setting display T305 Timer screen Go to step 24 T305 Timer F8 22 Erase current setting and Drop Alt P enter new setting 4 30 Dial number of Type number of seconds nn sec seconds nn PRI Facilities 4 89 Programming Procedures ee Step Console 23 Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI Settings menu m To save entry and change T305 Timer for another 100D module If next slot number is Next sequential Repeat step 22 If next slot number is Enter not sequential Fixit Repeat steps 21 23 m To save entry and Enter return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete 24 If no change to setting for Go to step 27 T308 Timer To change T308 Timer T308 Timer display T308 Timer screen 25 Erase current setting and Drop PC F9 Repeat step 22 F10 F5 Repeat steps 21 23 F10 Go to step 27 F9 Alt P enter new setting 4 12 Dial number of Type number of sec seconds nn 4 90 PRI Facilities seconds nn Programming Procedures BE ss es sk sks Step
399. r for further information m For the AT amp T 475 476 printer set the DIP dual in line package switches on the printer according to Table 3 27 See the user s guide supplied with the printer for further information 3 46 The Printer and the PC Installation _ S S amp sEF i Table 3 26 AT amp T 572 Printer Options No Function Menu Status 1 0 06 FONT 1 BUILT IN 07 RESOLUTION 01 144 11 BUFFER 02 N LINE 13 PW ON MODE 01 ON LINE 31 01 1 SKIP OF 32 CHAR SET G0 GL 02 USA The Printer and the PC 3 47 Installation e ee eee Table 3 26 Continued 0 35 CHAR SET G3 LINE DRAWING 81 OFF LINE STATE 0 ALL RECEIVE 1 9 2 8 This is the default status but the system cannot read the character sent by the printer 2 3 5 2 DATA BIT 0 4 5 3 48 The Printer and the PC Installation Table 3 27 AT amp T 475 476 Printer DIP Switch Settings DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 2 Open DIP 2 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Open DIP 5 Closed DIP 5 Open DIP 5 Open DIP 6 Closed DIP 6 Open DIP 6 Open DIP 7 Closed DIP 7 Closed DIP 7 Open DIP 8 Open DIP 8 Open DIP 8 Closed DIP 1 Open DIP 1 Closed DIP 1 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 2 Open DIP 2 Closed DIP 3 Closed DIP 3 Open DIP 3 Closed DIP 8 Closed Note Open off Closed on The Printer and
400. r line trunk and station modules t MLX 20L or MLX 28D telephone two per MLX module MERLIN II System Display Console or 34 or 22 button analog multiline telephone with display two per analog multiline module MLX 20L telephone two per MLX module Two per MLX module built into MERLIN II System Display Console 1 36 System Capacities System Description i a E Table 1 8 Continued Components Small Large Ports va achievable simultaneously a Total lines trunks plus stations a Voice and data stations a Voice Announce to Busy s Voice mail interface a Data via ISDN 7500B Data Module a Paging a Delay announcements System programming equipmentt SMLX 20L ee a RS 232 jack for connection of PC with SPM a Modem Telephones n ing Ine s Analog multiline s Without Voice Announce to Busy Without Voice Announce to Busy a MLX 20L a MLX with ISDN 7500B Data Module or MFM a Power failure transfers Two party conversations Traffic CCS hr station Voice mail systems Although system software supports up to 24 voice mail interface VMI ports all the VMI ports must be in the same calling group and the maximum number of stations in a calling group is 20 t Remote access overrides on site programming except during backup or restore Total includes the MLX 20L telephone used for system programming One per four GS LS line trunk jacks Assuming 20 percent internal traffic System Capacities 1 37
401. r problems 1 Visually inspect the pins on the carrier Bent or broken pins often cause carrier problems To do this you may have to remove one or more line trunk and station modules by using Busy Out Reset and Restore 2 If you find a problem with the carrier you must replace it but not the line trunk and station modules Carriers cannot be repaired in the field 3 Attach a tag that describes the problem to the faulty carrier Replacing the Power Supply Module Failure of the power supply shuts down everything connected to the carrier If the power supply fails check that the interlocking post in the power supply slot of the carrier has not broken off Without this post the power supply will not operate and the carrier must be replaced Follow these steps to replace the power supply module 1 If possible save the translations on a floppy disk by using the backup function Note If the power supply module on the basic carrier has failed the system cannot save the translations to a disk 2 Power down the system by turning off a the power supply module on the basic carrier b the power supply module s on the expansion carrier s c any auxiliary power unit if present 3 Unplug the system from the AC outlet 4 Remove the power supply module and insert a new one Maintenance 5 29 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 Restore power by turning on a any auxiliary unit if present b the power supply
402. r working and translation Check for faulty cable Replace the line trunk and station module as needed Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly Check for faulty cable Replace line trunk and station module as needed Turn the power off for at least 1 second and then back on Repeat system programming procedure If the problem persists replace the line trunk and station module Troubleshooting 5 55 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 5 2 Continued Error Screen Code Description Possible Cause Solution 8408 8409 840A 840B 5 56 Troubleshooting ROTARY RATE gt 12PPS ROTARY RATE lt 8PPS BAD DOWNLINK MESSAGE NO LOOP CURRENT m Unrecognized message from the processor module to the line trunk and station module m Unsteady power cycle Communication problems between the tine trunk and station module and the CO m No loop current Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly Check for faulty cable Replace line trunk and station module as needed Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly Check for faulty cable Replace line trunk and station module as needed Turn power off for at least 1 second and then back on Repeat system programming procedure If problem persists replace line trunk and station module Swap positions of similar line trunk and station modules If problem follows the mo
403. rd a second personal greeting in addition to the primary call answering greeting m Fax Transfer directs incoming fax calls to a designated fax machine m Class of Service allows the system manager to assign one of 16 predefine parameters to a subscriber These parameters define the size of the mailbox the type of coverage and the activation of the outcalling feature General Mailbox Options are two special mailboxes that have reserve extensions Callers using rotary telephones or needing assistance can be transferred to leave messages in a general mailbox Subscribers having problems with the system can report them to the trouble mailbox Considerations m IS Il uses UNIX System V Release 3 2 2 m S Il stores up to 12 hours of voice mail messages when IS II includes AVP and over 200 000 call accounting records when IS II includes CAS m Either IVP AA or AVP can be installed but not both m For IVP AA or AVP the VMI loop start ports should be programmed for reliable far end disconnect a If IS Il includes AVP when users receive voice mail messages the message LEDs on their telephones turn on if a mailbox has been assigned to each of those telephones 6 24 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications a i The system may need more touch tone receivers if m Single line telephone users do not get dial tone a AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls a Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage
404. rd into an outlet on the floor area Using diagonal pliers or wire strippers cut off the end of the telephone cord to expose the pairs Choose a single pair and untwist the wires Extending from the bottom of the tone device are two clips Attach one wire of the pair you have chosen to one of the clips and the other wire to the other clip Turn on the switch on the outside of the tone device You will hear a high pitched alternating signal Take the telephone handset and a 4 pair patch cord to the cross connect field between the CU and the station Go to the blue field on the cross connect field and starting at the top left corner push the patch cord onto the first connecting block Using the diagonal pliers or wire strippers cutoff the other end of the patch cord and expose the pairs Don t cut off too much of the cord because you ll need the length to test the top rows of the cross connect field The handset also has two clips with teeth that extend from its base Attach the clip of the handset to the exposed wires of the patch cord Set the switch on the side of the handset to MONITOR Listen in the handset for the tone device signal If you hear the signal you have found the correct wires Correctly label both the cross connect field and the outlet If you don t hear the signal remove the patch cord from the connecting block and push the patch cord down onto the connecting block to the right of the one just
405. red when connected to LS line Adjuncts B 9 Adjuncts Table B 1 Continued Equipment Type Message waiting indicator Music on Hold Speakerphone Specifications m For single line sets mconnects directly to telephone m f the modem supports touch tone dialing via the associated data terminal the key board can be used for dailing E f the modem does not support touch tone dailing an associated basic single line set can be used for dailing m Any FCC registered 8 ohm music source or recorded announcement device m Connect directly to telephone m For single line sets only AT amp T Products a Modem Model 4000 Modem Model 2224G Modem Model 4024 Modem Model 2298A Modem Model 2296 Magic on Hold 4A 1 203A PEC 31032 2212 MUK 1 2224 CEO 1 2224 CDO 1 2296 BAR 1 2296 BDM 1 3128 010 1 3120 02W 3131 008 If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you maybe required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers Artists and Producers ASCAP or Broadcast Music Incorporated BMI Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which does not require you to obtain such a license from AT amp T or an authorized representative B 10 Adjuncts Adjuncts LS or GS LS TR 0122 or 008 OPT Station Jack MLX ATL ATL station Station Station Jack Jack
406. rently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of rings and specify new rings n rings n number of rings 1 9 before delayed ring 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Group Calling Member Assignments Step Console PC 1 Display Group Calling eee F6 menu and select Members More PgUp Grp Calling F4 Members F9 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling program and save entry group exten group exten sion no nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 4 Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM Continued 4 154 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures a Step Console 3 Continued If a DSS is attached m To assign telephones Press DSS to calling group button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove telephone Press DSS from calling group button for each telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 4 If a DSS is not attached Dial extension to system programming slot and console or if programming port or with SPM identify logical ID telephone to program 5 To remove telephone from Delete calling group m To remove more Repeat step 4 telephones from calling group on line 1 m To remove telephones Exit from another calling Members PTOUR Repeat steps 2 5 Continued PC Type extension slot an
407. ress DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Identify pool dial out code Dial pool dial Type pool dial to allow or restrict out code nnn out code nnn telephone from using 4 To allow dial out code use Enter F10 To restrict dial out code Delete F8 use Optional Telephone Features 4 119 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 5 To allow or restrict Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 extension shown on line 1 and 4 and 4 from using another pml dial out code To assign or remove pool dial out restriction from another telephone a If next extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4 a f next extension Exit F5 number is not Dial Outcd F3 sequential Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 5 2 5 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 120 Optional Telephone Features Programming Procedures i Call Restrictions Step 1 Display Call Restriction screen 2 Identify telephone to program and save entry Console PC F6 Restriction F4 Extensions Dial extension Type extension slot and slot and port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Assign or remove restrictions m To remove restrictions m To restrict telephones from making outside calls local and toll m To restrict telephones from making toll calls Unrestricted Fl Outward F2 Restrict Toll F3 Restrict 4 Save choice
408. rogramming Procedures 4 11 Programming Procedures Set the Basic System Operating Conditions Restarting the System Cold Start Step Console PC 1 Display System Restart System F1 i Restart F1 2 Advise the system whether to continue restart process m To continue restart Yes F1 process System restarts System restarts and sessionis and session is terminated terminated automatically automatically m To cancel restart No F2 process TA F5 System Progamming Position Assignment Step Console PC 1 Display System System F1 Programming Port screen ysprog F2 Port 4 12 Set the Operating Conditions Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Erase current extension Drop Alt P and enter extension of Dial extension Type extension new system programming slot and slot and position port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Session is F5 terminated automatically Mode Step Console PC 1 Display Mode screen System F1 Mode F3 2 Specify operation m For Key Key F1 m For Hybrid PBX Hybrid PBX F2 m For Behind Switch BehndSwtch F3 3 Save selection Enter F10 System restarts System restarts and session is and session is terminated terminated Set the Operating Conditions 4 13 Programming Procedures Automatic Maintenance Busy Step Console 1 Display Auto Maintenance System Busy screen Mainten Busy 2 Determine malfun
409. rom the CU 6 4 Accessories Adapters Accessories and Applications Auxiliary Power Units When a power demand of over 54 unit loads is placed on one power supply module an Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 is generally needed and increases power by 27 unit loads To determine the number of unit loads for each power supply module on each carrier see Unit Loads in Chapter 2 and Appendix D Note Only one auxiliary power unit can be connected to the 391A power supply unit If additional 48 VDC power is needed connect some telephones to KS22911 or 329A telephone power units In Range Out of Building IROB Protector See IROB Protection in Chapter 3 Installation Power Failure Transfer A power failure transfer PFT telephone is a single line telephone connected to a PFT jack on a 400 400 GS LS TTR 800 800 GS LS 408 or 408 GS LS module see Figure 4 In the event of a power failure the system shuts off and the PFT telephone automatically turns onto be used for making and receiving calls Notes m The PFT jack does not operate unless a power outage occurs or the power supply units are turned off m A single line telephone connected to an MFM cannot be used as a PFT telephone Accessories 6 5 Adapters Accessories and Applications m f PFT telephones are to be connected to GS lines trunks a GS button see Figure 66 must be added to each PFT telephone If the button is used with modular 2500
410. rop Alt P programmed number of Dial numberof Type number of seconds and specify seconds nnn seconds nnn number of seconds 30 300 in increments of 10 before parked call returns to originator 3 Save entry and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 System Features 4 177 Programming Procedures Automatic Callback Interval Step 1 Display Automatic Callback Interval screen 2 Erase currently programmed number of rings and specify new number of rings 1 6 before system cancels Automatic Callback request 3 Save entry and exit Extension Status Step 1 Display Extension Status screen 2 Specify Extension Status mode m To specify extension status for Hotel mode m To specify extension status for Calling Group CMS 4 178 System Features Console PC Options F7 Callback F6 Drop Alt P Dial number of Type number of rings n rings n Enter F10 Exit F5 Console Text Options F7 Ext Status F7 Hotel F1 GrpCall CMS F2 Programming Procedures mm Step Console PC 3 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 SMDR Call Report Format Step Console PC 1 Display SMDR menu and Options F7 select Call Report Format SMDR F8 Format F1 2 Specify format for SMDR call report printing To specify that SMDR Basic SMDR FI call reports are printed in basic format m To specify that SMDR ISDN SMDR F2 call reports are printed in ISDN format 3 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 System
411. rs the call directly to the dialed extension The system can receive 1 to 4 digit extension numbers over the DID trunks The number of digits received on a specific DID trunk is always the same for that trunk however different DID trunks can receive different numbers of digits If the extension numbers used in the system are fewer than four digits but the CO sends four the system can be programmed to ignore the leading digit s For example if the DID number sent by the CO is 2157 the extension numbers the system can access are 57 157 or 2157 System programming determines the proper extension number to connect The system also can be programmed to match more digits than are received from the CO Additional leading digits are taken from the 4 digit trunk number as programmed For example if the system is setup to match three digits and the CO sends only two programming determines which DID trunk number prefix to add to complete the match and connect the call No routing of calls is made until the designated number of digits is received Incoming DID numbers that don t match a valid extension are either directed to a predesignated extension such as the system operator or the system sends back a reorder tone fast busy Options are assigned to blocks of DID trunks A maximum of two blocks of DID trunks is allowed Each block can be configured to match the system numbering plan For example the system could have both 3 and 4
412. runk Wiring A 8 Wiring Diagrams Wiring yun O4jU0D BuyjeuBbis z d L 10 ajqnedwoy d L J INGOW WS00P 490 q Bujyoauuod pOL 40 E01 fc oN yun 10 Uu09 Buyjeubls z d L d o paepueys edAL JTNGOW W300 Figure A 3 Back to Back Tie Trunk Wiring Wiring Diagrams A 9 100D MODULE 100D MODULE Figure A 4 Back to Back 100D Modules A 10 Wiring Diagrams ac Ss am m amp Sse gg 8 Control Unit Control Unit Wiring PAGE PAC 20 POWERM Figure A 5 Single Zone Paging with PagePac 20 Wiring Diagrams A 11 Wiring GENERIC AMPLIFIER PAGE INPUT J MUSIC IN 117 VAC se Ox 24V 117 VAC WHEELOCK POWER SUPPLY MODEL EPS 2401 WARNING The black wire form the LS trunk adapter power cable must be connected to the input of the Wheelock PS The grey on black wire must be connected to the input Figure A 6 Single Zone Paging with Customer Supplied Amplifier A 12 Wring Diagrams Wiring PAGE PAC 20 POWERM OUTPUTS Ge PAGE INPUT J1 MUSIC 24 VDC IN 117V Control Unit WHEELOCK POWER SUPPLY MODEL EPS 240 Access mode switch should be set to MANUAL Figure A 7 Single Zone Paging with Paging Access Module Wiring Diagrams A 13 Wiring PAGE PAC 20 POWERMATE MODEL EPS 2401 MAGIC ON HOLD Access mode switch should be set to MANUAL Figure A 8 Single Zone Paging with Background Music and MOH
413. runk and station module Swap the wiring between the jack field and the telephone to see if it is a wiring problem Fix the wiring problem 5 If the other telephones connected to the same line trunk and station module are not working properly the fault is probably in the line trunk and station module 6 Check the LEDs on the line trunk and station module 7 Check the error log for relevant messages 8 Replace the faulty line trunk and station module Analog Multiline Telephone Troubles Symptom Telephone LEDs and or ringing tones do not work properly Procedure 1 Move the T P lever on the left hand side to the T test position You should hear tone ringing All the red and green LEDs on the terminal should flash alternately 5 36 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting ee 2 If LEDs do not light check the CU and wiring by using a known good phone 3 Move the T P lever to its normal position Ringing tone should stop and the LEDs should be off 4 If any part of the test fails replace the telephone Symptom Time appears on the display but the incoming call information does not Procedure Move the T P lever on the side of the telephone to the center position Voice Transmission Troubles Symptom Telephone does not receive tones Procedure Check the CU and wiring with a known good telephone Single Line Telephone Problems Symptom Many single line telephones cannot dial correctly
414. runk numbers 4 110 Auxiliary Equipment Console AuxEquip Ldspkr Pg Dial line trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID Enter Delete Repeat steps 2 and 3 Inspct Exit Exit Exit Exit PC F9 F2 Type line trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID F10 F8 Repeat steps 2 and 3 PgDn F5 F5 F5 F5 Programming Procedures NT lt S_ Fax Step Console PC 1 Display Fax screen and AuxEquip F9 select Port Fax F3 Port F1 2 If a DSS is not attached Go to step 3 Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To specify that station Press DSS jack is used to connect button for each fax machine extension to turn red LED on Go to step 6 m To remove fax Press DSS machine assignment button each extension to turn red LED off Go to step 6 3 If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify station jack Dial extension Type extension where fax machine is slot and slot and connected port or port or logical ID logical ID Auxiliary Equipment 4 111 Programming Procedures ee Step 4 To specify that line jack is used to connect fax machine To remove fax machine assignment from line jack 5 To specify more fax ports maximum 16 To view fax machine extension numbers 6 Return to Fax menu 7 TO assign or rem
415. s 3 112 Telephones and Consoles Installation c Lower the stand and press the tab s at the top into the corresponding slot s on the telephone Note The diagram on the bottom of the user card tray also shows the steps to adjust the stand 2 Connect the line cords see a Plug one end of the D8W cord into the telephone jack labeled LINE on the underside of the telephone b Route the D8W cord through the cord channel on the back of the telephone c If the telephone is for desktop use turn the desk telephone face up and plug the D8W cord into the wall jack 3 Install the handset by inserting one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset and the other end into the jack on the side of the telephone 4 Label the extension identification card see a Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the side of the plastic cover while holding your finger on the opposite edge Use the paper clip to push and lift the cover b Type or write the assigned extension number on the card Notes m f you are mounting an MLX 10 or MLX 10D wall telephone go to step 5 m If you are assembling a desk telephone go to step 6 5 Prepare the handset holder for wall mounting see Figure 64 a Remove the handset holder by pushing it up and pulling it out b Rotate the handset holder 180 and replace it in its slot Telephones and Consoles 3 113 Installation 6 Replace the extension identification card and
416. s 2 and 3 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the tie trunk dial or type trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign remote dial tone or select Delete F8 to assign local dial tone 4 58 Tie Trunks Programming Procedures Step 4 Exit Answer Supervision Time Step 1 Display Tie Lines screen and select Answer Supervision 2 Identify tie trunk and save entry If you are programming more than one tie trunk enter the lowest trunk number 3 Specify answer super vision time 20 4800 ms in increments of 20 Console Exit Exit Exit Console LinesTrunks TIE Lines AnsSupvr Dial trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID Enter PC F5 F5 PC F4 F2 F9 Type trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID F10 Dial the number Type the of ms nnnn number of ms nnnn Tie Trunks 4 59 Programming Procedures E i Step Console PC 4 Save entry and either program another tie trunk or exit m To save entry and specify answer supervision for another tie trunk If next tie trunk number is sequential If next tie trunk number is not sequential m To save entry and exit when all entries are complete Next Repeat step 3 Enter AnsSupvr Repeat steps 2 4 Enter Exit Exit F9 Repeat step 3 F10 F9 Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 F5 Disconnect Time Step Console PC 1
417. s Tables PBX only 2 4 Planning Forms Environment trepar ation The CU requires the following environmental conditions Table 2 4 Environmental Requirements Operating 40 104 F 440 C Temperatures Optimum temperature 60 F Humidity 20 80 Airborne Do not expose the CU to moisture Contamination corrosive gases dust chemicals spray paint or similar material Ventilation m Allow at least 1 on the right and left sides of the CU and 12 above and below the CU to prevent overheating Do not place the CU near extreme heat furnaces heaters attics or direct sunlight Electrical Do not expose the CU to devices that Fields generate electrical currents that cause interference such as arc welders or motors Heat m Basic carrier Dissipation m Basic carrier with one expansion carrier m Basic carrier with two expansion carriers A WARNING Do not install the control unit outdoors 500 Btu hr 1000 Btu hr 1500 Btu hr Environment 2 5 Preparation Space and Location The customer must provide a backboard on which to mount the CU The backboard should be wire enough to accommodate additional carriers if system growth is anticipated Attach the backboard to the wall allowing enough room on either side of the CU for necessary wiring fields Backboard Requirements m Dimensions a without SYSTIMAX wiring small system W x 3H x 3 4 D large system 6 W x 3 H x 3 4 D a wit
418. s generated by the system when it detects serious errors Alarms can appear as an LED on an operator console and as a Status display on the maintenance terminal Maintenance can be done on site or from a remote location Note You must record any station jack change on the System Technician s Run Sheet see Maintenance 5 1 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Equipment To access the maintenance program on site you need an MLX 20L telephone or a PC with SPM software In addition you should have the following tools EIA breakout box digital voltmeter KS 20599 or equivalent 110 66 type punchdown _ tool Dracon TS21 or equivalent touch tone test telephone assorted flathead screwdrivers assorted Phillips head screwdrivers long nosed pliers regular pliers wrist grounding strap laptop PC with MS DOS 3 3 or higher and SPM software troubleshooting guide replacement parts recommended by the National Service Assistance Center NSAC Remote access to the maintenance program requires a PC with SPM software Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation 5 2 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting i MM eg ee l Maintenance Elements This section describes the important elements of the maintenance program Error Logs Errors occur because of hardware malfunctions recurring program logic inconsistencies PLIs or system restarts Whenever an error occurs it is entered into an error log Errors are c
419. s memory and the modem is now operating in the AT command protocol Table 3 29 Modem Option Setting for Digital to Analog Modem Pool Operation Bit Number L left R right U up D down 8 Enter command mode set the options and save the options into protected memory to prevent loss of settings in case of a power failure m Type AT and press Enter to enter the local mode m Type AT amp D2 and press Enter Option set drop call when DTR low m Type AT amp C1i and press Enter Option set data carrier detect follow call m Type ATSO 1 and press Enter Option set Auto Answer Data Adapters 3 73 Installation E ksFlhlt O OOOC m Type ATQO and press Enter Option set enable result codes factory setting m Type AT amp W and press Enter to write options to protected memory Analog to Digital Modem Pool Option Settings Data Module Option Settings Use the following procedure to prepare the ISDN 7500B Data Module for operation in an analog to digital modem pool 1 Use the instructions provided in the 7500B user manual to set the DCE DTE flip board to the DTE position 2 Use the front panel controls on the 7500B data module to set the options on the display see Table 3 30 See the ISDN 7500B Data Module user s manual for detailed information on using the front panel controls and the meaning for each option Table 3 30 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for Analog to Digi
420. s of equal amplitude bytes can be addressed and See also pulse code read or changed without modulation affecting other parts of the memory riser cable Cable that runs between floors in a multistory building and connects wire closets Glossary GL 19 Glossary robbed bit signaling RBS Signaling in which the least significant bit LSB of every sixth frame per channel is used for signaling in that channel ROM read only memory Computer memory that can be read but cannot be changed RS 232 A physical interface specified by the EIA Electronics Industries Association that transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of 50 feet S signaling The sending of control and status information between devices to set up maintain or take down a connection simplex signaling The transmission of signals in one direction only across a telecommunications channel GL 20 Glossary single line telephone An industry standard touch tone or rotary telephone that only handles one line trunk and is connected to the communications system via a jack on a basic telephone module SMDR printer A printer used for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR that is connected to the communications system via an RS 232 jack on the processor module Software Defined Network SDN An AT amp T private networking service created by specialized software within the public networ
421. s on the line trunk and station modules to further isolate the trouble 4 lf replacing the faulty equipment does not solve the problem use the screen menus to find the hardware vintage the software vintage and the ROM ID of the modules 5 Refer the problem to the NTSC Using the Maintenance Screens Using the maintenance screens involves selecting items on menus The menu selections are identical whether you are using an MLX 20L telephone or a PC The only difference is that the function keys on the computer keyboard simulate the display buttons on the telephone In the following procedures a representation of the menu screen is shown with the actions to take To enter maintenance programming press the button for Menu and then the button for Maintenance The following main menu appears Maintenance Make a selection System Slot Port Exit Note On the maintenance screens the power supply modules are not shown and the processor module is numbered 00 System Screens System screens are used for getting information you cannot alter anything with system screens 5 10 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting lt Error Logs Error logs you what errors have occurred in the system Write down any errors before you leave the error logs Select System from the main menu layasan Select Error Log Make a selection Status Error Log Inventory Exit S
422. s or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution maybe particularly Important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 DOC Certification No 230 4095A CSA Certification No LR 56260 Load No 6 xviii Customer Support Information Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paratione AVIS L tiquette du minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist r
423. s recommended for verifying proper grounding at the AC outlet are described in the following pages See for AC power requirements If the AC outlet test detects any of the following faults have them corrected before installing the CU open ground reversed polarity open hot open neutral hot and ground reversed hot on neutral with hot open Power and Grounding 2 9 Preparation A WARNING Hazardous voltages are present during the following tests Use care when working with AC power line voltages Using an Ideal 61 035 Circuit Tester or equivalent 1 Plug the circuit tester into the outlet to be tested If the circuit is properly grounded the yellow and white lights on the tester will go on 2 Unplug the circuit tester Using a Volt Ohm Milliammeter VOM 1 Set the VOM to the scale on which you can read 130 VAC 2 Measure the AC outlet voltages see Figure 11 a Phase to ground should be 110 to 125 VAC m Neutral to ground should be less than 2 5 VAC m Phase to neutral should be 110 to 125 VAC If the voltage readings do not measure the values required the AC outlet is improperly wired A WARNING If the AC outlet test shows an improper ground do not install the system Advise the customer to have a licensed electrician correct the problem 2 10 Power and Grounding aas Eue Grounding Requirements Proper grounding see Figure 12 of the installation site safeguards system functioning by protecting
424. s such as answering machines and fax machines The CU consists of the following components control unit housing carrier s power supply module one per carrier processor module m line trunk and station modules Control Unit Housing The control unit is housed in a plastic cabinet for protection The size of the housing increases as expansion carriers are added to the CU Figure 1 shows how the control unit housing fits around the CU Carriers The basic and expansion carriers each have seven slots to hold modules see Figure 2 The basic carrier contains a power supply module the processor module slot 00 and line trunk and station modules slots 01 05 Up to two expansion carriers can be added to the right side of the basic carrier to increase the capacity of the system Like the basic carrier the leftmost and widest slot of the expansion carrier holds a power supply module the remaining six slots hold line trunk and station modules Besides the slots both basic and expansion carriers have a backplane with an input output I O bus that provides the interfaces with the modules Control Unit 1 5 SEEM Descri pion Power Supply Modules The power supply module provides power to the carrier to each telephone and to adjuncts except for adjuncts such as answering machines and fax machines that have their own power supplies Each carrier requires its own power supply module which goes into the first slot
425. s sufficient for the carrier a f the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is more than 27 continue to step 9 D 8 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet O 9 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads for slots 5 and 6 to 27 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat steps 1 8 to recalculate unit loads for new configuration Note Empty slots are not permitted between modules m f the exchange reduces the unit load for slots 5 and 6 to 27 or less auxiliary power is sufficient m f the exchange does not reduce the unit load for slots 5 and 6 to 27 install wall power units for the appropriate number of telephones to reduce the unit load to 27 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 9 General Telephone Programming Use these instructions to program features on MLX and analog multiline telephones General Telephone Programming E 1 General Telephone Programming mm Programming Methods Telephones can be programmed by dialing programming codes or on MLX display phones by selecting features from the display An analog multiline telephone cannot be programmed by selecting features from the display To program a telephone you must first enter programming mode and then enter programming codes As shown in the following tables the steps for entering the programming mode and codes vary depending on the type o
426. scription Table 1 1 Continued Line Trunk Type Station Type Specifications 012 N A Single line Capacity 12 T R stations on telephone 2 way voice transmission path MERLIN with support for telephones with Attendant message waiting LEDs 2 TTRs MERLIN Power 21 VDC 600 ohm MAIL Voice battery source Messaging Ringing current 105 Vrms System 30 Hz sinusoidal ringing super T R adjunct imposed on 48 VDC a ring such as an generator must be installed in answering or the power supply module of a fax each carrier that has a 012 machine module analog data REN gt 1 0 per port device such Disconnect signal 900 ms as a modem T R short for answering machines G3 fax etc Switchhook flash detection 300 1200 ms 100D T1 or PRI Capacity 24 lines trunks for voice and analog data or 23 lines trunks for voice and data with 1 channel used for signaling Mode multiplexes 23 or 24 lines trunks into 1 facility and demultiplexes one facility into 23 or 24 lines trunks Speed up to 64 kbps Signaling DS1 over 4 wire T1 uses RBS or CCS PRI has ISDN PRI 23 B D Control Unit 1 11 System Description Table 1 1 Continued Line Trunk Type Station Type Specifications 400f LS and TTR PFT Capacity 4 lines trunks telephone 4 TTRs 1 PFT telephone Signaling LS 400EM Tie trunk N A Capacity 4 tie trunks Method of Completion automatic start immediate start wink start or delay dial start Sign
427. set Holder a Rotating Replacing the the Handset Extension Holder I Mounting Plate 630B Ground Start Button __ S or as _ R TRUNK PORT programmed 18 VDC PWR SUPPLY ICONFORMAHON TONE PREANNOUNCE TONE YOX DISABLE SOX ENABLE Sle Nv Hee Oe sila ST CLOSURE B VOX DELAY PAGING HME NO Con l Set Mode Switches S1 amp S2 OFF for 48 V operation uopesedo A 8p 104 440 ZS BLS SEUOIIMS EPO 19S AV 130 XOA IOAN ANOL 267 Oe sos Sdn EIN AS ZH 09 OVA LiL r 29IA3Q 1431y 0 Bujyyoouuod Vvol 008 80 Ldd FZEvESZs Lid L uun OUD SLOSVECL LnO Asna ezgosrezl 490718 SNILOSNNOD VWeor wi gt HE Unprotected Potted 9228 9 995 amp simplex Switches 1 through 5 control Port 2 E amp M simplex 9999988 9 Q 5 e 2 3 eee ref Saas e r 2g On Off E On Off Off Off Off 7 EA Off 6 Off 7 7 Off 2 8 Off i 9 Off E 10 Off Switches 6 through 10 control Porti E amp M 068Z 9S9StE z NOTES
428. sistance from the system operator Glossary digital The representation of information in discrete elements such as off_and on or 0 and 1 See alsolanalog transmission Digital Communications Protocol DCP An AT amp T proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and data over the same communications link A DCP link is made up of two 64 kbps information 1 channels and one signaling S channel similar to the B and D channels used in an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN digital switch element DSE A device in each jack on each module in the communications system control unit that interfaces with the TDM time division multiplex bus digital transmission A mode of transmission in which the information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitted as a serial stream of pulses See also analog transmission DIP dual in line package switch A switch on a 400EM module used to select the signaling format for tie line transmission DIP switches are also used on other equipment for setting hardware options direct facility termination DFT A central office CO line trunk that terminates directly on one or more telephones in PBX mode a DFT cannot be part of a trunk pool direct inward dialing DID A service that transmits the called station number to the communications system from the central office CO and routes incoming calls directl
429. sole Repeat from step 2 Exit Exit Exit Console More Labeling LinesTrunks Dial line trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID Enter Drop PC Repeat from step 2 F5 F5 F5 PC PgUp F1 F2 Type line trunk no 801 880 slot and port or logical ID F10 Alt P Labeling 4 223 Programming Procedures SF OOOO Step Console PC 4 Enter label for line trunk Enter label Type label identified in step 2 and Enter F6 save Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display Use template provided with the System Programming Guide or PC keyboard 5 To label another line or Repeat from Repeat from trunk step 2 step 2 When all entries are Exit F5 complete Posted Message Step Console PC 1 Display Labeling screen More PgUp and select Posted Message Labeling F1 PostMessage F3 2 Identify posted message Dial posted Type posted number 1 20 you want message message to add or change and number nn number nn save entry Enter F10 3 Erase current message Drop Alt P 4 224 Labeling Programming Procedures Step 4 Enter new message for Posted Message identi fied in step 2 and save entry Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display Use template provided with the System Programming Guide or PC keyboard 5 To add or change another message When all entries are complete
430. ss Ring Voice Outgoing Only or Shared assignment from button m To change current Dial 19 Type 19 assignment for System Access Voice Originate Only or Shared button from Voice to Ring 7 Exit Exit F5 Analog Multiline Telephones with BIS and or HFAI Capability Step Console PC 1 Display BIS HFAI Extensions F 6 extensions screen BIS HFAL F8 Telephones 4 103 Programming Procedures i Step 2 Ifa DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM If a DSS is attached m To specify that telephone has BIS HFAI capability m lo specify that telephone does not have BIS HFAI capability 3 If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM m Identify telephone to program 4 To specify that telephone has BIS HFAI capability To specify that telephone does not have BIS HFAI capability 4 104 Telephones Console PC Go to step 3 Go to step 3 Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on Go to step 6 Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off Go to step 6 Dial extension Type extension Slot and Slot and port or port or logical ID logical ID Enter F10 Delete F8 Programming Procedures ss Step Console PC 5 To program more Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 telephones and 4 and 4 To view telephones with Inspct PgDn BIS HFAI capability 6 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Analo
431. sts are numbered from 0 7 If the Allowed List is assigned to Remote Access users and barrier codes are used the barrier codes are numbered from 0 16 If no barrier codes are used 17 means the Allowed List is assigned to tie trunk users and 18 means the Allowed List is assigned to non tie trunk users Sample Report ACCESS TO ALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 amp 18 MEAN TIE AND NON TIE RESTRICTIONS List 0 STNS 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 RACC 0 2 3 4 5 17 18 Empty lists and empty entries on lists are not printed System Programming Reports I 13 System Programming Reports E Table l 11 Disallowed Lists Report Name Disallowed Lists Print Menu Choice DisallowList Description Telephone numbers included in Disallowed Lists Lists are numbered 0 7 and entries are numbered 0 9 Sample Report DISALLOWED LISTS List 0 Entry 0 5055551611 Entry 1 PPP976 Entry 2 6025551234 List 7 Entry 0 Se Entry 1 Entry 2 All lists including those with no entries are shown I 14 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports Table I 12 Disallowed List To Report Name Disallowed List To Print Menu Choice DisallowTo Description Telephones to which Disallowed lists are assigned Lists are numbered from 0 7 If the Disallowed List is assigned to Remote Access users and barrier codes are used the barrier codes are numbered from 0 16 If no barrier codes are used for Remote Access 17 means
432. t m built in speakerphone m volume control for speakerphone handset and ringer 1 26 Telephones and Consoles See zeze dientea m user reference card tray with feature and programming codes and directory lists m optional interns Multi Function Module MFM to connect to tip ring T R equipment and alerting devices described in Note An MLX 20L telephone used as a QCC cannot have an MFM in it m two position adjustable desk stand m four pair modular line cord MLX telephones with display have two additional features m LCD display m display associated keys A list of features specific to each telephone model in the MLX telephone family follows MLX 20L Telephone see F igure 5 m can be used for system programming and as a DLC ora QCC operator console m 20 line and feature buttons m display 7 lines x 24 characters m 14 display associated buttons m accommodates one or two Direct Station Selectors DSSs MLX 28D Telephone see F igure 6 m can be used as a DLC operator console m 28 line and feature buttons m display 2 lines x 24 characters Telephones and Consoles 1 27 JELU Descri pon m 8 display associated buttons m accommodates one or two Direct Station Selectors DSSs MLX 10D Telephone see F igure 7 m 10 line and feature buttons m desktop or wall mount m display 2 lines x 24 characters m 8 display associated buttons MLX 10 Telephone see F igure 8 m 10 line and feature buttons m deskt
433. t 5 Identify specific entry Dial entry Type entry number on Emergency number n number n Allowed List 0 9 and Enter F10 save entry 6 Erase current entry and Drop Alt P identify telephone number Dial telephone Type telephone included in list and save number nnn number nnn entry nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn Continued Night Service 4 217 Programming Procedures NN ____________ amp 0 i 8 Step Console PC 6 Continued m To save entry and enter another telephone number a f next entry number Next F9 is sequential Repeat this Repeat this step step alf next entry number Enter F10 is not sequential Repeat steps Repeat steps 4 6 4 6 m To save entry when all Enter F10 entries are complete 7 To assign telephones to ExcludeList F4 Exclusion list 8 Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension program slot and slot and port logical port or ID or press logical ID DSS button for extension no m To assign telephone to Enter F10 Exclusion list m To remove telephone Delete F8 from Exclusion List m To add or move more Repeat this Repeat this telephones step step 9 When all entries are Exit F5 complete exit E Exit 4 218 Night Service Programming Procedures Night Service with Time Set Step Console PC 1 Display Night Service NightSrvce F10 screen 2 Activate or suspend Night Service with Time Set m To suspend Night Go to step 8 Go to step 8 Service with Time
434. t Add Digits Sao Tover TouchTone InvalDstn SndToBkupEx 7 RetmFstBsy The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option Press Inspet or PgDn System Programming Menu Hierarchy J 3 System Programming Menu Hierarchy LinesTrunks PRI PhoneNumber he Continued B ChanniGrp B Channels NmbrToSend Lines Test TelNum NetworkSery MegacomWATS Megacom 800 Soft Def Netw Other Copy Number Copy DoNotCopy Protocol Timers T200 Timer TEI T203 Timer N200 Counter Copy Single N201 Counter Block K Counter T303 Timer T305 Timer T308 Timer T309 Timer T310 Timer T313 Timer T316 Timer RemoteAccss LinesTrunks Dedicated Pools Shared Toll Type No Remote HoldDisenct PrincipaiUsr Non TIE BarierCode Required QCC Prior TIE Lines _ NotRequired QCC Oper Restriction Unrestrictd ARS Restrict Outward Restrict Allow List Toll Restrict DisallowLst BarrierCode SProg Maint Codes Restriction Unrestricted ARS Restrict Outward Restrict Allow List Toll Restret DisatlowLst Auto Queuing Enable Disable Extensions LinesTrunks Line Copy Single Dial OutCd Block Restriction Unrestrictd Outward Restrict Toll Restrict RestretCopy Single Account BIS HFAI Call Pickup VoiceSigni Ext Status Group Page Group Cover Grp Calling Hunt Type Circular ARS Restret DelayAnnce Linear Mic Disable GrpCoverage Remote
435. t 17A 403D For Canadian use system cover and spring clips needed the clips are provided with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System upgrade package 403F Fully compatible 129B Fully compatible Frequency generator ring generator Compatible but can be Auxiliary power 335A used only when the unit loads do not exceed the 335A s capacity an Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 is recommended Music coupler 61398 Fully compatible Control Unit 1 25 System Description Telephones and Consoles Several different analog and single line telephones work with the system however the only digital telephones that work with the system are the digital ISDN MLX telephones A WARNING An analog or digital multiline telephone located in a different building but within 1000 feet of the CU requires an IROB in range out of building protector at each building entrance See Appendix C for ordering information on these telephones MLX Telephones There are four new telephones in the MLX telephone line all of which support ISDN capabilities m MLX 20L telephone m MLX 28D telephone m MLX 10D telephone m MLX 10 telephone Some features are common to all MLX telephones m programmable line and feature buttons with two associated lights red and green Note An MLX 20L telephone used as a QCC has no programmable buttons m dedicated feature buttons four have a red or green light m red message waiting ligh
436. t a rate of 8000 per second with each frame repeating DSO channels 1 through 24 sequentially Two methods of framing can be used by a 100D module but the framing format chosen must match the framing at the far end m D4 Framing Format The system is factory set for the most common framing format D4 framing A D4 frame consists of 24 eight bit time slots and one framing bit To synchronize the 1 56 DS1 Capabilities System Description signals the receiving equipment uses the framing information to identify the start of each frame and to identify which frames contain signaling information The framing information repeats once every 12 frames these 12 frames form the D4 superframe This framing format is used by most DS1 equipment m ESF Framing Format The extended superframe ESF format extends the 12 frame D4 superframe to a 24 frame superframe hence its name The 24 framing bits include a cyclic redundancy check CRC for the entire extended superframe and a facility data link for maintenance The ESF can detect more errors than D4 framing however ESF is not used universally by DS1 equipment Line Coding The DS1 signal consists of a continuous bit stream of ones and zeros encoded into bipolar pulses for transmission Only the ones create a pulse the zeros represent the absence of a pulse The pulses of the ones alternate between positive and negative This type of line coding is called bipolar or alternate mark inversio
437. t also resolves the conflicts of different service levels for example between the individual ports or for the initialization of the ports to support features m Error detection and handling The system detects errors and takes the facility out of service if appropriate It attempts to restore the facility and put it back into service m Error recording The system records all errors and outages in the error logs Audits and updates The system checks the state of the T1 facilities through audits status checks and error logging m Maintaining the synchronization plan The system maintains proper synchronization to the loop clock and switches to the local clock when the loop clock is not available for example during a loss of signal or a blue alarm When the loop clock source is restored the system switches back to the loop clock Maintenance 5 45 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Table 5 2 below is a quick reference for maintenance problems and possible solutions Table 5 2 Maintenance Problems and Solutions Screen TIMEOUT Software initiated COLD START Power failure m Faulty processor module POWER UP Power failure WARM START Power supply failure m Faulty processor module SOFTWARE Software initiated COLD START m Faulty processor module SOFTWARE Software initiated WARM START m Faulty processor module INCOMPLETE m System was cold COLD START started while restart was
438. t is to be used as Ke eae report the following number AS593M 72914 KF E and if the system provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming outgoing access to the network report AS593M 72682 MF E The ringer equivalence number for both systems is 1 5A a For tie line connection provide the telephone company the facility nitros code FIC of TL31M and the service order code SOC 9 0 n ae oa eron to off premises stations report the FIC OL13C and 9 0F a f this equipment is to be connected to digital service 1 544 Mbs the FIC is 04DU9 B for D4 framing format or 04DU9 C for extended framing format and SOC 6 0P a f this eaupmen is to be connected to DID facilities the FIC is 02RV2 T and the SOC is 9 0F a The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required for each jack provide the sequence in which lines are to be connected the type lines the FIC and REN by position when applicable xvi Customer Support Information Customer Support Information You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which maybe connected to the telephone line Excessive REN s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s should not exceed five Seu To be certain of the number of devices that maybe connected to the l
439. t step 3 F10 F2 Repeat steps 2 4 To assign extension as Enter F10 principal user when all entries are complete 5 Exit Exit F5 Queued Call Console QCC Queue Priority HybridIPBX Only Step Console PC 1 Display QCC Queue LinesTrunks F4 Priority screen More PgUp ACC Prior F3 Lines and Trunks 4 35 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Assign QCC queue Dial priority Type priority priority level 1 7 level n level n 3 Save entry Enter F10 4 Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Zines 61 80 F4 5 Assign or remove queue priority shown on line 1 m To assign queue Press line Press function priority to trunk button for each key for each trunk to turn trunk to make green LED on letter QG appear on screen m To remove queue Press line Press function priority from trunk button for each key for each trunk to turn trunk to erase green LED off letter G Note An alternate method for steps 4 and 5 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 or Next F9 to assign queue priority shown on line 1 or select Delete F8 to delete queue priority shown on line 1 4 36 Lines and Trunks Programming Proce
440. t strap A CAUTION Remove the protective cover from each module s gold finger connector before installing the module into the carrier 3 4 The Control Unit Installation Follow these steps to install the power supply modules 1 Make sure all power to the CU is turned off 2 Set the power switch on the power supply modules to OFF 3 Install the ring generator on any power supply module providing power to a 012 basic telephone or 008 OPT module See Install a Ring Generator in the Power Suppl in this chapter Note Place all 012 and 008 OPT modules in one carrier whenever possible 4 Add a copper foil shield to any power supply module that is to be installed in an expansion carrier See Add a Foil Shield to the Power Supply Module in this chapter 5 Install a power supply module in the left most slot of each carrier a Lower the module hook onto the rod b Be sure the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier c Push the module into the carrier until it locks into place 6 Connect one end of the AC power cord to the connector marked AC INPUT on the power supply module A CAUTION Do not plug the power cord into the outlet now Install a Ring Generator in the Power Supply Module A ring generator provides the ringing capability for basic telephones such as single line telephones Figure T lshows the proper placement of the ring generator in the power supply modul
441. tal Modem Pool Operation Position No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 Li 333010b6b00101 0 L2 0111000310000 b blank L Line Modem Option Settings The following procedure is one method to prepare the AT amp T model 2224G modem for operation in an analog to digital modem pool This procedure is only a recommended method and may be different if you are using another type of modem 1 Connect a data terminal such as a PC to the modem and plug both the modem and data terminal into an AC outlet 3 74 Data Adapters Installation E Err 2 Use the instructions provided with the modem to set all bit switches to their default positions except set the switch 1 bit 2 to the right 3 Save all bit switch settings by unplugging the modem from the wall outlet then plugging it back in 4 Set the data terminal speed to match the modem s default speed 5 The modem is now operating in the AT amp T command protocol Set the default software options m Type od m Press Enter 6 Set all bit switches according to Table 3 31 Table 3 31 Modem Option Setting for Analog to Digital Modem Pool Operation a ree Switch Data Adapters 3 75 Installation I iE 7 Unplug the modem from the wall outlet then plug it back in Set switch 1 bit 2 to the left This stores the switch settings in the modem s memory and the modem is now operating in the AT command protocol 8 Enter command mode set the options
442. ted left of the CU 3 78 System Wiring Installation Table 3 32 Network Interfaces Network Interface Description Adapter RJ11 type Connects one outside ground start GS loop start LS or Direct Inward Dialing DID line trunk to one modular jack RJ14 type Connects two outside 2 line adapter 267C lines trunks to one type modular jack GS LS and DID RJ21X 50 pin connector 110AB1 jack panel connects 25 outside block lines trunks GS LS and DID RJ2GX 50 pin connector for up 356A for eight tie trunks to eight tie trunks 259A for one tie trunk RJ48C X Connects DS1 facilities Z601A if modular cords to a 4 pair jack two are used active pairs After installing the adapter label each jack going to the CU with the CO line number Use the list provided by the local telephone company or the planning form s for outside lines trunks as a reference You may also need to know the interface able 333 for network facilities These codes are shown below in Table 3 33 by trunk type and adapter type System Wiring 3 79 Installation Table 3 33 CO Network Interface Codes Line Federal Interface Network Trunk Type Code for Facility Interface LS CO line 02LS2 RJ11C RJ14C RJ21 GS CO trunk 02GS2 RJ11C RJ14C RJ21 02RV2 T RJ11C RJ14C RJ21 04DU9 B RJ48C X 04DU9 C The preferred network interface is the RJ48X With the RJ48X interface if no connection is o by the customer s aomen the T1 facilit
443. telephones the button should be wired from the wall jack m f rotary lines trunks are used rotary telephones must be used as PFT telephones System Alarms An alarm detected by the system can cause the CU to activate contact closures at a GS or LS port programming of an LS port is preferred When the contacts close a signal is passed on to a Universal Paging Access Module UPAM and then to an external alert Alerting devices can be a strobe horn bell or chime A UPAM is needed because 48 VDC alerting devices require four contact closures and the GS or LS ports have only two The UPAM provides the additional two Trouble Alarms A GS or LS port can be programmed to activate an alarm connected to the port via a UPAM see Figure 69 When system trouble caused by hardware or software malfunction is detected by the operator console a signal is sent to that port The port s switching contacts close and send the signal onto the UPAM which activates an external alert Power Failure Alarm A GS or LS PFT port can be programmed to activate an alerting device during a power failure The device is connected to the port via a UPAM see When a power failure occurs the switching contacts on the PFT port close and send a signal to the UPAM which activates an external alert 6 6 Accessories Adapters Accessories and Applications p amp amp e Note A PFT telephone cannot be used on this port when the port is connected
444. ten sion no Nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Specify group type m o specify automatic Auto Login F1 log in after power failure m To specify manual log Auto Logout F2 in after power failure m To specify that calling Integ VMI F3 group is used for integrated voice message system and automatic log in after power failure Continued Optional Group Assigned Features 4 171 Programming Procedures TTT Step Console PC 3 Continued m To specify that calling Generic VMI F4 group is used for generic voice message system and automatic log in after power failure 4 Save entry and either program another calling group or exit m To save entry and assign group type to another calling group m f next group Next F9 extension number is Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 sequential m f next group Enter F10 extension number is Repeat steps Repeat steps not sequential 2 4 2 4 m To save entry and exit Enter F10 when all entries are f complete Exit F5 Exit F5 4 172 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures System F eatures Transfer Return Time Step Console PC 1 Display Transfer screen Options F7 and select Return time Transfer F1 Return Time F1 2 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of rings and specify number rings n rings n of rings 1 9 before transferred calls are returned to originator
445. teps to properly ground the CU power supply modules see Figures Filana 1 Attach a 12 or 14 ground wire to the grounding screw on each power supply module 2 Connect the other end of each ground wire to the terminals of the single point ground bar on the AC outlet box The Control Unit 3 15 Installation Connect the Control Unit to an AC Outlet A CAUTION Be sure the AC outlet has been tested for proper grounding by following the procedures in Chapter 2 under AC Outlet The outlet should be 117 VAC 60 Hz 3 wire grounded A CAUTION To prevent someone from accidentally shutting off the power do not connect the CU to a switch controlled outlet The AC outlet should be within 5 feet of the CU Follow these steps to connect the CU to an AC outlet 1 Turn the switch on the power supply module in the basic carrier to the OFF position 2 Turn off the power switches on the expansion carrier power supply modules 3 Unplug any auxiliary power units 4 Plug one end of the power cord into the AC INPUT connector just below the power switch on the front of the power supply module Do this for each carrier 5 Plug the other end of the power cord into the AC outlet Allow at least 1 foot of slack in the cord Do this for each carrier A CAUTION Do not attach the power cord s to any building surfaces 3 16 The Control Unit Installation Turn the Power On A CAUTION Follow the steps in exact sequence
446. termine channel capacity barrier code A password used to limit access to the Remote Access feature of the communications system basic carrier A piece of hardware that holds and connects the processor module power supply module and up to five line trunk or station modules in the communications system See alsolexpansio carer B Services Digital Network ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between the communications system and a terminal BRI runs at 192 kops and provides two 64 kbps voice or B channels and one 16 kbps signaling or D channel per port The remaining 48 kops are used for framing and D channel contention baud In telecommunications applications a unit of transmission speed equal to the number of signal events per second See al o bit ratd and Behind Switch A mode of operation in which the communications system control unit is connected to is behind another communications system binary code An electrical representation of quantities or symbols expressed in the base 2 number system Glossary GL 3 Glossary bipolar 8 zero substitution B8ZS A line coding format that encodes a string of 8 zeros in a unique binary sequence using bipolar violation See also bipolar signsland bipolar violation bipolar signal A digital signal in which pulses ones alternate between positive and negative See PORTE bipolar 8 zero substitution and bipolar
447. tested Keep moving the patch cord to the next connector block on the right until you find the pairs that carry the tone device signal 3 100 System Wiring Installation Remove Damaged Connecting Blocks In some cases a connecting block can become damaged and must be removed Procedure 1 Remove the wires or the patch cord from the connecting block m With interconnect wiring remove the station wires with long nosed pliers and tag the wires with tape to identify their position m With SYSTIMAX pull off the patch cord 2 Place a 788K1 retainer tool against the conductor pairs beneath the connecting block to be removed 3 Grip the connecting block in the center with pliers Move the block gently up and down and pull it out see Figure 53 4 lf a conductor wire is accidentally pulled from a block pull it with the long nosed pliers to get some slack Use your fingers to lay the conductor wire back in its slot in the index strip Reseat it with the D impact tool 5 Seat the new connecting block by using the 788J1 impact tool see Figure 49 6 Replace the station wire onto the connecting block m With interconnect wiring remove the tag from the station wires and reseat the wires by using the D impact tool m With SYSTIMAX attach the patch cord to the connecting block System Wiring 3 101 Installation IROB Protection Equipment connected to the analog multiline telephone station jacks on the 008 4
448. the textured side of the cover is facing you 9 Adjust the contrast on the telephone s display m MLX 20L Slide the lever on the top of the telephone m MLX 10D and MLX 28D Follow the directions in the user s guide for the appropriate MLX telephone Telephones and Consoles 3 115 Installation System Acceptance Test Once the system has been installed and initialized it is ready for acceptance testing Test all lines trunks telephones and features to ensure they are working correctly If any equipment is not working correctly see Chapter 5 Maintenance Test the MLX Telephones The switch based software test described in this chapter verifies that the LEDs ringer buttons switchhook and B channel operation on the MLX telephones are working correctly This test cannot be run when the telephone is in program forced idle or maintenance mode When an MLX telephone is in the test mode it is considered busy and therefore not available for use If you hang up during any of these procedures you are automatically taken out of the test mode Follow these steps to test the basic features of an MLX telephone 1 Pick up the handset of the telephone being tested and push an Intercom button Key or Behind Switch mode or a System Access button Hybrid PBX mode After receiving a dial tone dial 00 to activate the test mode You should hear a steady test tone over the handset and a ring burst over the spe
449. the 68000 microprocessor a built in 1200 baud data modem built in diagnostics RAM a real time clock and interrupt circuitry and interfaces to the other modules through the I O bus on the carrier backplane The processor module has two modular RS 232 jacks one for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and the other for system programming and maintenance via a personal computer see Figure 3 A NiCad battery in the processor module provides backup power for the real time clock and nonvolatile RAM in case of power failure or system shutdown The battery provides RAM data retention for 12 to 30 days The trickle charge circuit can recharge the battery to 50 percent of capacity from a discharged state in 48 hours The minimum battery life is five years Line Trunk and Station Modules The line trunk and station modules have jacks for connecting the CO lines trunks and the station lines to the CU The station lines connect to telephones and adjuncts Depending on the mode of operation chosen the outside lines that extend from the CO are called either trunks or lines Trunks is used for the Hybrid PBX mode and in the phrase tie trunks Lines is used for Key or Behind Switch modes Control Unit 1 7 System Description mmm There are different types of lines trunks for the different functions of each mode A Key or Behind Switch system can use m loop start LS lines m tie trunks m a DS1 facility programmed for e
450. the called person and can leave a recorded message The system manager is responsible for forwarding the messages in the general mailbox to the appropriate users If the general mailbox is full Call Answer tells the caller and the caller can transfer to another extension When a user receives a message the message LED on the telephone goes on If a message is left in the general mailbox the system manager s message LED goes on m Voice Mail This service allows users to send messages to other extensions in the system forward messages received along with comments and reply to messages received Users also can record a personal greeting and program a password to help prevent others from retrieving their messages The number of incoming lines and subscribers programmed for Automated Attendant service and the number of busy hour calls determine how many MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System ports are required for the user s system see Table 6 4 Applications 6 31 Adapters Accessories and Applications Table 64 MERLIN MAIL Ports Required No of Ports Required 2 4 Incoming Lines Trunks 1 to 6 7 to 18 No of Subscribers or 1 to 20 21 to 60 Busy Hour Calls Other MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System features are the following a Outcalling automatically calls the user at a number that the user has programmed when a new message Is received The user can then log in to the voice messaging system to retrieve messages
451. the connection of two CMS applications and each application can use up to two PCs Product References Call Management System CMS for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation and System Programming Guide Integrated Solution II Integrated Solution II IS II is a complete package of UNIX based voice processing and call analysis software that helps to manage telephone usage and costs IS II offers a single interface to and can include any of the following software m Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IVP AA IS Il The IVP AA answers telephones automatically and transfers callers to the appropriate departments or extensions Callers are offered a menu of recorded prompts that they respond to by dialing numbers on a touch tone telephone Callers without touch tone telephones can be transferred to the system operator who then handles their calls Separate menus for day and night service as well as multilevel menus and corresponding announcements can be set up to ensure that callers reach the right person or department quickly Applications 6 21 Adapters Accessories and Applications IVP AA can operate in touch tone gate mode or in no gate mode To speed handling of calls from touch tone telephones gate mode prompts callers to dial 1 to continue to the main menu If a 1 is not dialed within a programmed interval calls are automatically transferred to the system operator In the no gate mode
452. the other end to connect the remote maintenance device to the serial port on the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System unit m D4BU modular cords two for a 2 port system or four for a 4 port system plus one for the remote maintenance device m 012 basic telephone module Note Additional touch tone receivers TTRs maybe needed to allow the 012 module to handle a large number of voice connections Installation MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System connects to two or four 012 basic telephone module jacks on the system s CU MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System unit can be desk or wail mounted and should be placed in an area with low humidity and proper ventilation Note Follow the power and ground procedures for T R telephones that require auxiliary power 6 34 Applications Adapters Accessories and Applications EE amp Product References MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Installation System Programming and Maintenance System Programming and Maintenance System Programming and Maintenance SPM for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an MS DOS based software application that allows the use of a personal computer PC for programming and maintaining the system SPM performs the same functions as an MLX 20L telephone used as a system programming console and has some additional features such as the ability to back up and restore files and print reports
453. the power at the power supply modules in the expansion carriers 3 Unplug any auxiliary power units Because the power supply modules are already off the sequence for removing auxiliary power cords is not important Install the Control Unit Housing The control unit housing is a plastic cover to protect the CU modules One front panel is used for each carrier Follow these steps to install the control unit housing see 1 Lay the front panel s face down 2 lf more than one carrier is being housed slide the front panels together so that the semicircles on the inside line up 3 Add both side panels to the front panel s by sliding the front panel s into the slots on the side panels so that the semicircles on the inside line up 4 Pick up the whole housing and place it on the CU a Line up the wire clips attached to the carrier with the recesses on the outside of the side panels b Push back until the clips hook over the tabs and rest in the recesses 3 18 The Control Unit Installation Channel Service Unit The channel service unit CSU provides the interface between the 100D module and the DS1 facilities Two models are available the ESF T1 CSU and the 551 T1 L1 CSU ESF T1 CSU The ESF T1 CSU can connect to the DS1 network by using the D4 or extended superframe format hence the ESF Also it is the only CSU to provide the B8ZS line coding needed to transmit a 64 kbps clear channel Mount the ESF T1 CS
454. the system from m lightning m power surges m power crosses on CO lines trunks m electrostatic discharge ESD The telephone company is responsible for providing protection of CO lines trunks at the entrance to the site The protection should consist of m carbon blocks or gas discharge tubes connected to an approved ground m adequate bonding of the CO line trunk protector ground and the power company ground The CU the CO line protector and the AC power service panel should be as close to each other as possible Because equipment can be located throughout a building the National Electrical Code requires the ground point for the CO line protector to be bonded to the AC power ground The AC outlet and the single point ground bar must be properly grounded Power and Grounding 2 11 Preparation Each power supply module in the CU must be connected to the single point ground bar by a 12 AWG or a 14 AWG solid copper wire The wire run should not exceed 25 feet See Provide Proper Grounding in Chapter 3 Installation A WARNING Improper ground can cause equipment failures service outages and electrical shock Verify that the AC power uses an approved ground for its primary ground that all voltage limiting devices are grounded to an approved ground and that the ground is one of the approved grounds below Approved grounds listed from most to least preferred are m building steel m acceptable water pipe must be a meta
455. there is room on the termination block for the line wires both the RJ21X and the RJ2GX can be punched down on the same 110AB1 100JP12 block Any wires not used are left unterminated A CAUTION Be careful not to connect tie trunks to GS LS or DID ports and vice versa Since all the jacks on the termination block are 8 wire jacks it is possible to accidentally interchange tie trunk wires with GS LS or DID wires RJ 48C X Interface The RuJ48C X interface terminates a DS1 line at the customer s premises Both RJ48C and RJ48X interfaces have 8 wire modular jacks However the RJ48X interface includes shorting bars that loop the T1 facility s receive pair to the transmit pair This helps in testing the T1 facility from the CO Testing CO Lines Trunks Before connecting the CO lines trunks to the CU you must verify that a dial tone is being received and that you can dial out on every line Note DID trunks can be tested only through the CU do not test DID trunks at this time 3 84 System Wiring Installation A CAUTION Do not use analog multiline telephones or MLX telephones for testing They do not work for these tests and can be damaged if you use them for this purpose Test Loop Start Lines Trunks To perform this test you need a single line telephone or an installer s test telephone craft set If you are installing rotary dial lines trunks you should perform this test with a rotary telephone 1 Plug th
456. tically removed Note Make sure that no modules are in a maintenance busy state during a backup procedure see Back Up System P Chapter 4 Programming Procedures Any module in a maintenance busy state will be recorded as such on the translations disk Conditions Causing a Maintenance Busy State m Ground Start Line Trunk m A seizure of the line trunk is attempted that results in incomplete handshaking between the CO and the system After four occurrences the line trunk is put into a maintenance busy state and a permanent error is logged 5 40 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting mmm E EEEE a The CO fails to disconnect when the GS line trunk is dropped by the system After two occurrences the line trunk is put into a maintenance busy state and a permanent error is logged No loop current is detected when the GS line trunk is seized The port is marked maintenance busy and a permanent error is logged m Loop Start Line Trunk a No loop current exists when the LS line trunk is seized The port is marked maintenance busy and a permanent error is logged m Tie Trunk seizure of an outgoing tie trunk fails A transient error is reported After four unsuccessful seizure attempts the port is marked maintenance busy and the error becomes permanent he far end station fails to disconnect A transient error is reported Atfer two occurrences the port is marked maintenance busy and the error becomes
457. tning inadvertent contact with power lines and power currents induced by nearby power lines See the installation notes packed with the ADU for more information Plug one end of a D8W cord into the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into an ADU crossover cable Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks on a 400B2 power adapter Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the other jack of the 400B2 adapter Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the jack on a 248B adapter see Figure 30 Connect the spade tip wires on the 248B adapter to the screws on a 2012D transformer see Plug the 400B2 adapter into a BR1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block Place a plug onto the end of the inside wiring DIW on the CU side and plug the DIW cord into the BR1A 4P adapter 102 connecting block or 103 connecting block The Printer and the PC 3 51 Installation EE so 10 On the printer side of the inside wiring punch down the DIW cord onto a 102 or 103 connecting block 11 Plug one end of a D8W cord into the 102 or 103 connecting block and the other end into a Z3A2 ADU 12 Connect one end of an RS 232 cable to the Z3A2 ADU and the other end to the printer 13 Plug the 2012D transformer into a wall outlet 14 Set the printer options for use with the SMDR feature m For the AT amp T 572 printer set the options on the printer according to Table 3 26 See the users guide supplie
458. ton for each line trunk to turn green LED off Exit Exit Exit PC F1 F2 F3 F4 Press function key for each line trunk to make letter G appear on screen Press function key for each line trunk to erase letter G F5 F5 F5 Note An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry Mode F6 identify the line trunk dial or type line trunk number logical ID or slot and port no and select Enter F10 to assign touch tone or select Delete F8 to assign rotary dial 4 30 Lines and Trunks Programming Procedures EE KE rh Loop Start Line Trunk Disconnect Signaling Reliability Step Console PC 1 Display Touch Tone Loop LinesTrunks F4 Start Disconnect screen yns Disc F3 and select Loop Start Ta F2 Disconnect Disconnect 2 Classify disconnect signal received on loop start lines trunks m To classify as Yes F1 m To classify as Ne F2 unreliable 3 Save choice and exit Enter F10 Exit F5 Exit F5 Toll Type Step Console PC 1 Display Toll Type screen LInesTrunks F4 Toll Type F10 Lines and Trunks 4 31 Programming Procedures Step Console PC 2 Select specific lines trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 m For logical IDs 61 80 Sines 61 80 F4 3 Specify toll prefix requirement for long distance calls m To sp
459. tries are i complete Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 4 96 PRI Facilities Programming Procedures Telephones Assign Lines Trunks or Pools to Telephones Step Console PC 1 Display Assign Extensions F6 Lines Trunks screen SSeS Fi 2 Identify telephone to Dial extension Type extension program and save entry slot and slot and port or port or logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Select specific lines trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen m For logical IDs 1 20 Lines 01 20 F1 m For logical IDs 21 40 Lines 21 40 F2 m For logical IDs 41 60 Lines 41 60 F3 mFor logical IDs 61 80 Lines 61 80 f4 Telephones 4 97 Programming Procedures y y O ee _ N Step Console PC 4 Assign or remove lines trunks or pools m To assign a line trunk Press line Press function line button to button for each key for each telephone line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED on make letter G appear on screen m To remove a line trunk Press line Press function button from telephone button foreach key for each line trunk to turn line trunk to green LED off erase letter G m To assign a pool Press line Press function button button for any key for any trunk in pool trunk in pml until both red until both letters and green R and G LEDs are on appear on screen m To remove a pool Press line Press functio
460. two way transmission 3 At the maintenance terminal check the line trunk translations to be sure this line trunk has been properly translated See the system planning forms 4 Ifthe module continues to malfunction replace it Maintenance 5 43 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Line Trunk Error Summary Table 5 1 shows the line trunk errors reported when a transient or permanent error is registered by the system These errors are also recorded for T1 ports Note In some cases errors occur not because a single port fails but because the entire T1 link fails If the entire T1 link fails the periodic T1 board level maintenance monitoring functions perform the testing and activate alarming Table 5 1 Line Trunk Errors Line Trunk No loop current LS and GS lines trunks No external release on far end GS DID and tie lines trunks disconnect On hook before ready to receive DID and tie trunks digits trunk with delay dial or wink start On hook before wink trunk with DID and tie trunks delay dial or wink start Stuck ringing LS and GS lines trunks Wink too short for valid signal 5 44 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting Ne HQ ________ lt lt lt The 100D System Module T1 Maintenance Every 15 minutes the system checks the 100D module for the following m Initialization The system ensures that all T1 ports are properly initialized and placed into service I
461. ually not needed with the 391A1 power unit the power supply module It maybe needed with the older 391A power supply module in heavy lightning areas Complete installation instructions are provided with the protectors CIB 3109 and CIB 3111 2 14 Power Surge Protection Heel Unit Loads A unit load is a measure of power used to determine the electrical load on the power supply module caused by telephones adjuncts and DID modules One unit load equals 1 9 watts Unit load and auxiliary power requirements for a new system are computed automatically by the AT amp T DOSS Configurator and any necessary auxiliary power equipment is automatically ordered However in the event of maintenance or equipment changes you must calculate unit loads yourself to ensure proper operation under all conditions see Appendix Dlfor a unit load worksheet complete with specific unit load values The power supply module provides 54 unit loads to each carrier If the unit load requirement for a carrier exceeds 54 an auxiliary power unit is needed to allow that carrier to support an additional 27 unit loads Note Running the system with more than 54 unit loads per carrier may not appear to do harm However this can cause the system to malfunction creating no trouble found situations An auxiliary power unit redirects the power requirements from the last two slots on the carrier Any station connected to the modules in the last two slots recei
462. uch as printers host computers or workstations data hunt group DHG A group of analog or digital data stations that share a common access code Calls are connected in a round robin fashion to the first available data station in the group data rate See data terminal An input output I O device that can be connected to the communications system control unit via an interface data terminal equipment DTE The equipment that makes up the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit for example a data terminal host computer or printer GL 8 Glossary dedicated feature buttons The imprinted feature buttons on a telephone Conf or Conference Drop HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Hold Mute or Microphone Speaker or Speakerphone Transfer Message and Recall delay dial start tie trunk A type of tie trunk on which the originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal to the receiving end and waits for the receiving end to send an off hook signal followed by an on hook signal Also called a dial repeating tie trunk dial access See dial out code A code usually a 9 dialed by single line telephone users and multiline telephone users with System Access SA buttons to get an outside line DID direct inward dialing trunk An incoming trunk that receives dialed digits from the local exchange allowing the communications system to connect directly to a Station without as
463. ued 1 10 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports Table l 8 Continued QCC OPERATOR OPTIONS GENERAL OPTIONS Listed Directory Number for queue 800 Held calls return to queue YES Automatic hold enabled YES Calls in queue alarm threshold 10 Time until priorities are elevated 6 sec Message Center Operators 15 One Touch Extend AUTOMATIC Rings before extended calls return 4 Backup operator station 770 QCC CALL TYPES CALL TYPE PRIORITY OPERATORS Dial 0 Operator 4 10 14 20 24 Follow Forward 4 N A Unassigned DID 4 10 14 Listed Directory Number 4 10 14 Operator s Extension 4 N A Returning 4 10 14 20 24 Group Coverage Group 1 4 10 14 20 24 Group 2 4 10 14 20 24 Group 30 4 System Programming Reports I 11 System Programming Reports E S Table l 9 Allowed Lists Report Name Allowed Lists Print Menu Choice AllowList Description Telephone numbers included in Allowed Lists Lists are numbered 0 7 and entries are numbered 0 9 Sample Report ALLOWED LISTS List 0 Entry 0 505555 Entry 1 303555 Entry 2 602555 List 7 Entry 0 Entry 1 Entty 2 All lists including those with no entries are shown I 12 System Programming Reports System Programming Reports A 8 8 Table 1 10 Access to Allowed Lists Report Name Access to Allowed Lists Print Menu Choice AllowListTo Description Telephones to which Allowed Lists are assigned Li
464. ues et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importance dans les r gions rurales AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces l raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un electricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign ceque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surchage le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitut e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homologation 230 4095A No de certification CSA LR 56260 L indice de charge 6 Customer Support Information xix placement de VaVNVO Minister des Communications du Canada em l tiquette uol ejje sui p januew j oA asinb l S9 JJepuodaS 1n 99 01d un p UO e e SUI s n l x suoljeoljdde s p nod asijiin se uawidinde S INJ WISSILHJAV yenue W uo ejje su aS p mb ase s10 9 01d lepuos s p aosdde suoljeoijdde f uipj nq o no Jo pasn s juawdinba j ONINHYM YG T u eanbq JaGuly 3 4 pT6ZL WeESSY 0979S 4T 394 Auo Aay uogdo 4J y YIM paddinba uaym WoT eduajeninby Jabuly J AW Z8IZ
465. uit which automatically compensate for signal levels in the range of 0 to 27 7 dB Connect the 551 T1 L1 CSU to the 100D Module Connect the 100D module to the CSU S rear panel see 1 Place an adapter on the end of the D8W cord from the 100D module 2 Plug the adapter into the 15 pin subminiature connector Note The maximum length of cable from the 100D module to the CSU for line compensation is 655 feet Table 3 25 shows the pin assignments for the rear panel connections Channel Service Unit 3 43 Installation Table 3 25 CSU Rear Panel Pin Assignments 100D Module 551 T1L1CSU SIGNAL D CONN DESIG SIGNAL 1 DC Power Options Depending on the type of line provided by the local telephone company the CSU can be supplied with 48 VDC power on the T wire pair from the network If the CSU is not powered from the network a KS22911 L1 power supply is required Connect the power supply to the rear panel at TB1 as follows m positive lead to terminal 15 m 48 VDC lead to terminal 14 3 44 Channel Service Unit Installation The SMDR Printer and the System Programming PC Both an SMDR printer and a personal computer PC used for system programming can be connected to the processor module Connect a Printer to the Control Unit A printer AT amp T models 475 476 and 572 can be connected to the CU through the SMDR port on the processor module There are two procedures for installing a printer dependin
466. unications system itself consists of a digital computer software a storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the actual connections A communications system provides voice and or data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones and data terminals on a customer s premises companding The compression or expansion of the quantizing scale to reduce distortion See also quantizing control unit The housing carriers power supply module processor module and line trunk and station modules of a communications system conversion resource See modem pool cyclic redundancy check CRC An error detection code used on DS1 facilities with the extended superframe framing ESF format D D channel The 16 kbps or 64 kbps channel carrying signaling or data on an Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI or 64 kops channel carrying signaling or data on an ISDN Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI D4 framing format A framing format consisting of a sequence of individual frames of 24 eight bit slots and 1 signal bit 193 bits ina 12 frame superframe See also extended super frame Glossary GL 7 Glossary rr hr data communications equipment DCE Equipment such as modems or data modules used to establish maintain and terminate a connection between the communications system and data terminal equipment DTE s
467. unplug them from the module Run a demand test by entering the test mode Remove the module and inspect it for visible damage Insert the new module Select Restore to put the module back in service Plug in the line trunk and station cords CO SO e Attach a tag identifying any visible problems or failure symptoms and any relevant error reports to the replaced module Replacing the Telephones and Adjuncts Once a problem has been isolated to a telephone or a group of telephones various tests can be done to see if the telephone is working properly Check the telephone wire first Also swap a telephone you know is good with the one you think is faulty These practical steps isolate the problem quickly The following describes the telephone tests and how to fix particular problems 5 32 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting eee MLX Telephone Tests Follow the procedure below to test MLX telephones The tests check the m LEDs m display screen m ringer m buttons m switchhook m B channel operation Follow this basic procedure for any MLX telephone test 1 Pick up the handset 2 At the dial tone enter the feature access code 00 by pressing the dialpad The software should place the telephone in test mode 3 Run the test 4 Hang up when done Note Telephones cannot be tested remotely Basic MLX Telephone Test This test connects a test tone to the B channel and sends a r
468. used features OK foil shield A copper foil sheet for power units on expansion carriers that is used to prevent excessive noise on the module immediately to the right of the power supply module in each expansion carrier frame One of several segments of an analog or digital signal that has a repetitive characteristic For example a DS1 frame consists of a framing bit and 24 octets which equals 193 bits frequency generator A circuit pack added to the power unit module that generates a high voltage 20 30 Hz signal to ring a telephone Also called a ring generator FX foreign exchange A central office CO other than the one providing local access to the public network Glossary GL 11 Glossary G General Purpose Adapter GPA A device that connects an analog multiline telephone to optional equipment such as an answering machine or a fax machine glare The loud dual tone multi frequency DTMF signal an incoming caller hears when another caller tries to call out on a line trunk at the same time the call is coming in on that line trunk ground start GS Tine trunk A line trunk on which after verifying that the line trunk is idle no ground on tip the communications system transmits a request for service puts ground on ring to a distant central office CO H headset An ultralight earpiece and microphone for hands free telephone operation GL 12 Glossary Home screen
469. utgoing calls Control Unit 1 15 System Description Wink start factory setting The originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal a wink indicating that it is ready to receive dialing information Immediate start No start signal is necessary and dialing can begin immediately after the tie trunk is seized Delay dial start The originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off hook signal and waits for the remote end to send an off hook signal followed by an on hook signal Automatic start Incoming calls are routed directly to another station without a start signal In other words when you pick up the handset the signal rings immediately at the other end This is also called an automatic ringdown tie trunk Wink start immediate start and delay dial start are also called dial repeating tie trunks m E amp M Signal a Type 1 standard factory setting m Type 1 compatible a Type 5 m Dial Mode determines the incoming and outgoing dial modes m rotary factory setting touch tone Note If the 400EM module is administered for touch tone dialing and there are no modules in the system that provide touch tone receivers TTRs 012 008 OPT 400 400 GS LS TTR or 800 DID a 400 GS LS TTR module must be installed 1 16 Control Unit System Description m Dial Tone determines whether the system returns a dial tone to the remote end of the lin
470. utton Basic 10 Button HFAI 34 Button Basic 34 Button DLX 34 Button BIS 34 Button BIS DIS Single Line Telephone Continued 4 it loads are computed per trunk for trunk type network access ines D 4 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 6 Continued Qty x Unit Load Total Hybrid PBX or Modified Optional Equipmentt Direct Station Selectort General Purpose Adapter Hands Free Unit Headset Adapter Total Actual Unit Load t The MFM has its own wall power unit located at the station and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation Up to two DSSs one DSS per MLX 28D or MLX 20L can be powered from each control unit carrier For example a three carrier system can have six system operator positions each with one DSS powered from the control unit a f the total actual unit load is less than or equal to 54 auxiliary power is not required a f the total actual unit load is more than 54 continue to step 7 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet D 5 Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet 7 Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads to 54 Remember that the 100D 400 400 GS LS 800 and 800 GS LS modules have unit loads of 0 0 Repeat steps 1 6 to recalculate unit loads for the new configuration Note Empty slots are not permitted between modules a f the exchange reduces the unit load to 54 or less auxiliary power is not required a
471. validation A cauTION Under applicable tariffs the customer is responsible for any charges incurred through the remote use of system facilities Precautions should be taken to prevent unauthorized use of the system s outside lines by remote callers also called toll fraud Seel Cuslomier Suppor Information at the front of this book for more information on security 5 8 Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting The following menu selections must be used with care To eliminate any selection mishaps you must confirm or cancel them m Busy Out m Reset m Restore m Poke m System Erase Maintenance Strategy The goal of maintenance is to isolate the trouble to one or more replaceable units and to replace the faulty units as quickly as possible To help isolate the fault check equipment in the following order 1 Telephones and adjuncts Station wiring Line trunk and station modules 2 3 4 Processor module 5 Power supply module 6 Carrier backplane Note Traffic problems can result from having more than 64 personal lines or pool buttons on the system If you have traffic problems check this first Use the maintenance program as follows 1 Check the error logs 2 lf the error logs indicate trouble in the processor module correct that problem first since it may be causing trouble in the line trunk and station modules Maintenance 5 9 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 3 Run demand test
472. ves power from the auxiliary power unit instead of the power supply module Besides DID trunks only telephones and adjuncts that connect to analog and digital ports on the CU require unit load calculations Any equipment with its own power supply for example an answering machine does not have to be included in the unit load calculation Unit Loads 2 15 Preparation TE TTT Unit Loads for the Hybrid PBX Mode The 391A1 power supply module generally supports six modules of any type in a Hybrid PBX system However the unit loads on a carrier can exceed 54 if both of the following exist m all six carrier slots have only MLX telephone or analog multiline telephone modules installed m the carrier has a total of more than 45 MLX 20L or 34 button analog multiline telephone stations installed Unit Loads for the Key or Behind Switch Mode In a Key or Behind Switch system with four or fewer modules no calculation is needed The 391A1 power supply module generally supports four modules of any type in Key or Behind Switch mode Calculating Unit Loads Calculate the unit loads of each carrier by completing the steps on the worksheet in Appendix D 2 16 Unit Loads Installation Installation of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System involves these equipment areas control unit m system wiring m telephones and consoles Depending on the system s configuration other equipment such as an ISDN 7500B Dat
473. visions and more accuracy in areas of the scale where voice signals are most likely to occur 1 48 Signal Processing System Description Mu Law 255 Mu Law 255 is a commanding scheme that uses a compression ratio compatible with modern channel bank equipment The scale is divided into 16 intervals with each interval having 16 levels Therefore the scale has 256 discrete values But since Mu Law 255 has a negative and a positive zero it really has only 255 discrete values This commanding scheme is used in the United States and Japan Digital Switching The TDM bus allows many users to communicate over a common electrical connection because it is physically distributed across the backplane of the CU and connects all line trunk and station modules The TDM bus has specific time slots for various functions For example during a conversation between station A and station B a time slot is resewed for station A to transmit on and for station B to receive on An analog station can transmit on time slot 150 and receive on time slot 160 Because the TDM bus cycles 8000 times per second the conversation is continuous The TDM bus carries tones and control signals to stations via time slots 0 to 39 Unlike other bus configurations the stations on the TDM bus receive all transmissions If a station is not assigned to any of the time slots the station ignores the data The digital switch element DSE is a digital switch for voice and dat
474. which the signaling is outside the band used for voice frequencies Glossary GL 17 Glossary P parity The addition of a bit to a bit String so that the total number of 1 s is odd or even Parity can be used to detect and correct transmission errors pass through A connection from an internal modem to a programming port on the communications system personal line A central office CO line that rings only at the user s telephone pool On a Hybrid PBX system a grouping of outside trunks that users can choose with multiple pool buttons or by dialing access codes on an SA System Access button on the telephone Pools are also used by the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature to choose the cheapest method to route a call port A point of access into a communications system computer network or other electronic device GL 18 Glossary n power supply module A device that directs electricity to modules and telephones on the communications system One power supply module is needed for each carrier and an auxiliary power unit is added if the module exceeds capacity Primary Rate Interface PRI A standard Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN access interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems PRI runs at 1 544 Mbps and as used in North America provides twenty three 64 kbps B channels voice or data and one 64 kbps D channel signaling The D
475. with MLX telephones Therefore when the 7500B is used without an MLX telephone a 100 ohm 440A4 terminating resistor adapter PEC 2709 A59 must be installed on the line near the 7500B To provide synchronous operation at speeds up to 64 kbps one of the following optional circuit boards must be ordered Multipurpose Enhancement Board Provides an RS 366 Automatic Calling Unit ACU interface and converts the RS 232 interface on the main circuit board from asynchronous to synchronous A V 35 adapter cable must be ordered separately to operate at data rates of 56 and 64 kbps Without the adapter cable data rates are limited to 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19 200 bps m High Speed Synchronous Interface Enhancement Board Provides a V 35 interface at synchronous data rates of 48 56 or 64 kbps A V 35 adapter cable that converts the 25 pin male connector on the board to the industry standard 34 pin V 35 interface is included 3 58 Data Adapters Installation Data Module Features The data module offers the following features Asynchronous Features RS 232 interface asynchronous full duplex operation selected data rates of 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19 200 bps data options set via the data terminal attached to the RS 232 interface ability to change options without dropping a data call autobaud also called data metering or speed matching or the ability to adjust the speed of transmission to match the speed of the d
476. xt group extension Next F9 number is sequential Repeat step3 Repeat step 3 m f next group extension nter F10 number is not F5 sequential Exit Message F4 Repeat steps Repeat steps 2 4 2 4 5 Exit Exit F5 Exit F5 Exit F5 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 167 Programming Procedures EE rll Group Calling Calls In Queue Alarm Threshold Step Console PC 1 Display Group Calling Extensions F6 menu and select In Queue M PaU Alarm Threshold Ore gp Grp Calling F4 Queue Alarm F6 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling program and save entry group exten group exten sion no nnnn sion no Nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Erase currently Drop Alt P programmed number of Dial number of Type number of calls and specify number calls nn calls nn of calls 1 99 before group members are notified 4 Save entry and program another calling group or exit m To save entry and specify in queue alarm threshold for another calling group m lf next group Next F9 extension number is Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 sequential Continued 4 168 Optional Group Assigned Features Programming Procedures Step Console PC 4 Continued a lf next group Enter F10 extension number is Repeat steps Repeat steps not sequential 2 4 2 4 m o save entry and exit nter F10 when all entries are nE F5 complete xl Exit F5 Group Calling External Alert for Calls In Queue Alarm Step Console PC 1
477. y i SSS circuit switched data call common channel signaling A data call made via a CCS connection exclusively Signaling in which one established and maintained channel of a group of between data stations for the channels carries signaling duration of the data call information for each of the remaining channels os ermitting each of the The operation of digital Fernie channels to be facilities from a common used to nearly full capacity In clock the system s DS1 module channel 24 can be designated as the signaling clock synchronization coaxial cable A cable consisting of one conductor usually a small copper tube or wire within and insulated from another conductor of large diameter usually copper tubing or channel for channels 1 23 by selecting common channel for emulated service when programming the system CCS must be used for ISDN PRI service copper braid codec coder decoder A device used to convert analog signals such as speech music or television to digital form for transmission over a digital medium and back to the original analog form CO line trunk jack A jack that connects an outside line trunk to the communications system control unit GL 6 Glossary Glossary A communications system The software controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones and or keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both inside and outside the system The comm
478. y to the called station calling group or outgoing trunk pool bypassing the system operator Direct Station Selector DSS A 60 button adjunct that enhances the call handling capabilities of an MLX 20L telephone or MLX 28D telephone when used as an operator console display buttons The buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone s display Glossary GL 9 Glossary door answering unit A device that is connected to a basic telephone jack and used at an unattended station or front desk DSO Digital Signal 0 A single 64 kbps voice or data channel DS1 Digital Signal 1 A bit oriented signaling BOS interface that multiplexes 24 64 kbps channels into a single 1 544 Mbps stream dual tone multifrequency DTMF signaling Touch tone signaling from telephones using the voice transmission path The code for DTMF signaling provides 12 distinct signals each composed of two voice band frequencies E E and M signaling Tie trunk supervisory signaling used between two communications systems in which information is transferred through two state voltage conditions on the E and M leads for analog applications and through two bits for digital applications GL 10 Glossary E i EIA Electronic Industries Association A trade association of the electronics industry that sets electrical and functional standards electronic switching system ESS A class of modern switch
479. y but are also provided with an MFM When additional CU carrier power is required and the system is backed up by an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS the Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 should also be connected to this UPS The total length of cords between the KS22911 L2 or 329A power supply and the MLX telephone can be no more than 50 feet mw Improper operation can result if the 2 foot D8AC cord packaged with the DSS is replaced with a longer cord 3 108 Telephones and Consoles Installation Procedure Note If you are connecting two DSSs to the telephone unpack the second DSS now 1 Adjust the angle of the DSS see The DSS is packed fully assembled with the desk stand in the low position If you prefer the low position go to step 2 To adjust the angle of the DSS to the high position place the DSS face down on a flat surface and follow these steps a Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab Pull the stand toward you and away from the DSS b To adjust the stand to the high position insert the tab at the bottom of the stand into the other slot c Lower the stand and press the tab at the top into the corresponding slot on the DSS 2 Install the D8AC cord on the DSS see a There are two jacks on the DSS labeled IN and OUT Plug one end of the D8AC cord into the jack labeled IN b Route the D8AC cord through the cord channel on the left side of the DSS a If you are installing o
480. y s receive pall 5 looped back to the transmit pair This simplifies troubleshooting the T1 acility In most installations the network interface is connected through a cross connect field to the CU However for systems with fewer than 24 stations the line trunk wires can be directly connected to the CU Note When constructing wiring fields between the network interface and the CU you must order hardware as individual parts Do not use Interconnect Wiring or SYSTIMAX kits 3 80 System Wiring Installation RJ 21X Interface The RJ21X interface has a female 50 pin 25 pair amphenol connector see Figure 38 To connect the RJ21 X interface to the CU you must build a wiring field between the RJ21X interface and the CU This field in effect converts the female amphenol connector to 8 wire modular jacks Building the Wiring Field Build the wiring field between the network interface and the CU by using 110AB1 100JP12 terminal blocks with modular jacks and associated hardware Use the hardware and procedure below to build this wiring field Hardware see F igure 39 m 110AB1 100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks m 110A1 wire troughs m D rings m D2R cords Tools see F igure 40 m D impact tool m spudger m hand tools Procedure Follow these steps to connect the RJ21X network interface to the CU 1 Drill two diagonally opposite holes in a suitable backboard plywood is recommended for each piece o
481. ynchronous DCE configuration stand alone multipurpose enhancement DCE configuration stand alone single port asynchronous DCE configuration ISDN BRI ISDN PRI 1 54 1 55 1 60 ___ J Jack labels Jumper settings 3 106 Jumpers 3 105 K Key mode KS22911 L2 power unit 3 103 3 105 3 108 3 110 IN 8 Index L Labeling Extension Director Group Calling lines or trunks Posted Message System Speed Dial System Directory Last 10 system errors 5 3 sSY Lightning protection Line build out 3 30 0 Cd i i 1 57 copy line trunk assignments copy line trunk options 4 40 lt dial signaling for loop maintenance busy conditions causing programming Index Lines trunks cont d problems manual correction outgoing line trunk 5 42 QCC operator to receive calls QCC queue priority 4 35 Remote Call Forward and Coverage testing CO lines trunks 3 84 trunks to pools assignment type of trunk on 400 GS LS 408 GS LS or 800 GS LS testing 3 121 Loudspeaker Paging 4 110 M Magic on Hold B57 Maintenance 100D module 100D module selections clock 5 21 error events automatic tests demand tests equipment 5 2 Pe error logs Maintenance cont d line trunk and_station selections 7 on site 5 7 Megacom WATS 47 i y Menu selection screen 4 7 MERLIN Il reusable hardware 4 230 MERLIN Il System Displa Cons
482. ype coverage group number nn F10 F8 Repeat step 3 F5 F3 Repeat steps 2 4 Optional Group Assigned Features 4 163 Programming Procedures Step 4 Continued To assign calling group as receiver for coverage group and assign another calling group as receiver for another coverage group m f next calling group extension number is sequential m If next calling group extension number is not sequential Console Next Repeat step 3 Enter GrpCoverage Repeat steps 2 4 To assign calling group as Enter receiver when all entries are complete 5 Exit Exit Exit Exit 4 164 Optional Group Assigned Features PC F9 Repeat step 3 F10 F3 Repeat steps 2 4 F10 F5 F5 F5 Programming Procedures Group Calling Overflow and Threshold Step Console PC 1 Display Group Calling Becesceene F6 menu and select Grour Calling Overflow More PgUp Coverage Grp Calling F4 Overflow F6 2 Identify calling group to Dial calling Type calling program and save entry group exten group exten sion no Nnnn sion no nnnn or Press DSS button for extension no Enter F10 3 Identify calling group or Dial extension Type extension QCC listed directory no nnnn no nnnn number to assign for or backup coverage for Press DSS calling group button for extension no 4 To assign extension to Enter F10 provide backup coverage To remove extension as Delete F 8 backu
483. ystem Error Log Select the error log desired Make a selection for example Permanent Last 10 aan pi Note The most recent most recent alarm alarm message stays on the Exit System Error Log screen until it is replaced by another one The error information Permanent Errors aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa appears Slotxx Portxx Countxxx First mm dd yy hh mm Last mm dd yy hh mm Code XXXX Exit gt System Status The System Status screen displays the simulated LED status for each module except the power supply modules Select System from the main menu Maintenance 5 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ee _____ Select Status System Make a selection Status Error Log Inventory Exit The screen appears with simulated LEDs for each module for red yellow and green Press the More button to display more modules up to 17 If a slot is empty R Y and G will appear but not on or off System Status Slot00 Raaa Slot0l Raaa Yaaa Gaaa Slot02 Raaa Yaaa Gaaa Slot03 Raaa Yaaa Gaaa SlotC14 R Y G Exit gt System Inventory System Inventory shows the vintage of the hardware and software and the ROM ID Select System from the main menu System Select Inventory Make a selection Status Error Log Inventory Exit System Inventory The processor module Slot 00 Board XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Hardware Vintage xx LEGEND R1 ID xx D1D1D1

Merlin Legend R1 Installation Programming and Maintenance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents